527323
256
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/270
Next page
Inglés 1M6012003BA (09.05)
(GT9)
leon
Owner’s manual
leon
Inglés 1M6012003BA (09.05)
INTRODUCTION ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
1
TThhiiss oowwnneerrss MMaannuuaall
and the Supplements provided should be
read carefully so that you can quickly
become familiar with the controls and
operation of your vehicle.
As well as care and regular maintenance,
correct handling helps maintain the car’s
value.
FFoorr ssaaffeettyy rreeaassoonnss pplleeaassee nnoottee aallssoo
tthhee iinnffoorrmmaattiioonn oonnAAcccceessssoorriieess,,
mmooddiiffiiccaattiioonnss aanndd rreeppllaacceemmeenntt ooff
ppaarrttss..
OOnnee ffiinnaall rreeqquueesstt::
Please pass the complete vehicle wallet
on to the new owner of your vehicle if you
should sell it, as the vehicle literature
belongs to the vehicle.
ON BOARD LITERATURE
RRaannggee ooff eeqquuiippmmeenntt
It describes the largest possible range of
equipment envisaged at the time of going
to press. Some of the equipment may not
be available until later or will only be
available in certain markets.
Items of equipment marked with
this symbol are only available
on certain model versions or are
only available as optional extras on cer-
tain models or are only available in cer-
tain markets.
EEnnvviirroonnmmeennttaall nnootteess
TTeexxttss ffoolllloowwiinngg tthhiiss ssyymmbbooll
aanndd pprriinntteedd iinn iittaalliiccss aarree iimmppoorr--
ttaanntt nnootteess oonn eennvviirroonnmmeennttaall
pprrootteeccttiioonn..
CCoonntteennttss
On the next few pages you will find a con-
tents list which lists all of the points
detailed in this Owner’s Manual in order.
AAllpphhaabbeettiiccaall iinnddeexx
At the end of the manual you will find a
comprehensive alphabetical index.
You can find desired information quickly
by looking for the key in the index.
NNootteess oonn ddiirreeccttiioonn
Apart from exceptions, all notes on the
direction (left, right, front, rear) in this
manual always refer to the vehicle’s direc-
tion of travel.
Exception: possible specific steering
descriptions.
WWaarrnniinngg nnootteess
AAllll bblloocckkss ooff tteexxtt iinn bboolldd pprriinntt,, wwiitthh
tthhiiss ccoolloouurr bbaacckkggrroouunndd aanndd tthhee
ttiittlleeWWaarrnniinngg rreeffeerr ttoo ppootteennttiiaall
aacccciiddeenntt oorr iinnjjuurryy rriisskkss..
TTeexxtt iinn bboolldd pprriinntt wwaarrnnss aaggaaiinnsstt ppooss--
ssiibbllee ddaammaaggee ttoo tthhee vveehhiiccllee oorr nnootteess
ppaarrttiiccuullaarrllyy iimmppoorrttaanntt iinnffoorrmmaattiioonn oonn
hhooww ttoo ttrreeaatt yyoouurr vveehhiiccllee ccoorrrreeccttllyy..
OOffffiicciiaall SSEEAATT sseerrvviiccee
TThhee SSEEAATT DDeeaalleerrss,, WWoorrkksshhooppss aanndd
OOffffiicciiaall SSeerrvviiccee CCeennttrreess hhaavvee tthhee mmoosstt
ssuuiittaabbllee ssppeecciiffiicc ttoooollss aanndd ssttaattee--ooff--
tthhee--aarrtt tteecchhnnoollooggyy aanndd ssppeecciiaalliisseedd
ssttaaffff ttoo ddeeaall wwiitthh aanndd rreeppaaiirr aannyy pprroobb--
lleemm oorr ffaauulltt tthhaatt mmaayy bbeeffaallll yyoouurr SSEEAATT
vveehhiiccllee,, gguuaarraanntteeeeiinngg rreeppaaiirrss iinnssiiddee
oorr oouuttssiiddee wwaarrrraannttyy,, aanndd uussiinngg oonnllyy
ggeennuuiinnee ssppaarreess..
DDoo nnoott hheessiittaattee ttoo ccoonnttaacctt yyoouurr
OOffffiicciiaall SSEEAATT SSeerrvviiccee CCeennttrree ffoorr aannyy
qquueessttiioonn tthhaatt aarriisseess iinn tthhee aapppplliiccaa--
ttiioonn oorr iinntteerrpprreettaattiioonn ooff tthhee ooppeerraa--
ttiioonnss aanndd rreevviissiioonnss rreeffeerrrreedd ttoo iinn tthhiiss
mmaannuuaall..
STRUCTURE OF THIS MANUAL
YYoouu sshhoouulldd nnoottee tthheessee ppooiinnttss bbeeffoorree rreeaaddiinngg tthhiiss OOwwnneerrss MMaannuuaall
2
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
3
BBeellooww
we offer a brief summary of the contents
of the chapters that this Instructions
Manual is divided into.
CCoonntteennttss
11..
SSaaffeettyy ffiirrsstt
This chapter provides information on your vehicle’s
passive safety fittings such as seat belts, Air Bags,
child seats and safety and head rests.
22..
HHaannddlliinngg iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss
This chapter provides information on the layout of
the driver’s controls, the different seat adjustments,
how to create a comfortable atmosphere inside the
car, and how to start the engine.
33..
TTiippss aanndd mmaaiinntteennaannccee
Advice on environmentally friendly driving, care and
upkeep of your car and certain breakdowns (such as
changing bulbs) that you can do yourself.
44..
TTeecchhnniiccaall ddaattaa
Numbers, values, dimensions and amounts (fuel
consumption, for instance) of your vehicle.
INDEX
Introduction to the subject. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
Air Bag system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.16
Safety for children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.25
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.32
Head restraints* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.33
SAFETY FIRST –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
1.1
You will find important information, tips
and notes on passive safety in your new
LEON in this chapter.
We have detailed everything you need to
know about, for example, seat belts, Air
Bags, child seats, safety for children and
head restraints.
PPlleeaassee ppaayy ppaarrttiiccuullaarr aatttteennttiioonn ttoo tthhee
nnootteess aanndd wwaarrnniinnggss iinn tthhiiss cchhaapptteerr
iinn yyoouurr oowwnn iinntteerreesstt aanndd iinn tthhee iinntteerr--
eesstt ooff aallll ppaasssseennggeerrss..
PPlleeaassee ddrriivvee ccaarreeffuullllyy..
1.2
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– INTRODUCTION
SAFETY FIRST
IInnttrroodduuccttiioonn ttoo tthhee ssuubbjjeecctt
WWhhyy hhaavvee sseeaatt bbeellttss??
IItt hhaass bbeeeenn pprroovveenn tthhaatt sseeaatt bbeellttss
ggiivvee ggoooodd pprrootteeccttiioonn iinn aacccciiddeennttss.. IInn
mmoosstt ccoouunnttrriieess,, tthheerreeffoorree,, tthhee wweeaarr--
iinngg ooff sseeaatt bbeellttss iiss rreeqquuiirreedd bbyy llaaww..
WWaarrnniinngg
TThhee bbeellttss sshhoouulldd bbee ppuutt oonn
bbeeffoorree eevveerryy jjoouurrnneeyy eevveenn iinn
ttoowwnn ttrraaffffiicc.. TThhiiss aallssoo aapppplliieess ttoo
rreeaarr sseeaattss.. PPrreeggnnaanntt wwoommeenn ttoooo
sshhoouulldd aallwwaayyss wweeaarr aa sseeaatt bbeelltt..
TThhiiss iiss tthhee oonnllyy wwaayy ttoo gguuaarraanntteeee
pprrootteeccttiioonn ffoorr tthhee uunnbboorrnn cchhiilldd!!
FFoorr mmoorree iinnffoorrmmaattiioonn oonn tthhiiss ppooiinntt
pplleeaassee sseeee ppaaggee 11..1111..
TThhee rroouuttiinngg ooff tthhee bbeelltt iiss ooff
mmaajjoorr iimmppoorrttaannccee ttoo tthhee pprrootteeccttiivvee
eeffffeecctt ooff tthhee bbeelltt.. HHooww tthhee bbeelltt
sshhoouulldd bbee wwoorrnn iiss ddeessccrriibbeedd oonn
tthhee nneexxtt ppaaggeess..
This illustration shows a car driving
towards a wall. The vehicle occupants are
not belted in.
The physical principle of a frontal crash is
easy to explain.
As soon as the vehicle is moving, so-
called “kinetic energy” is created by the
movement of the vehicle , in the vehicle
itself as well as in the vehicle occupants.
The extent of the “kinetic energy” effect
depends largely on the speed of the vehi-
cle and on the weight of the vehicle and
the vehicle occupants.
The higher the speed and the greater the
weight of the vehicle, the more energy
must be dispersed should an accident
occur.
SEAT BELTS ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
1.3
SAFETY FIRST
SSeeaatt bbeellttss
B1H-118
The speed of the vehicle is, however, the
more important factor. If, for example, the
speed increases from 25 km/h to
50 km/h, the kinetic energy increases
fourfold!
As the vehicle occupants in our example
are wearing no seat belts, their entire
kinetic energy can only be dispersed
through the crash into the wall, should a
crash occur. The consequences would be
severe or possibly even fatal injuries.
If you are driving at a speed of only
30 km/h to 50 km/h, forces which can
easily exceed 1000 kg are exerted on the
body should an accident occur.
The forces exerted on the body will
increase further at higher speeds, e.g. At
twice the speed the forces increase four-
fold!
Vehicle occupants not wearing their seat
belts are thus not “linked” to their vehi-
cle.
In a frontal crash, these people will con-
tinue to move forward at the same speed
as the vehicle was travelling before the
vehicle crashed!
1.4
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– SEAT BELTS
SAFETY FIRST
B1H-119
1000 kg
LEO-044
In case of a frontal collision accident, the
occupants who are not belted up are
thrown forwards and collide with parts of
the vehicle interior, e.g. the steering
wheel, instrument panel or windscreen.
Vehicle occupants who are not belted in
may even be thrown out of the vehicle.
This could even lead to serious injuries.
The wide spread opinion that you can pro-
tect your body with your hands in the
event of a light accident is not correct.
Even at low speeds of collision, forces
which cannot be deflected act on the
body.
It is also important that occupants sitting
in the rear seats are belted in as they can
also be thrown out of the vehicle in the
event of an accident. Somebody sitting in
the rear and not using a seat belt is
endangering not only himself but also the
occupants of the front seats.
SEAT BELTS ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
1.5
SAFETY FIRST
B1H-160B1H-120
PPrrootteeccttiinngg sseeaatt bbeellttss
Seat belts which are worn properly con-
tribute to the correct seating position of
the vehicle’s occupants. The seat belts
help reduce kinetic energy considerably.
They also prevent uncontrollable move-
ments which can also be the cause of
severe injuries.
Vehicle occupants who wear their seat
belts correctly benefit greatly from the
fact that kinetic energy is absorbed by the
belt. The vehicle front structure and other
passive safety measures, such as the Air
Bag System, also guarantee a reduction
in kinetic energy. The energy created is
thus kept to a low level and the risk of
injury reduced.
Our examples describe frontal crashes.
These physical principles also apply, of
course, to other types of accidents and to
vehicles with the Air Bag System.
This is why you
mmuusstt
put on your seat belt
before every journey, even if you are only
going “just around the corner”. Please
also ensure that your passengers are cor-
rectly belted in.
You have seen how seat belts function in
the case of an accident on previous
pages.
Accident statistics have proven that the
risk of injury is reduced and the chance of
survival in a serious accident is increased
if the seat belt is worn properly.
For this reason, the wearing of seat belts
is a legal requirement in most countries.
The correct method of wearing the seat
belt, and how the Air Bag System func-
tions, is described on the following
pages.
1.6
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– SEAT BELTS
SAFETY FIRST
B1H-123
WWaarrnniinngg nnootteess
TThhee bbeellttss sshhoouulldd bbee ppuutt oonn
bbeeffoorree eeaacchh jjoouurrnneeyy eevveenn iinn
ttoowwnn ttrraaffffiicc!! TThhiiss aallssoo aapppplliieess ttoo
tthhee rreeaarr sseeaattss..
TThhee mmaaxxiimmuumm lleevveell ooff pprrootteeccttiioonn
bbyy tthhee sseeaatt bbeellttss ccaann oonnllyy bbee
aattttaaiinneedd iiff tthhee bbeellttss aarree wwoorrnn pprroopp--
eerrllyy..
PPlleeaassee eennssuurree tthhaatt tthhee bbeellttss aarree
ppuutt oonn eexxaaccttllyy aass ddeessccrriibbeedd iinn tthhiiss
cchhaapptteerr..
PPuuttttiinngg tthhee sseeaatt bbeelltt oonn uunnddeerr--
nneeaatthh yyoouurr aarrmm,, ffoorr eexxaammppllee,,
wwoouulldd ccoonnssiiddeerraabbllyy iinnccrreeaassee tthhee
rriisskk ooff iinnjjuurryy iinn tthhee ccaassee ooff aann aaccccii--
ddeenntt!!
TThhee bbeelltt mmuusstt nnoott bbee ttwwiisstteedd oorr
ccaauugghhtt,, nnoorr sshhoouulldd iitt bbee aalllloowweedd ttoo
rruubb oonn aannyy sshhaarrpp eeddggeess..
TTwwoo ppeeooppllee ((iinncclluuddiinngg cchhiillddrreenn))
mmuusstt nneevveerr bbee sseeccuurreedd wwiitthh oonnee
bbeelltt.. IItt iiss ppaarrttiiccuullaarrllyy ddaannggeerroouuss ttoo
bbeelltt yyoouurr cchhiilldd iinn wwhheenn iitt iiss ssiittttiinngg
oonn yyoouurr llaapp..
TThhee bbeelltt ssttrraapp sshhoouulldd nnoott bbee
wwoorrnn oovveerr hhaarrdd oorr bbrreeaakkaabbllee aarrttii--
cclleess ((ggllaasssseess,, bbaallll ppeennss,, eettcc......)),, aass
iitt mmaayy ccaauussee iinnjjuurriieess..
BBuullkkyy aanndd lloooossee ccllootthhiinngg ((ee..gg..
aann oovveerrccooaatt oonn ttoopp ooff aa jjaacckkeett)),,
hhiinnddeerr ccoorrrreecctt ffiittttiinngg aanndd wwoorrkkiinngg
ooff tthhee sseeaatt bbeelltt..
IInn oorrddeerr ttoo aacchhiieevvee mmaaxxiimmuumm
bbeelltt pprrootteeccttiioonn ooccccuuppaannttss mmuusstt
bbee pprrooppeerrllyy sseeaatteedd;; cchheecckk aallssoo
tthhee ""FFrroonntt sseeaattss"" cchhaapptteerr..
PPlleeaassee ttaakkee nnoottiiccee ooff tthhee wwaarrnniinngg
nnootteess oonn tthhee nneexxtt ppaaggee..
SEAT BELTS ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
1.7
SAFETY FIRST
B31-151C
YYoouu mmuusstt aallwwaayyss kkeeeepp yyoouurr ffeeeett
iinn tthhee ffoooott wweellll dduurriinngg aa jjoouurrnneeyy
nneevveerr oonn tthhee ddaasshhbbooaarrdd oorr oonn tthhee
sseeaattss..
TThhee bbeellttss mmuusstt bbee kkeepptt cclleeaann aass
ddiirrtt mmaayy aaffffeecctt tthhee pprrooppeerr ffuunnccttiioonn--
iinngg ooff tthhee rreettrraaccttoorrss ((sseeee ""CCaarree aanndd
mmaaiinntteennaannccee"" cchhaapptteerr))..
TThhee sslloott ffoorr tthhee bbeelltt ttoonngguuee mmuusstt
nnoott bbee bblloocckkeedd wwiitthh ppaappeerr oorr aannyy--
tthhiinngg ssiimmiillaarr,, aass tthhee ttoonngguuee ccaann
ootthheerrwwiissee nnoott eennggaaggee pprrooppeerrllyy..
YYoouu sshhoouulldd cchheecckk yyoouurr sseeaatt
bbeellttss rreegguullaarrllyy.. IIff yyoouu ffiinndd aannyy
ddaammaaggee oonn tthhee bbeelltt,, bbeelltt ccoonnnneecc--
ttiioonnss,, rreettrraaccttoorr oorr tthhee lloocckkiinngg
ppiieecceess,, tthhee bbeelltt mmuusstt bbee rreeppllaacceedd
bbyy aa TTeecchhnniiccaall SSeerrvviiccee CCeennttrree..
TThhee sseeaatt bbeellttss mmaayy nnoott bbee
rreemmoovveedd ffrroomm tthhee vveehhiiccllee oorr mmooddii--
ffiieedd iinn aannyy wwaayy.. DDoo nnoott aatttteemmpptt ttoo
rreemmoovvee tthhee sseeaatt bbeellttss yyoouurrsseellff..
BBeellttss wwhhiicchh aarree ssttrreesssseedd aanndd
tthhuuss ssttrreettcchheedd iinn aann aacccciiddeenntt mmuusstt
bbee rreeppllaacceedd bbyy aa TTeecchhnniiccaall SSeerrvviiccee
CCeennttrree.. TThhee bbeelltt aanncchhoorraaggeess sshhoouulldd
bbee cchheecckkeedd..
NNoottee
In some export countries seat belt func-
tions could differ from the 3 point or lap
belts described on the next pages
1.8
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– SEAT BELTS
SAFETY FIRST
HHooww aarree sseeaatt bbeellttss ppuutt oonn
pprrooppeerrllyy??
PPuuttttiinngg 33 ppooiinntt bbeelltt oonn
YYoouu mmuusstt aaddjjuusstt tthhee ffrroonntt sseeaatt ttoo yyoouurr
hheeiigghhtt bbeeffoorree ffaasstteenniinngg tthhee sseeaatt bbeelltt..
SSeeee ""FFrroonntt sseeaattss"" cchhaapptteerr..
For the centre rear seat, it must be taken
into account that the back of the seat
must be perfectly locked in position for
correct functioning of the seatbelt. See
page 2.69.
The inertia reel belt gives complete free-
dom of movement when pulled slowly.
Sudden braking, however, will cause the
belt to lock.
The mechanism will also lock the belt
when accelerating, driving down steep
gradients or cornering.
WWaarrnniinngg
SSeeaatt bbeellttss ccaann oonnllyy ggiivvee tthheeiirr mmaaxx--
iimmuumm pprrootteeccttiioonn iinn aann aacccciiddeenntt iiff
tthhee bbaacckkrreesstt iiss iinn aann uupprriigghhtt ppoossii--
ttiioonn aanndd tthhee bbeelltt iiss ffiitttteedd cclloosseellyy ttoo
tthhee bbooddyy..
Pull belt by the tongue slowly and
smoothly across the chest and hips.
Push the tongue into the locking part of
the seat until it engages audibly
((ppuullll ttoo
tteesstt!!))..
WWaarrnniinngg
TThhee ttoonngguuee mmuusstt bbee pprreesssseedd iinnttoo
lloocckkiinngg ppaarrtt ddeessiiggnnaatteedd ffoorr tthhaatt
sseeaatt aanndd sseeaatt bbeelltt.. TThhee pprrootteeccttiivvee
eeffffeecctt ooff tthhee bbeelltt wwiillll ootthheerrwwiissee bbee
nneeggaattiivveellyy aaffffeecctteedd aanndd tthhee rriisskk ooff
iinnjjuurryy iinnccrreeaasseess!!
SEAT BELTS ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
1.9
SAFETY FIRST
B1H-127
WWaarrnniinngg
TThhee sshhoouullddeerr ppaarrtt ooff tthhee bbeelltt mmuusstt
rruunn rroouugghhllyy aaccrroossss tthhee cceennttrree ooff
tthhee sshhoouullddeerr,, oonn nnoo aaccccoouunntt
aaggaaiinnsstt tthhee nneecckk aanndd mmuusstt aallssoo bbee
ffiirrmmllyy iinn ccoonnttaacctt wwiitthh tthhee bbooddyy..
TThhee llaapp ppaarrtt ooff tthhee bbeelltt mmuusstt ffiitt
ttiigghhttllyy aaccrroossss tthhee ppeellvviiss nnoott
aaccrroossss tthhee ssttoommaacchh.. IIff nneecceessssaarryy,,
ppuullll tthhee bbeelltt ttiigghhtt..
WWaarrnniinngg
PPlleeaassee eennssuurree tthhaatt tthhee sseeaatt bbeelltt
iiss ffiitttteedd pprrooppeerrllyy.. AA sseeaatt bbeelltt wwhhiicchh
iiss wwoorrnn iinnccoorrrreeccttllyy ccoouulldd aallssoo
ccaauussee iinnjjuurryy iinn aann aacccciiddeenntt..
AA sseeaatt bbeelltt wwhhiicchh iiss wwoorrnn ttoooo
lloooosseellyy ccoouulldd ccaauussee iinnjjuurryy aass yyoouurr
kkiinneettiicc eenneerrggyy wwiillll tthhrrooww yyoouurr bbooddyy
ffuurrtthheerr ffoorrwwaarrdd iinn aann aacccciiddeenntt aanndd
iitt wwiillll bbee ccaauugghhtt aabbrruuppttllyy bbyy tthhee
sseeaatt bbeelltt..
1.10
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– SEAT BELTS
SAFETY FIRST
B31-119CB31-167C
With the aid of the
bbeelltt hheeiigghhtt aaddjjuusstt--
mmeenntt
the routing of the shoulder belt for
the front and rear seats can be set to fit
the body properly.
To adjust, push the upper relay fitting
in the direction shown, hold in this posi-
tion and move up or down so that the
shoulder part of belt runs roughly across
the centre of the shoulder as shown in the
left-hand illustration
oonn nnoo aaccccoouunntt
aaggaaiinnsstt tthhee nneecckk..
After adjusting, pull the belt with a jerk
to ensure that the relay fitting is properly
engaged.
NNoottee
The seat height adjustment* can also be
used to adjust belt routing on front seats.
WWaarrnniinngg
PPrreeggnnaanntt wwoommeenn sshhoouulldd aallwwaayyss
wweeaarr aa sseeaatt bbeelltt ttoooo.. TThhee llaapp ppaarrtt
ooff tthhee bbeelltt sshhoouulldd bbee aass llooww aass
ppoossssiibbllee aaccrroossss tthhee ppeellvviiss ssoo tthhaatt
nnoo pprreessssuurree iiss eexxeerrtteedd oonn tthhee
aabbddoommeenn..
SEAT BELTS –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
1.11
SAFETY FIRST
B1H-131TO8-052
TTaakkiinngg tthhrreeee ppooiinntt bbeelltt ooffff
To release the belt, press the red button in
the lock. The tongue will then spring out.
Pass the tongue towards the door by hand
so that the retractor can roll the belt up
properly. A plastic knob in the belt holds
the tongue in a convenient position.
LLaapp bbeelltt**
The centre place on the rear seat is fitted
with a lap belt.
The belt lock is used in the same way as
on the three point inertia reel belts.
For safety reasons a lap belt not being
used should always be connected to the
buckle.
WWaarrnniinngg
TThhee llaapp ppaarrtt ooff tthhee bbeelltt mmuusstt ffiitt
ttiigghhttllyy aaccrroossss tthhee ppeellvviiss nnoott
aaccrroossss tthhee ssttoommaacchh.. IIff nneecceessssaarryy,,
lloooosseenn tthhee bbeelltt..
PPrreeggnnaanntt wwoommeenn sshhoouulldd aallwwaayyss
wweeaarr sseeaatt bbeellttss ttoooo.. TThhee llaapp ppaarrtt ooff
tthhee bbeelltt sshhoouulldd bbee aass llooww aass ppoossssii--
bbllee aaccrroossss tthhee ppeellvviiss ssoo tthhaatt nnoo
pprreessssuurree iiss eexxeerrtteedd oonn tthhee
aabbddoommeenn..
1.12
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– SEAT BELTS
SAFETY FIRST
B1H-133B1H-132
TToo lleennggtthheenn
belt hold the tongue at right
angles to belt and pull belt through to the
required length – see illustrations.
The belt is easier to adjust if tongue and
cap are pressed together.
TToo sshhoorrtteenn
belt it is only necessary to
pull the free end of belt.
The surplus belt length is taken up by
moving the plastic slide.
SEAT BELTS –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
1.13
SAFETY FIRST
B1H-134B1H-135
BBeelltt tteennssiioonneerr**
Safety for the
bbeelltteedd--iinn
driver and front
passenger is increased by the belt ten-
sioners fitted to the inertia reels of the
front 3 point seatbelts to supplement the
Air Bag.
In case of a severe frontal collision the
system is activated by sensors which fire
a pyrotechnic charge in the two automatic
tightening devices.
This makes the devices roll up and tighten
the tensioners.
WWaarrnniinngg
AAnnyy rreeppaaiirr wwoorrkk oonn tthhee tteennssiioonneerr
ssyysstteemm oorr tthhee rreemmoovvaall oorr iinnssttaallllaa--
ttiioonn ooff ssyysstteemm ccoommppoonneennttss ffoorr
ootthheerr rreeppaaiirr wwoorrkk sshhoouulldd bbee ccaarr--
rriieedd oouutt bbyy aa TTeecchhnniiccaall SSeerrvviiccee
CCeennttrree..
TThhee pprrootteeccttiivvee ffuunnccttiioonn ooff tthhee
bbeelltt tteennssiioonneerr iiss ccaappaabbllee ooff ooppeerr--
aattiinngg oonnllyy oonnccee.. IIff tthhee bbeelltt tteenn--
ssiioonneerrss hhaavvee bbeeeenn aaccttiivvaatteedd aatt aannyy
ttiimmee,, tthhee ssyysstteemm mmuusstt bbee rreenneewweedd..
IIff yyoouu sseellll tthhee vveehhiiccllee,, pplleeaassee ppaassss
oonn tthhiiss MMaannuuaall ttoo tthhee nneeww oowwnneerr..
NNootteess
Smoke is released when the tensioners
are activated. This smoke does not indi-
cate a fire in the vehicle.
It is of utmost importance to observe
the relevant safety regulations when the
vehicle or components of the system are
scrapped. Technical Service Centres are
familiar with these regulations.
1.14
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– SEAT BELTS
SAFETY FIRST
AAttttaacchh cchhiilldd sseeaatt
WWaarrnniinngg
AA cchhiilldd sseeaatt iinn wwhhiicchh tthhee cchhiilldd ssiittss
wwiitthh iittss bbaacckk ttoo tthhee ddiirreeccttiioonn ooff
ttrraavveell mmaayy oonnllyy bbee uusseedd iiff tthhee ppaass--
sseennggeerr ssiiddee AAiirr BBaagg hhaass bbeeeenn
ddeeaaccttiivvaatteedd bbyy aa TTeecchhnniiccaall SSeerrvviiccee
CCeennttrree.. OOtthheerrwwiissee tthhee cchhiilldd wwoouulldd
bbee iinn ggrreeaatt ddaannggeerr..
AAsskk yyoouurr TTeecchhnniiccaall SSeerrvviiccee CCeennttrree
aabboouutt tthhee ccoonnvveerrssiioonn..
AAss ssoooonn aass tthhee cchhiilldd sseeaatt iiss nnoo lloonnggeerr
nneeeeddeedd,, tthhee ppaasssseennggeerr ssiiddee AAiirr BBaagg
sshhoouulldd bbee mmaaddee ooppeerraattiioonnaall aaggaaiinn bbyy
aa TTeecchhnniiccaall SSeerrvviiccee CCeennttrree..
CChhiilldd sseeaatt ssaaffeettyy lloocckk**
TThhee tthhrreeee ppooiinntt ssaaffeettyy bbeelltt** iinn tthhee
mmiiddddllee ooff tthhee rreeaarr ooff ssoommee mmooddeell vveerr--
ssiioonnss sseeaatt mmaayy bbee bblloocckkeedd ccoonn--
ssttaannttllyy.. TThhiiss eennssuurreess tthhaatt tthhee cchhiilldd
sseeaatt iiss pprrooppeerrllyy ffiixxeedd iinn tthhee ccaarr..
AAccttiivvaattiinngg cchhiilldd sseeaatt bbeelltt lloocckk**
Secure your child seat with the belt fol-
lowing the instructions given by the man-
ufacturer.
Pull out the shoulder part of the belt
fully.
Roll the belt back in until it lies tightly
against the child seat. A “clicking” noise
will be heard when the belt is rolling in.
The belt can now no longer be pulled out
ppuullll ttoo tteesstt!!
DDeeaaccttiivvaattiinngg cchhiilldd sseeaatt bbeelltt lloocckk**
Press the red button in the lock part. The
tongue will be released from the locking
part. The child seat belt lock is automati-
cally deactivated when the belt is fully
rolled up.
SEAT BELTS –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
1.15
SAFETY FIRST
1.16
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– AIR BAG
SAFETY FIRST
SSuupppplleemmeennttiinngg tthhee tthhrreeee--ppooiinntt sseeaatt
bbeellttss,, tthhee AAiirr BBaagg ssyysstteemm
offers addi-
tional protection for the driver’s and pas-
senger’s head and chest in a serious
frontal collision.
In serious lateral collisions the side Air
Bags reduce the risk of injury to the body
parts exposed to the danger for the front
seat occupants.
The Air Bag system is not a replacement
for the seat belt, but it is rather one part
of the passive safety concept of the vehi-
cle. Please note that the best possible
protection to be offered by the Air Bag
system can only be effective when the
seat belts are fastened.
TThheerreeffoorree,, tthhee sseeaatt bbeellttss sshhoouulldd
aallwwaayyss bbee uusseedd,, nnoott oonnllyy ffoorr rreeaassoonnss
ooff ssttaattuuttoorryy rreegguullaattiioonnss,, bbuutt aallssoo ffoorr
ssaaffeettyy..
AAllssoo bbeeaarr iinn mmiinndd tthhee iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss
ffrroomm tthhee ""SSeeaatt bbeellttss"" cchhaapptteerr..
1)
This equipment may vary according to the
country.
The
ddrriivveerrss ffrroonntt AAiirr BBaagg
is located in
the central cushioned part of the steering
wheel.
The
ppaasssseennggeerrss ffrroonntt AAiirr BBaagg
is
located in the dash panel above the glove
compartment.
Both are marked with "AIR BAG".
WWaarrnniinngg
TThhee sseeaatt bbeellttss aanndd AAiirr BBaagg ssyysstteemm
oonnllyy ooffffeerr mmaaxxiimmuumm pprrootteeccttiioonn
wwhheenn sseeaatteedd ccoorrrreeccttllyy..
AAiirr BBaagg ssyysstteemm
11))
TO8-051
AIRBAG
LEO-000
SAFETY FIRST
AIR BAG –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
1.17
The
ssiiddee AAiirr BBaaggss
are located on the
backside of the front seats (see figure)
and are marked with "AIR BAG" on the
upper part of the back.
CCoommppoonneennttss ooff tthhee ssyysstteemm
The system basically consists of:
an electronic control and monitoring
unit (control unit)
two front Air Bags
two side Air Bags
a warning lamp in the instrument panel.
AAiirr BBaagg ffuunnccttiioonnss aarree ccoonnttrroolllleedd eelleecc--
ttrroonniiccaallllyy::
Each time that the ignition is turned on,
the Air Bag warning light will light for
about 3 seconds.
If at least one of the Air Bag devices is
deactivated, the warning light will flash
for approx. 12 seconds.
TThheerree iiss aa ddeeffeecctt iinn tthhee ssyysstteemm iiff
When switching on the ignition the
warning lamp does not light.
Following the connection of the igni-
tion, the warning light will not go off until
after approx. 3 seconds.
After the ignition is switched on the
warning lamp goes out and comes back
on.
The warning lamp lights or flashes
while driving.
WWaarrnniinngg
WWhheenn aa ddeeffeecctt iiss pprreesseenntt tthhee ssyyss--
tteemm nneeeeddss ttoo bbee cchheecckkeedd iimmmmeeddii--
aatteellyy bbyy aa TTeecchhnniiccaall SSeerrvviiccee
CCeennttrree.. FFaaiilluurree ttoo ddoo ssoo wwiillll jjeeooppaarr--
ddiissee pprrooppeerr ffuunnccttiioonniinngg ooff tthhee AAiirr
BBaagg iinn tthhee ccaassee ooff aann aacccciiddeenntt..
B1H-209
WWhheenn aarree tthhee AAiirr BBaaggss aaccttiivvaatteedd??
The Air Bag system is designed so that
the driver’s side Air Bag and Passenger’s
side Air Bag are triggered in case of a
sseerriioouuss ffrroonnttaall ccoolllliissiioonn
.
In a
sseerriioouuss ssiiddee--oonn ccoolllliissiioonn
, the cor-
responding side
1)
Air Bag is triggered.
IInn cceerrttaaiinn kkiinnddss ooff aacccciiddeennttss,, bbootthh tthhee
ffrroonntt aanndd tthhee ssiiddee
11))
AAiirr BBaaggss ccoouulldd bbee
ttrriiggggeerreedd..
The Air Bag system
wwiillll nnoott bbee ttrriiggggeerreedd
in case of light frontal and lateral colli-
sions, rear collisions and
oovveerrttuurrnniinngg
. In
these cases, the vehicles occupants are
protected in the conventional way by the
seat belts.
It is not possible to define globally when
exactly the Air Bag system will be trig-
gered given that the circumstances of
each impact may vary enormously.
During inflation, the Air Bag emits a fine
dust. This is quite normal and there is no
fire risk.
1)
This equipment may vary according to the
country.
FFrroonnttaall AAiirr BBaagg
11))
When the system is triggered, the bags
are inflated by gas opening in front of the
driver and passenger.
The Air Bag inflation is considerably rapid
and takes fractions of a second, to offer
the best protection in the case of an acci-
dent.
IInnffoorrmmaattiioonn aabboouutt tthhee ooppeerraattiioonn aanndd
ppoossssiibbllee ffaauullttss ooff tthhee ssyysstteemm mmaayy bbee
ffoouunndd oonn tthhee pprreevviioouuss ppaaggee..
PPlleeaassee ttaakkee nnoottiiccee ooff tthhee wwaarrnniinngg
nnootteess oonn tthhee nneexxtt ppaaggee
1.18
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– AIR BAG
SAFETY FIRST
B1H-194
AIR BAG –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
1.19
SAFETY FIRST
WWaarrnniinngg nnootteess
IItt iiss iimmppoorrttaanntt ttoo mmaaiinnttaaiinn aa ddiiss--
ttaannccee ooff aatt lleeaasstt 2255 ccmm ffrroomm tthhee
sstteeeerriinngg wwhheeeell oorr iinnssttrruummeenntt
ppaanneell ssoo tthhaatt tthhee ffrroonntt sseeaatt ooccccuu--
ppaannttss hhaavvee tthhee bbeesstt ppoossssiibbllee
eeffffeeccttiivvee pprrootteeccttiioonn iiff tthhee ssyysstteemm
iiss ttrriiggggeerreedd.. TThhee ffrroonntt sseeaattss mmuusstt
aallwwaayyss bbee ccoorrrreeccttllyy aaddjjuusstteedd ttoo tthhee
bbooddyy hheeiigghhtt..
IIff yyoouu aarree nnoott wweeaarriinngg aa sseeaatt bbeelltt
oorr lleeaann ffoorrwwaarrdd wwhhiillsstt ddrriivviinngg oorr
aarree ssiittttiinngg iinn tthhee wwrroonngg ppoossiittiioonn,,
yyoouu aarree ooppeenn ttoo aa hhiigghheerr rriisskk ooff
iinnjjuurryy iinn aann aacccciiddeenntt wwhheenn tthhee AAiirr
BBaagg SSyysstteemm iinnffllaatteess..
CChhiillddrreenn mmuusstt nneevveerr bbee aalllloowweedd ttoo
ssiitt uunnsseeccuurreedd oonn tthhee ffrroonntt sseeaatt
wwhhiillsstt tthhee vveehhiiccllee iiss iinn mmoottiioonn.. IIff tthhee
AAiirr BBaagg SSyysstteemm iiss ttrriiggggeerreedd dduurriinngg
aann aacccciiddeenntt,, cchhiillddrreenn ccoouulldd bbee sseerrii--
oouussllyy iinnjjuurreedd oorr kkiilllleedd.. FFoorr ffuurrtthheerr
iimmppoorrttaanntt ppooiinnttss pplleeaassee rreeffeerr ttoo tthhee
cchhaapptteerr oonnSSaaffeettyy ffoorr cchhiillddrreenn..
NNoo ppeerrssoonnss,, aanniimmaallss oorr oobbjjeeccttss
sshhoouulldd bbee llooccaatteedd bbeettwweeeenn tthhee
ffrroonntt--sseeaatt ooccccuuppaannttss aanndd tthhee eeffffeecc--
ttiivvee rraannggee ooff tthhee AAiirr BBaaggss..
TThhee pprrootteeccttiivvee ffuunnccttiioonn ooff tthhee AAiirr
BBaagg wwiillll oonnllyy bbee ttrriiggggeerreedd ffoorr oonnee
aacccciiddeenntt.. IIff tthhee AAiirr BBaagg hhaass bbeeeenn
ttrriiggggeerreedd,, tthhee ssyysstteemm mmuusstt bbee
rreeppllaacceedd..
TThhee sstteeeerriinngg wwhheeeell ppaaddddeedd ppllaattee
aanndd tthhee ppaaddddeedd ssuurrffaaccee ooff tthhee AAiirr
BBaagg mmoodduullee oonn tthhee ppaasssseennggeerr ssiiddee
ooff ddaasshh ppaanneell mmuusstt nnoott hhaavvee ssttiicckkeerrss
aattttaacchheedd,, nnoorr sshhoouulldd tthheeyy bbee ccoovv--
eerreedd oorr rree--wwoorrkkeedd iinn aannyy ootthheerr wwaayy..
TThheessee ppaarrttss sshhoouulldd oonnllyy bbee cclleeaanneedd
wwiitthh aa ddrryy ccllootthh oorr aa ccllootthh mmooiisstteenneedd
wwiitthh wwaatteerr.. NNoo ootthheerr iitteemmss ssuucchh aass,,
ffoorr eexxaammppllee,, tteelleepphhoonnee oorr ccuupp
hhoollddeerrss sshhoouulldd bbee aattttaacchheedd ttoo tthhee
AAiirr BBaagg mmoodduullee..
NNoo mmooddiiffiiccaattiioonnss ooff aannyy kkiinndd
mmaayy bbee uunnddeerrttaakkeenn oonn tthhee ppaarrttss ooff
tthhee AAiirr BBaagg SSyysstteemm.. AAllll wwoorrkk oonn tthhee
AAiirr BBaagg ssyysstteemm,, iinncclluuddiinngg tthhee
rreemmoovvaall aanndd iinnssttaallllaattiioonn ooff ssyysstteemm
ppaarrttss dduurriinngg ootthheerr rreeppaaiirr wwoorrkk ((eexx..::
rreemmoovviinngg sstteeeerriinngg wwhheeeell)),, sshhoouulldd
oonnllyy bbee ccaarrrriieedd oouutt bbyy aa TTeecchhnniiccaall
SSeerrvviiccee CCeennttrree..
NNoottee
If the vehicle or individual parts of the Air
Bag system is scrapped, one must always
observe the relevant valid safety regula-
tions. Technical Service Centres are famil-
iar with these regulations.
SSiiddee AAiirr BBaagg
11))
When the system is triggered, the bags
inflate using gas.
The Air Bag inflates in a split second to be
able to offer additional protection during
an accident.
OOnn ppaaggee 11..1177 yyoouu wwiillll ffiinndd nnootteess oonn
tthhee ffuunnccttiioonn aanndd ppoossssiibbllee ddeeffeeccttss iinn
tthhee ssyysstteemm..
1)
This equipment may vary according to the
country.
WWaarrnniinngg nnootteess
WWaarrnniinngg
AAnnyy rreeppaaiirrss ttoo tthhee ssiiddee AAiirr BBaagg,,
ssuucchh aass tthhee rreemmoovvaall oorr aasssseemmbbllyy
ooff aannyy ssyysstteemm ccoommppoonneenntt iinn ccoonn--
nneeccttiioonn wwiitthh aannyy ootthheerr rreeppaaiirr wwoorrkk
((ee..gg.. rreemmoovviinngg tthhee ffrroonntt sseeaatt)),,
sshhoouulldd oonnllyy bbee ppeerrffoorrmmeedd bbyy aa
TTeecchhnniiccaall SSeerrvviiccee CCeennttrree.. TThhee ccoorr--
rreecctt ffuunnccttiioonniinngg ooff tthhee AAiirr BBaagg ssyyss--
tteemm ccoouulldd ootthheerrwwiissee bbee aaddvveerrsseellyy
aaffffeecctteedd..
IIff tthhee sseeaattbbeelltt iiss nnoott wwoorrnn oorr aann
iinnccoorrrreecctt sseeaattiinngg ppoossiittiioonn iiss
aaddaapptteedd ((ffoorr eexxaammppllee lleeaanniinngg ttoo
oonnee ssiiddee)) dduurriinngg aa vvooyyaaggee,, tthheerree iiss
aa hhiigghheerr rriisskk ooff iinnjjuurryy dduuee ttoo tthhee
ddeeppllooyymmeenntt ooff tthhee AAiirr BBaagg iinn tthhee
ccaassee ooff aann aacccciiddeenntt..
TToo gguuaarraanntteeee aa mmaaxxiimmuumm ooff pprroo--
tteeccttiioonn ffrroomm tthhee llaatteerraall AAiirr BBaagg,, aa
ccoorrrreecctt sseeaattiinngg ppoossiittiioonn sshhoouulldd bbee
aaddaapptteedd aanndd tthhee sseeaattbbeelltt sshhoouulldd
aallwwaayyss bbee wwoorrnn..
TThheerree sshhoouulldd bbee nnoo ppeerrssoonn,, aannii--
mmaall oorr oobbjjeecctt bbeettwweeeenn tthhee ffrroonntt
ppaasssseennggeerrss aanndd tthhee aaccttiioonn zzoonnee ooff
tthhee AAiirr BBaagg.. AAllssoo,, nnoo aacccceessssoorryy oorr
aannyy ootthheerr oobbjjeecctt sshhoouulldd bbee
iinnssttaalllleedd iinn tthhee ddeeppllooyymmeenntt aarreeaa
ooff tthhee llaatteerraall AAiirr BBaagg tthhaatt mmaayy
iimmppeeddee iittss ooppeerraattiioonn oorr eevveenn
ccaauussee iinnjjuurryy ttoo tthhee ooccccuuppaannttss ooff
tthhee vveehhiiccllee..
PPlleeaassee ttaakkee nnoottiiccee ooff tthhee wwaarrnniinngg
nnootteess oonn tthhee nneexxtt ppaaggee..
1.20
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– AIR BAG
SAFETY FIRST
B1H-210
AIR BAG –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
1.21
SAFETY FIRST
OOnnllyy lliigghhtt aarrttiicclleess ooff ccllootthhiinngg
sshhoouulldd bbee hhuunngg oonn tthhee ccooaatt hhooookkss..
NNoo hheeaavvyy oorr sshhaarrpp--eeddggeedd iitteemmss
sshhoouulldd bbee lleefftt iinn tthhee ppoocckkeettss..
NNoo eexxcceessssiivvee pprreessssuurree sshhoouulldd
bbee aapppplliieedd ttoo tthhee ssiiddeess ooff tthhee
bbaacckkrreesstt,, nnoorr sshhoouulldd tthheeyy bbee ssuubb--
jjeecctteedd ttoo uunndduuee ppuusshhiinngg oorr sshhoovv--
iinngg eettcc.. aass tthhee ssyysstteemm ccoouulldd bbee
ddaammaaggeedd aass aa rreessuulltt.. TThhee ssiiddee AAiirr
BBaaggss wwoouulldd nnoott bbee ttrriiggggeerreedd
sshhoouulldd tthhiiss hhaappppeenn!!
DDoo nnoott ffiitt sseeaatt ccoovveerrss oonn tthhee ddrrii--
vveerrss oorr ppaasssseennggeerr sseeaatt.. OOtthheerr--
wwiissee,, tthhee ffuunnccttiioonniinngg ooff tthhee ssiiddee
AAiirr BBaagg ccoouulldd bbee lliimmiitteedd ssiinnccee iitt
ccoouulldd nnoott ccoommee oouutt ooff tthhee sseeaatt
bbaacckk.. FFoorr ffuurrtthheerr nnootteess rreeffeerr ttoo tthhee
cchhaapptteerrAAcccceessssoorriieess,, mmooddiiffiiccaa--
ttiioonnss aanndd rreeppllaacceemmeenntt ooff ppaarrttss..
AAnnyy ddaammaaggee ttoo tthhee oorriiggiinnaall sseeaatt
ccoovveerrss oorr ttoo tthhee sseeaamm iinn tthhee mmoodd--
uullee aarreeaa ooff tthhee ssiiddee AAiirr BBaagg mmuusstt
bbee rreeppaaiirreedd aass ssoooonn aass ppoossssiibbllee bbyy
aannyy TTeecchhnniiccaall SSeerrvviiccee CCeennttrree..
TThhee pprrootteeccttiivvee ffuunnccttiioonn ooff tthhee AAiirr
BBaagg wwiillll oonnllyy bbee ttrriiggggeerreedd ffoorr oonnee
aacccciiddeenntt.. IIff tthhee AAiirr BBaagg hhaass bbeeeenn
ttrriiggggeerreedd,, tthhee ssyysstteemm mmuusstt bbee
rreeppllaacceedd..
IIff cchhiillddrreenn aarree lleeaanniinngg ttoo oonnee
ssiiddee oorr aaddaapptt aann iinnccoorrrreecctt ppoossiittiioonn
dduurriinngg aa vvooyyaaggee,, tthheeyy aarree aauuttoo--
mmaattiiccaallllyy eexxppoosseedd ttoo aa hhiigghheerr rriisskk
ooff iinnjjuurryy iinn tthhee eevveenntt ooff aann aaccccii--
ddeenntt eessppeecciiaallllyy iiff tthheeyy aarree sseeaatteedd
iinn tthhee ppaasssseennggeerr sseeaatt.. TThheeyy mmaayy
bbee sseerriioouussllyy iinnjjuurreedd oorr eevveenn kkiilllleedd
aass aa rreessuulltt..
1.22
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– AIR BAG
SAFETY FIRST
DDeeaaccttiivvaattee AAiirr BBaaggss
AAiirr BBaaggss mmuusstt nnoott bbee ddeeaaccttiivvaatteedd
uunnlleessss tthheerree aarree ssppeecciiffiicc rreeaassoonnss ttoo
ddoo ssoo,, ssuucchh aass::
in the
eexxcceeppttiioonnaall ccaassee
where it may
become necessary to use a child seat in
the passenger seat, where the child is fac-
ing backwards.
if it is not possible to keep a minimum
distance of 25 cm between the center of
the steering wheel and the breastbone
even though the driver’s seat is in the cor-
rect position.
if handicapped people need special
equipment in the steering wheel area.
if special seats are fitted (i.e. orthope-
dic seats without side Air Bags).
See the Technical Services for information
about which Air Bags may be deactivated
in your vehicle.
If you yourself disconnect the passenger
Air Bag using the
kkeeyy lloocckk sswwiittcchh
1)
(fol-
lowing page), an “
AAIIRR BBAAGG OOFFFF
” warning
light will constantly remind you that the
Air Bag is deactivated.
AAllwwaayyss aaccttiivvaattee tthhee AAiirr BBaaggss wwhheenn
ppoossssiibbllee,, ttoo pprrootteecctt tthhee ooccccuuppaannttss ooff
tthhee vveehhiiccllee iinn ccaassee ooff aa ccoolllliissiioonn..
1)
This equipment will vary according to the coun-
try.
DDeeaaccttiivvaattiioonn ooff tthhee ppaasssseennggeerr AAiirr
BBaagg ffoorr tthhee iinnssttaallllaattiioonn ooff aa cchhiilldd
sseeaatt
In the exceptional case where it may
become necessary to use a child seat in
the passenger seat, where the child is fac-
ing backwards, it is essential to deacti-
vate the passenger Air Bag.
We still recommend the installation of the
child seat
uunniiqquueellyy oonn tthhee rreeaarr ppaasssseenn--
ggeerr sseeaatt
, and to avoid the need to deac-
tivate the passenger Air Bag.
IIff uussee ooff tthhee cchhiilldd sseeaatt hhaass cceeaasseedd,,
tthhee ppaasssseennggeerr AAiirr BBaagg mmuusstt bbee rreeccoonn--
nneecctteedd..
BBeeffoorree tthhee uussee ooff cchhiilldd sseeaattss,, pplleeaassee
rreeaadd ccaarreeffuullllyy tthhee sseeccttiioonn oonn ""SSaaffeettyy
ffoorr cchhiillddrreenn""..
WWaarrnniinngg!!
IIff iinn aann eexxcceeppttiioonnaall ccaassee wwhheerree
yyoouu mmaayy wwiisshh ttoo iinnssttaallll aa cchhiilldd sseeaatt
iinn tthhee ppaasssseennggeerr sseeaatt,, wwhheerree tthhee
cchhiilldd iiss ffaacciinngg bbaacckkwwaarrddss,, iitt iiss
eesssseennttiiaall ttoo ddeeaaccttiivvaattee tthhee ppaass--
sseennggeerr AAiirr BBaagg.. TToo nnoott ddoo ssoo wwiillll
ppuutt tthhee cchhiilldd aatt rriisskk ooff sseerriioouuss oorr
eevveenn ffaattaall iinnjjuurryy.. FFoorr aannyy ddoouubbtt
aabboouutt tthhee ddeeaaccttiivvaattiioonn ooff tthhee ppaass--
sseennggeerr AAiirr BBaagg,, ccoonnssuulltt tthhee
TTeecchhnniiccaall SSeerrvviiccee..
KKeeyy lloocckk sswwiittcchh
11))
ffoorr ddeeaaccttiivvaattiioonn
ooff ppaasssseennggeerr AAiirr BBaaggss
By using the key lock switch in the glove
box it is possible to deactivate and acti-
vate the frontal and lateral passenger Air
Bags.
This measure is necessary in the
eexxcceepp--
ttiioonnaall
cases where a child seat must be
installed in the passenger seat.
In general, child seats
sshhoouulldd oonnllyy bbee
ffiitttteedd iinn tthhee rreeaarr sseeaattss ooff tthhee vveehhiiccllee..
RReeaaccttiivvaattee tthhee AAiirr BBaaggss aass ssoooonn aass
ppoossssiibbllee,, tthhee pprroommpptt rreeaaccttiivvaattiioonn ooff
tthhee AAiirr BBaaggss wwiillll ooffffeerr nneecceessssaarryy pprroo--
tteeccttiioonn..
WWaarrnniinngg!!
TThhee kkeeyy lloocckk sswwiittcchh sshhoouulldd oonnllyy bbee
uusseedd wwiitthh tthhee iiggnniittiioonn iinn tthhee ooffff
ppoossiittiioonn.. IIff nnoott,, ffaauullttss mmaayy bbee
iinnttrroodduucceedd iinnttoo tthhee ssyysstteemm pprree--
vveennttiinngg tthhee ttrriiggggeerriinngg ooff tthhee AAiirr
BBaagg oorr eevveenn aann uunnwwaanntteedd ddeeppllooyy--
mmeenntt..
1)
This equipment varies according to the model.
DDeeaaccttiivvaattiioonn
Turn the ignition to the off position
Turn the key lock switch to the
OOFFFF
position using the ignition key.
Ensure that when the ignition is
switched to the “ON” position, the
AAIIRR
BBAAGG OOFFFF
warning light always comes
on.
WWaarrnniinngg!!
TThhee ddrriivveerr ooff tthhee vveehhiiccllee hhaass tthhee
rreessppoonnssiibbiilliittyy ooff eennssuurriinngg tthhee ccoorr--
rreecctt ppoossiittiioonn ooff tthhee sswwiittcchh..
AIR BAG –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
1.23
SAFETY FIRST
B6L-0013
AAccttiivvaattiioonn
Turn the ignition to the off position
Turn the key lock switch to the “
OONN
position using the ignition key.
Ensure that when the ignition is
switched on, the
AAIIRR BBAAGG OOFFFF
” warning
light does not come on.
AAIIRR BBAAGG OOFFFF wwaarrnniinngg lliigghhtt
((AAiirr BBaagg ddeeaaccttiivvaatteedd))
This warning light will light when the igni-
tion is turned on as long as the passenger
Air Bags are deactivated.
TThhee wwaarrnniinngg lliigghhtt wwiillll ffllaasshh iinn ccaassee ooff
aannyy aannoommaallyy iinn tthhee AAiirr BBaagg.. IInn tthhiiss
ccaassee aa TTeecchhnniiccaall SSeerrvviiccee mmuusstt bbee vviiss--
iitteedd..
WWaarrnniinngg!!
IIff tthheeAAIIRR BBAAGG OOFFFF wwaarrnniinngg lliigghhtt
ffllaasshheess::
TThheerree iiss nnoo gguuaarraanntteeee tthhaatt tthhee
ppaasssseennggeerr AAiirr BBaaggss wwiillll bbee ttrriigg--
ggeerreedd iinn tthhee eevveenntt ooff aann aacccciiddeenntt..
WWaarrnn aallll ppaasssseennggeerrss..
DDoo nnoott ppllaaccee aannyy cchhiilldd sseeaattss iinn
tthhee ppaasssseennggeerr sseeaatt,, iinn tthhee eevveenntt ooff
aann aacccciiddeenntt tthhee AAiirr BBaagg mmaayy bbee
ttrriiggggeerreedd ccaauussiinngg sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy..
1.24
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– AIR BAG
SAFETY FIRST
LO3-002
SAFETY FOR CHILDREN –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
1.25
SAFETY FIRST
SSaaffeettyy ffoorr cchhiillddrreenn
IItt iiss cclleeaarrllyy ddeemmoonnssttrraatteedd bbyy aacccciiddeenntt
ssttaattiissttiiccss tthhaatt ggeenneerraallllyy cchhiillddrreenn aarree
ssaaffeerr oonn tthhee bbaacckk sseeaatt tthhaann oonn tthhee
ppaasssseennggeerrss sseeaatt.. TThheerreeffoorree,, cchhiillddrreenn
uunnddeerr 1122 yyeeaarrss ooff aaggee mmuusstt nnoorrmmaallllyy
ttrraavveell oonn tthhee rreeaarr sseeaattss
11))
.. DDeeppeennddiinngg
oonn aaggee,, hheeiigghhtt aanndd wweeiigghhtt,, tthheeyy hhaavvee
ttoo uussee aa ssuuiittaabbllee cchhiilldd rreessttrraaiinntt ssyyss--
tteemm oorr aa sseeaatt bbeelltt.. FFoorr ssaaffeettyy rreeaassoonnss,,
tthhee cchhiilldd sseeaatt mmuusstt bbee ffiitt iinn tthhee cceenntteerr
ooff tthhee rreeaarr sseeaatt oorr bbeehhiinndd tthhee ppaasssseenn--
ggeerrss sseeaatt..
TThhee pphhyyssiiccaall pprriinncciipplleess aappppaarreenntt iinn
aann aacccciiddeenntt,, wwhhiicchh aarree ddeettaaiilleedd oonn
ppaaggeess 11..33 ttoo 11..55,, nnaattuurraallllyy aallssoo aappppllyy
ttoo cchhiillddrreenn..
AAss ooppppoosseedd ttoo aadduullttss,, tthhee mmuussccllee aanndd
bboonnee ssttrruuccttuurreess ooff cchhiillddrreenn aarree nnoott
yyeett ffuullllyy ffoorrmmeedd.. AAss ssuucchh,, cchhiillddrreenn aarree
ssuubbjjeecctt ttoo aa hhiigghheerr rriisskk ooff iinnjjuurryy..
IInn oorrddeerr ttoo rreedduuccee tthhiiss rriisskk ooff iinnjjuurryy,,
cchhiillddrreenn mmaayy oonnllyy bbee ttrraannssppoorrtteedd iinn
ssppeecciiaall cchhiilldd rreessttrraaiinntt ssyysstteemmss!!
WWaarrnniinngg
AAllll vveehhiiccllee ooccccuuppaannttss,, aanndd ppaarr--
ttiiccuullaarrllyy cchhiillddrreenn,, mmuusstt bbee bbeelltteedd
iinn dduurriinngg tthhee jjoouurrnneeyy..
YYoouu sshhoouulldd nneevveerr aallllooww yyoouurr
cchhiilldd ttoo ssttaanndd oorr kknneeeell wwhhiillsstt tthhee
vveehhiiccllee iiss iinn mmoottiioonn.. SShhoouulldd aann
aacccciiddeenntt ooccccuurr ,, yyoouurr cchhiillddrreenn wwiillll
bbee tthhrroowwnn oouutt ooff tthhee vveehhiiccllee aanndd
ccoouulldd bbee sseerriioouussllyy iinnjjuurreedd..
1)
Different norms may apply to different coun-
tries.
IIff cchhiillddrreenn lleeaann wwhhiillsstt tthhee vveehhii--
ccllee iiss iinn mmoottiioonn oorr aaddoopptt aann iinnccoorr--
rreecctt ssiittttiinngg ppoossiittiioonn,, tthheeyy aarree ssuubb--
jjeecctteedd ttoo aann iinnccrreeaasseedd rriisskk ooff
iinnjjuurryy.. TThhiiss aapppplliieess iinn ppaarrttiiccuullaarr ttoo
cchhiillddrreenn sseeaatteedd oonn tthhee ppaasssseennggeerr
sseeaatt wwhheenn tthhee AAiirr BBaagg ssyysstteemm iiss
ttrriiggggeerreedd dduurriinngg aann aacccciiddeenntt.. TThhiiss
ccoouulldd ccaauussee sseerriioouuss oorr ffaattaall
iinnjjuurriieess..
AA ssuuiittaabbllee cchhiilldd rreessttrraaiinntt ssyysstteemm
ccaann pprrootteecctt yyoouurr cchhiilldd!!
DDoo nnoott lleeaavvee yyoouurr cchhiilldd uunnaatt--
tteennddeedd iinn tthhee cchhiilldd sseeaatt
CChhiillddrreenn uunnddeerr 11..5500 mm ((aapppprrooxx..
uunnddeerr 1122 yyeeaarrss ooff aaggee)) mmuusstt nnoott
uussee nnoorrmmaall sseeaatt bbeellttss wwiitthhoouutt tthhee
cchhiilldd rreessttrraaiinntt ssyysstteemm.. TThhiiss ccoouulldd
ccaauussee iinnjjuurryy ttoo tthhee ssttoommaacchh aanndd
nneecckk..
1.26
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– SAFETY FOR CHILDREN
SAFETY FIRST
UU
Adequate for the universal retention
systems officially authorized with
this age group. (Universal retention
systems are those fixed by the adult
safety belt).
UUFF
Adequate for the universal retention
systems oriented frontwards offi-
cialy authorized for use in this age
group.
LL
Adequate for retention systems with
ISOFIX anchoring.
XX
Seat space not adequate for children
of this age group.
NNuummbbeerr ooff sseeaattss
AApppprrooxxiimmaattee
FFrroonntt BBaacckk CCeennttrraall
aaggee ggrroouupp
ppaasssseennggeerr ssiiddeess rreeaarr
GGrroouupp 00
< 10 kg
UU UU
(0-9 months)
GGrroouupp 00 ++
< 13 kg
UU UU
(0-24 months)
GGrroouupp II
9-18 kg
UU//LL UU
(9-48 months)
GGrroouupp IIII//IIIIII
15-36 kg
XX UUFF UUFF
(4-12 years)
UU
(only in exceptional
cases). (Slide the
front passenger
seat as far back
as possible and
always disconnect
the Air Bag)
UU
(only in exceptional
cases). (Slide the
front passenger
seat as far back
as possible and
always disconnect
the Air Bag)
UU
(only in exceptional
cases). (Slide the
front passenger
seat as far back
as possible and
always disconnect
the Air Bag)
SAFETY FOR CHILDREN –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
1.27
SAFETY FIRST
NNoottee
CChhiilldd rreessttrraaiinntt ssyysstteemmss tteesstteedd aaccccoorrdd--
iinngg ttoo EECCEE--RR 4444..0033 ssttaannddaarrdd aarree
cclleeaarrllyy mmaarrkkeedd wwiitthh tthhee EECCEE--RR 4444..0033
tteesstt mmaarrkk ((ccaappiittaall EE iinn aa cciirrccllee aanndd aa
nnuummbbeerr wwhhiicchh iinnddiiccaatteess tthhee ccoouunnttrryy
ooff tthhee nnoorrmm,, ii..ee.. SSppaaiinn iiss nnuummbbeerr 99))..
Only officially approved child restraint
systems which are suitable for the child
should be used.
The ECE-R
1)
44.03 standard applies to
child restraint systems. This categorizes
restraint systems into four classes.
Group 0: 0-10 kg
Group 0+: 0-13 kg
Group I: 9-18 kg
Group II: 15-25 kg
Group III: 22-36 kg
1)
Regulation of the Economic Commission of Eu-
rope.
GGrroouupp 00//00++
For babies up to 10 kg/13 kg we recom-
mend child seats which can be adjusted
to the horizontal position (see illustra-
tion).
WWaarrnniinngg
IIff iinn aann eexxcceeppttiioonnaall ccaassee,, aa cchhiilldd
sseeaatt iiss ffiitttteedd iinn tthhee ppaasssseennggeerr sseeaatt
wwhheerree tthhee cchhiilldd iiss ttrraavveelllliinngg wwiitthh
tthhee bbaacckk ttoo tthhee ddiirreeccttiioonn ooff ttrraavveell,,
tthhee ppaasssseennggeerr AAiirr BBaagg mmuusstt bbee
ddeeaaccttiivvaatteedd eeiitthheerr bbyy aa TTeecchhnniiccaall
SSeerrvviiccee CCeennttrree.. OOtthheerrwwiissee tthheerree iiss
aa ddaannggeerr ooff sseevveerree oorr eevveenn ffaattaall
iinnjjuurriieess.. SSeeee aa TTeecchhnniiccaall SSeerrvviiccee
CCeennttrree ttoo ddeeaaccttiivvaattee tthhee ssyysstteemm..
AAss ssoooonn aass tthhee cchhiilldd sseeaatt iiss nnoo lloonnggeerr
nneeeeddeedd aass ddeessccrriibbeedd iinn tthhee aabboovvee
ppaarraaggrraapphh,, tthhee ppaasssseennggeerr--ssiiddee AAiirr
BBaagg sshhoouulldd bbee mmaaddee ooppeerraattiioonnaall
aaggaaiinn bbyy aa TTeecchhnniiccaall SSeerrvviiccee CCeennttrree..
IBN-110
GGrroouupp II
For babies and small children weighing
between 9-18 kg. Best suited are child
seats with safety board see illustration
or child seats in which the child faces
backwards.
WWaarrnniinngg
IIff iinn aann eexxcceeppttiioonnaall ccaassee,, aa cchhiilldd
sseeaatt iiss ffiitttteedd iinn tthhee ppaasssseennggeerr sseeaatt
wwhheerree tthhee cchhiilldd iiss ttrraavveelllliinngg wwiitthh
tthhee bbaacckk ttoo tthhee ddiirreeccttiioonn ooff ttrraavveell,,
tthhee ppaasssseennggeerr AAiirr BBaagg mmuusstt bbee
ddeeaaccttiivvaatteedd eeiitthheerr bbyy aa TTeecchhnniiccaall
SSeerrvviiccee CCeennttrree.. OOtthheerrwwiissee tthheerree iiss
aa ddaannggeerr ooff sseevveerree oorr eevveenn ffaattaall
iinnjjuurriieess.. SSeeee aa TTeecchhnniiccaall SSeerrvviiccee
CCeennttrree ttoo ddeeaaccttiivvaattee tthhee ssyysstteemm..
AAss ssoooonn aass tthhee cchhiilldd sseeaatt iiss nnoo lloonnggeerr
nneeeeddeedd aass ddeessccrriibbeedd iinn tthhee aabboovvee
ppaarraaggrraapphh,, tthhee ppaasssseennggeerr--ssiiddee AAiirr
BBaagg sshhoouulldd bbee mmaaddee ooppeerraattiioonnaall
aaggaaiinn bbyy aa TTeecchhnniiccaall SSeerrvviiccee CCeennttrree..
GGrroouupp IIII
For children weighing between 15-25 kg.
Best suited are child seats combined with
3-point safety belts.
WWaarrnniinngg
TThhee sshhoouullddeerr ppaarrtt ooff tthhee bbeelltt mmuusstt
rruunn rroouugghhllyy aaccrroossss tthhee cceennttrree ooff tthhee
sshhoouullddeerr,, oonn nnoo aaccccoouunntt aaggaaiinnsstt
tthhee nneecckk,, aanndd mmuusstt bbee ffiirrmmllyy iinn
ccoonnttaacctt wwiitthh tthhee bbooddyy..
TThhee llaapp ppaarrtt ooff tthhee bbeelltt mmuusstt ffiitt
ttiigghhttllyy aaccrroossss tthhee ppeellvviiss nnoott
aaccrroossss tthhee ssttoommaacchh.. IIff nneecceessssaarryy,,
ppuullll tthhee bbeelltt ttiigghhtt..
B1S-003PB1S-002P
1.28
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– SAFETY FOR CHILDREN
SAFETY FIRST
SAFETY FOR CHILDREN –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
1.29
SAFETY FIRST
GGrroouupp IIIIII
For children weighing between 22-36 kg.
and less than 1.50 m (5’) tall. Best suited
are seat cushions combined with the 3-
point seat belt.
WWaarrnniinngg
TThhee sshhoouullddeerr ppaarrtt ooff tthhee bbeelltt mmuusstt
rruunn rroouugghhllyy aaccrroossss tthhee cceennttrree ooff
tthhee sshhoouullddeerr,, oonn nnoo aaccccoouunntt
aaggaaiinnsstt tthhee nneecckk,, aanndd mmuusstt bbee
ffiirrmmllyy iinn ccoonnttaacctt wwiitthh tthhee bbooddyy..
TThhee llaapp ppaarrtt ooff tthhee bbeelltt mmuusstt ffiitt
ttiigghhttllyy aaccrroossss tthhee cchhiillddss hhiippss nnoott
aaccrroossss tthhee ssttoommaacchh.. IIff nneecceessssaarryy,,
ppuullll tthhee bbeelltt ttiigghhtt..
Children more than 1.50 m/5’ tall can use
the seat belts fitted without seat cush-
ions.
WWaarrnniinngg
NNeevveerr,, uunnddeerr aannyy cciirrccuummssttaanncceess,,
sshhoouulldd yyoouu ttrraannssppoorrtt cchhiillddrreenn oorr
iinnffaannttss iinn tthhee vveehhiiccllee,, bbyy ccaarrrryyiinngg
tthheemm iinn aarrmmss oorr sseeaatteedd oonn ssoommee--
bbooddyyss llaapp..
When using the belt, the section “Seat
belts” should also be noted.
B1S-005PB1S-004P
1.30
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– SAFETY FOR CHILDREN
SAFETY FIRST
NNootteess
Child retention systems designed for all
ages are available for your vehicle from
the SEAT Original Accessories Program
under the name "Peke"
1)
. These systems
mentioned above have been especially
designed and approved conforming to the
ECE-R 44.03 regulation.
FFoorr tthhee iinnssttaallllaattiioonn aanndd uussee,, aatttteenn--
ttiioonn mmuusstt bbee ppaaiidd ttoo ssttaattuuttoorryy rreegguullaa--
ttiioonnss aanndd tthhee iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss ooff tthhee
rreessttrraaiinntt ssyysstteemm mmaannuuffaaccttuurreerr..
WWaarrnniinngg
PPaarrttiiccuullaarr ccaarree iiss rreeqquuiirreedd iiff
cchhiilldd rreessttrraaiinntt ssyysstteemmss aarree uusseedd
wwhhiicchh aarree bboolltteedd ttooggeetthheerr wwiitthh tthhee
sseeaatt bbeellttss ffiitttteedd iinn tthhee vveehhiiccllee.. TThhee
bboollttss mmuusstt bbee ssccrreewweedd iinnttoo tthhee
hhoollee ffoorr tthhee ccoommpplleettee lleennggtthh aanndd
ttiigghhtteenneedd ttoo 4400 NNmm..
FFuurrtthheerrmmoorree,, tthhee sseeaatt bbeellttss mmuusstt
bbee cchheecckkeedd ffoorr ccoorrrreecctt rroouuttiinngg.. TThhee
bbeelltt mmuusstt nnoott bbee aabbllee ttoo bbee ddaamm--
aaggeedd bbyy sshhaarrppllyy eeddggeedd ffiittttiinnggss..
OOnnllyy oonnee cchhiilldd ppeerr cchhiilldd rreessttrraaiinntt
ssyysstteemm iiss aalllloowweedd..
1)
Not available in all countries.
AAttttaacchh cchhiilldd sseeaatt
SSeeccuurriinngg tthhee cchhiilldd sseeaatt**
To attach the child seat you can perma-
nently block the automatic three-point
seatbelt* of the rear central seat available
in certain vehicle versions. Hence, a cor-
rect attachment of the child seat in the
vehicle is guaranteed.
WWaarrnniinngg
IIff,, iinn eexxcceeppttiioonnaall ccaasseess,, yyoouu mmuusstt
ccaarrrryy aa cchhiilldd sseeaatt iinn tthhee ppaasssseennggeerr
sseeaatt wwhheerree tthhee cchhiilldd ssiittss wwiitthh iittss
bbaacckk ttoo tthhee ddiirreeccttiioonn ooff ttrraavveell,, tthhee
ppaasssseennggeerr AAiirr BBaagg mmuusstt bbee ddeeaaccttii--
vvaatteedd bbyy aa TTeecchhnniiccaall SSeerrvviiccee
CCeennttrree.. OOtthheerrwwiissee,, sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurriieess
oorr lloossss ooff lliiffee ccoouulldd ooccccuurr.. IIff yyoouu
wwiisshh ttoo ddiissccoonnnneecctt tthhee ssyysstteemm,,
ccoonnttaacctt aa TTeecchhnniiccaall SSeerrvviiccee
CCeennttrree..
AAss ssoooonn aass tthhee cchhiilldd sseeaatt iiss nnoo lloonnggeerr
nneeeeddeedd aass ddeessccrriibbeedd iinn tthhee aabboovvee
ppaarraaggrraapphh,, tthhee ppaasssseennggeerr--ssiiddee AAiirr
BBaagg sshhoouulldd bbee mmaaddee ooppeerraattiioonnaall
aaggaaiinn bbyy aa TTeecchhnniiccaall SSeerrvviiccee CCeennttrree..
SAFETY FOR CHILDREN ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
1.31
SAFETY FIRST
AAttttaacchhiinngg cchhiilldd sseeaattss wwiitthh tthhee
IISSOOFFIIXX ssyysstteemm
There are four attachment rings (see
arrows) on the body work between the
chassis and the cushions of the rear seat.
You can use these rings to attach a maxi-
mum of two child seats with the ISOFIX
system. When you fit the child seat you
must be able to hear a "click" on both
sides (sound of anchoring). Then, pull the
seat to check whether it has been fitted
properly (pull test!)
WWaarrnniinngg
FFoorr ssaaffeettyy rreeaassoonnss,, ccaarreeffuullllyy rreeaadd
tthhee iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss ooff cchhiilldd sseeaattss wwiitthh
tthhee IISSOOFFIIXX ssyysstteemm aanndd tthhee ""SSaaffeettyy
ffoorr cchhiillddrreenn"" cchhaapptteerr..
B1J-095D
1.32
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– SEATS AND HEAD RESTRAINTS
SAFETY FIRST
FFrroonntt sseeaattss
The correct adjustment of the seats is
important for:
reaching the controls safely and quickly.
relaxed low-fatigue body position.
mmaaxxiimmuumm pprrootteeccttiioonn ffrroomm tthhee sseeaatt
bbeellttss aanndd tthhee AAiirr BBaagg SSyysstteemm..
WWaarrnniinngg
IItt iiss iimmppoorrttaanntt ttoo mmaaiinnttaaiinn aa ddiiss--
ttaannccee ooff aatt lleeaasstt 2255 ccmm ffrroomm tthhee
sstteeeerriinngg wwhheeeell oorr iinnssttrruummeenntt
ppaanneell ssoo tthhaatt tthhee ffrroonntt sseeaatt ooccccuu--
ppaannttss hhaavvee tthhee bbeesstt ppoossssiibbllee
eeffffeeccttiivvee pprrootteeccttiioonn iiff tthhee ssyysstteemm
iiss ttrriiggggeerreedd.. IInn aaddddiittiioonn,, tthhee ffrroonntt
sseeaattss aanndd tthhee hheeaadd rreessttrraaiinnttss mmuusstt
bbee aaddjjuusstteedd ttoo tthhee bbooddyy hheeiigghhtt..
Consult the "Front seats" chapter for seat
adjustment. Also note on this page the
basic adjustment of the driver’s and pas-
senger seats.
WWaarrnniinngg
NNoo iitteemmss mmuusstt bbee kkeepptt iinn tthhee
ffoooottwweellll,, aass tthheessee ccoouulldd bblloocckk tthhee
ppeeddaallss iinn ccaassee ooff ssuuddddeenn bbrraakkiinngg..
CCoonnsseeqquueennttllyy,, iitt wwoouulldd bbee iimmppooss--
ssiibbllee ttoo bbrraakkee,, cchhaannggee ggeeaarr oorr
aacccceelleerraattee..
FFeeeett sshhoouulldd rreemmaaiinn iinn tthhee ffoooottwweellll
wwhheenn tthhee vveehhiiccllee iiss mmoovviinngg,, nneevveerr
rreessttiinngg oonn tthhee iinnssttrruummeenntt ppaanneell oorr
sseeaattss..
DDrriivveerrss sseeaatt
We recommend that you position the dri-
ver’s seat as follows:
Set the driver’s seat forwards/back-
wards in such a way that the pedals can
be fully depressed with a slightly
angled leg.
Set the backrest in such a way that it is
fully against your back and that you can
reach the upper point of the steering
wheel with your arms at a slight angle.
FFrroonntt ppaasssseennggeerr sseeaatt
We recommend that you position the front
passenger seat as follows:
Backrest in an upright position.
Place the feet in the footwell in a com-
fortable position.
At the same time push the seat back as
far as possible.
B1S-016P
SEATS AND HEAD RESTRAINTS ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
1.33
SAFETY FIRST
HHeeaadd rreessttrraaiinnttss**
The head restraints are height adjustable
and must be set to suit the size of the
occupant. Correctly adjusted head
restraints together with the seat belts
offer effective protection. It is also possi-
ble to set the angle of the front head
restraints.
AAddjjuussttiinngg hheeiigghhtt
Grip sides of head restraint with both
hands and pull up or push down.
The best protection is obtained when
the upper edge of the restraint is
aatt lleeaasstt
at eye level or higher.
B1S-017P
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5
Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13
OPENING AND CLOSING
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23
Keys with remote control* . . . . . 2.24
Electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . 2.25
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.26
Central locking* . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.27
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.32
Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . 2.33
Radio-frequency remote
control key* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.36
Electric windows*. . . . . . . . . . . . 2.39
Sliding/tilting roof* . . . . . . . . . . 2.43
LIGHTS AND VISIBILITY
Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.45
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.48
Indicators and dipped beam
lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.49
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.50
Windscreen wipers and
washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.51
Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.53
Rear-view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.55
SEATS AND LUGGAGE
COMPARTMENT
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.58
Head restraints*. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.62
Armrest*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.63
Heated seats* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.64
Adjustable steering column* . . . 2.64
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.65
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . 2.65
Rear shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.67
Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.68
Roof rack*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.70
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.72
Cigarette lighter/electric socket . 2.73
Stowage box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.73
Drink can holder* . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.74
CLIMATE CONTROL
Heating and ventilation . . . . . . . 2.75
Air conditioning* . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.78
Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.85
DRIVING
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.90
Automatic gearbox* . . . . . . . . . . 2.90
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.96
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.97
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . 2.98
Stopping the engine. . . . . . . . . 2.100
Cruise control system* . . . . . . . 2.101
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.1
INDEX
2.2
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– INSTRUMENT PANEL
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
TTaabbllee
1 2 3
4 5
6
19
202122
232425
262728
INSTRUMENT PANEL –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.3
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
5
7 8 9 10 11
12
131415
161718
LEO-001A
Position Page
1 – Door handle ........................... 2.26
2 – Knurled wheel for instrument
lighting*................................. 2.46
3 – Knurled wheel for light range
adjustment* ........................... 2.46
4 – Light switch............................ 2.45
5 – Air vents................ 2.75/2.80/2.85
6 – Indicator/dipped beam lever... 2.49
7 – Heated rear window switch ..... 2.46
8 – Hazard warning light switch.... 2.47
9 – Knurled wheel for left
seat heating*/
Drink can holder ..............2.64/2.74
10 – Knurled wheel for right
seat heating*/
Drink can holder ..............2.64/2.74
11 – Passenger Air Bag*................. 1.16
12 – Glove compartment/
stowage box........................... 2.73
13 – Stowage box........................... 2.73
14 – Radio/Radio housing
1)
*
Radio navigation system
1)
*..... 3.85
15 – Controls for:
– Heating/ventilation ............. 2.76
– Air conditioning* ................. 2.79
– Climatronic* ........................ 2.86
16 Automatic*/Manual gear lever.. 2.90
17 – Ashtray/ lighter.............. 2.72/2.73
18 – Pedals.................................... 2.65
19 – Windshield washer/wipers
lever/Multifunction
indicator* ........................ 2.51/2.8
Position Page
20 – Steering and ignition lock ..... 2.97
21 – Driver’s Air Bag/Horn.............. 1.16
22 – Steering column adjustment
lever*..................................... 2.64
23 – On board literature
compartment.......................... 2.74
24 – Instrument and warning lamps
panel ..................................... 2.13
25 – Bonnet release lever............... 3.35
26 – Electric wing mirror
adjustment lever*................... 2.55
27 – Central locking button*........... 2.29
28 – Electric window controls* ....... 2.39
Some of the equipment above-men-
tioned is only installed on certain model
versions or comes as an option.
Controls on right hand drive models
may slightly vary from left-hand drive ver-
sions. Nevertheless both versions are fit-
ted with the very same indicator signs.
1)
An additional instructions manual is delivered
for vehicles with a navigation system or factory-
fitted radio. If the radio is subsequently fitted,
follow indications in the "Accessories, modifi-
cations and replacement of parts" chapter.
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
2.4
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.5
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
IInnssttrruummeennttss
In some model versions or in certain
countries, it is possible to insert the igni-
tion key and have the dash panel lights
go on without switching the engine on.
This function is independent of the vehi-
cle's light connections.
The arrangement of the instruments
depends on the model and the engine fit-
ted.
Page
1 – Revolutions counter* .................. 2.5
2 – Coolant temperature ................... 2.6
3 – Fuel gauge.................................. 2.7
4 – Speedometer.............................. 2.7
5 – Digital clock*...............................2.7
Outside temperature indicator*.....2.7
Multifunction indicator* ..............2.8
6 – Selector lever position display*. 2.11
7 – Mileage clock with Service
interval indicator* ............ 2.11/2.12
11 RReevvoolluuttiioonnss ccoouunntteerr**
OOnn nnoo aaccccoouunntt mmuusstt tthhee rreevvoolluuttiioonnss
ccoouunntteerr nneeeeddllee mmoovvee iinnttoo tthhee rreedd
zzoonnee ooff tthhee ssccaallee..
CChhaannggiinngg uupp iinn ggoooodd ttiimmee hheellppss
ttoo ssaavvee ffuueell aanndd kkeeeepp tthhee nnooiissee
ddoowwnn..
Change down a gear at the latest when
the engine turn over is no longer smooth.
Avoid high engine revolutions during the
running-in period.
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
Rpm x 1000
20
0
Km/h
40
60
80
100
140
180
220
260
10
30
50
70
90
120
160
200
240
km
60
90
120
0
1/2
1/1
!
1
EPC
5
1
2
3
4
7
P R N D 3 2 1
6
LEO-002
22 CCoooollaanntt tteemmppeerraattuurree
The gauge starts to work when the igni-
tion is switched on.
When the ignition is switched on the
warning lamp (
cc
) flashes for a few sec-
onds as a functional check.
aa CCoolldd
Avoid high engine speeds and do not
work engine too hard yet.
bb NNoorrmmaall
When the vehicle is driven normally the
needle should settle down in the central
zone.
When engine is working hard and the
ambient temperature is high, the needle
may move a long way up.
TThhiiss iiss nnoott sseerriioouuss aass lloonngg aass tthhee
wwaarrnniinngg llaammpp ((cc)) ddooeess nnoott ffllaasshh..
cc WWaarrnniinngg llaammpp
If the lamp flashes and a tone is heard at
the same time when driving, first check
the coolant temperature being displayed.
If the needle is in the normal zone,
coolant should be added as soon as pos-
sible. See the chapter on “Cooling sys-
tem”.
If the needle is in the right half of the indi-
cator, the coolant temperature is too high.
IInn tthhiiss ccaassee,, ppuullll oovveerr,, sswwiittcchh tthhee
eennggiinnee ooffff,, wwaaiitt uunnttiill iitt ccoooollss
and then
look for the cause of the problem. See the
chapter on “Cooling system”.
WWaarrnniinngg
NNoottee wwaarrnniinnggss iinn ""CCoooolliinngg ssyysstteemm""
cchhaapptteerr..
AAddddiittiioonnaall lliigghhttss iinn ffrroonntt ooff tthhee ccooooll--
iinngg aaiirr iinnttaakkee iinntteerrffeerree wwiitthh tthhee ffllooww
ooff ccoooolliinngg aaiirr.. AAtt hhiigghh aammbbiieenntt tteemm--
ppeerraattuurreess aanndd ffuullll tthhrroottttllee tthheerree iiss aa
ddaannggeerr tthhaatt tthhee eennggiinnee wwiillll tthheenn oovveerr--
hheeaatt..
2.6
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– INSTRUMENT PANEL
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
6
60
90
120
0
1
c
a
b
IB9-035
INSTRUMENT PANEL ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.7
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
33 FFuueell ggaauuggee
When the ignition is switched on, the
warning light lights up as a functional
check.
The tank holds about 55 litres.
When the needle moves to the red reserve
zone, warning light
dd
lights up at the
same time that an acoustic warning signal
is produced; this means that approxi-
mately 7 litres of fuel remain.
44 SSppeeeeddoommeetteerr
The speedometer is fitted with a digital
mileage clock and a trip mileage clock, as
well as a service interval indicator*.
During the running in period you must
note the instructions in the chapter "The
first 1,500 km and afterwards".
55 DDiiggiittaall cclloocckk**
The digital clock is set by turning a knob
that is on the bottom right next to the
speedometer.
The hours are set by turning the button
anti-clockwise until it stops. By turning
the knob once, you move forward one
hour. By turning and holding the knob,
the hours move forward continuously.
The minutes are set by turning the but-
ton clockwise until it stops. By turning the
knob once, you move forward one minute.
By turning and holding the knob, the min-
utes move forward continuously.
The knob can be used to set the clock to
the exact second.
Turn the knob to the right until the time
is set to exactly one minute before the
required time.
Turn the button to the right just as the
seconds indicator of an accurately set
clock shows one full minute.
Turning the button to the left sets the
clock to the required arrow.
55 OOuuttssiiddee tteemmppeerraattuurree iinnddiiccaattoorr**
The outside temperature is displayed
when the ignition is on.
At temperatures from +5 °C to –5 °C, a
snowflake symbol is displayed along with
the temperature.
TThhee ssnnoowwffllaakkee ssyymmbbooll iiss ttoo wwaarrnn tthhee
ddrriivveerr ttoo ttaakkee eexxttrraa ccaarree wwhheenn tthheerree iiss
aa rriisskk ooff iiccee ffoorrmmiinngg oonn tthhee rrooaadd..
When the vehicle is stationary or travel-
ling at very low speeds, the temperature
displayed may be slightly higher than the
actual outside temperature as a result of
radiant heat from the engine.
6
0
50
120
0
1/2
1/1
1
d
IB9-036
2.8
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– INSTRUMENT PANEL
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
55 MMuullttiiffuunnccttiioonn iinnddiiccaattoorr**
The multifunction indicator includes:
Time
Driving time
Average speed
Distance covered
Autonomy
Average fuel consumption
Current consumption
The function selector and the reset key
are located in the windshield wiper arm.
With the ignition switched on, repeatedly
press the upper or lower part of the func-
tion selector and the functions will appear
one after the other.
When the ignition is switched on, the
function which was selected before
switching off the ignition will be acti-
vated, unless the ice warning symbol
appears with outside temperature of
+ 5°C and – C.
If the vehicle battery is disconnected, all
stored values will be deleted.
B8L-103
6
5
7
8
10.0
3
2
1
0
rpm x 1000
l/100 km
LEO-003
INSTRUMENT PANEL ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.9
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
MMeemmoorryy
The system is equipped with two memo-
ries which function automatically.
AA ppaarrttiiaall rroouuttee mmeemmoorryy ((MMuullttiiffuunnccttiioonn
IInnddiiccaattoorr 11))
gathers the following data
between switching the ignition on and
off:
Driving time, distance covered and used
fuel.
Speed and average fuel consumption are
calculated using the above information.
If driving is resumed within two hours
from switching off the ignition, the data
collected while driving is included in the
calculation. If driving is not resumed
within two hours, the memory is automat-
ically deleted.
AA ttoottaall rroouuttee mmeemmoorryy ((MMuullttiiffuunnccttiioonn
IInnddiiccaattoorr 22))
collects driving data from
any number of partial routes up to a total
of 100 driving hours, 10,000 kilometres
and a fuel consumption of 1,500 litres.
This data is used to calculate average
consumption and speed from all partial
routes.
If some of the before mentioned data is
exceeded, the memory is deleted and the
calculation starts over. Contrary to the
partial route memory, this memory is not
deleted when driving is interrupted for
more than two hours.
CCoonnssuulltt mmeemmoorryy
To consult data select the memory by
pressing the "
RReesseett
" key for < 2 seconds
and from one of the specific Multifunction
Indicator 1 or 2 functions.
Partial route memory - Multifunction
Indicator 1
– Total route memory - Multifunction
Indicator 2
The following data can be displayed:
Driving time
Distance covered
Average speed
Average fuel consumption
DDeelleettee mmeemmoorryy
Memory data is reset by pressing the
"Reset" key for > 2 seconds.
2.10
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– INSTRUMENT PANEL
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
IInnddiiccaattiioonnss oonn ssccrreeeenn
The last selected item will be displayed
when the ignition is switched on.
OOuuttssiiddee tteemmppeerraattuurree
°°CC
The correct outside temperature takes five
minutes to be displayed. When the vehi-
cle is stationary or moving slowly, the
indicated temperature may be slightly
higher than the real outside temperature
due to the engine heat.
WWaarrnniinngg
IInn tteemmppeerraattuurreess bbeettwweeeenn ++55°°CC aanndd
55°°CC tthhee iiccee wwaarrnniinngg ssyymmbbooll iiss
ddiissppllaayyeedd nneexxtt ttoo tthhee oouuttssiiddee tteemm--
ppeerraattuurree iinnddiiccaattiioonn.. IInn ccaassee tthhiiss
ffuunnccttiioonn wwaass nnoott sseelleecctteedd,, tthhee
ssccrreeeenn wwoouulldd aauuttoommaattiiccaallllyy ddiiss--
ppllaayy iitt..
TTiimmee
The time is displayed even if the ignition
is switched off. The clock is set with the
right rotary knob below the speedometer
(see "digital clock" in the Instructions
Manual).
DDrriivviinngg ttiimmee
MMuullttiiffuunnccttiioonn IInnddiiccaattoorr 11
Driving time
from switching on the ignition or from
resetting memory (see "special route
memory").
MMuullttiiffuunnccttiioonn IInnddiiccaattoorr 22
– Total dri-
ving time of all partial routes (see "mem-
ory of total route").
The maximum value displayed with either
selector position is 99 hours and 59 min-
utes. If this value is exceeded, the display
is reset.
AAvveerraaggee ssppeeeedd
ØØ kkmm//hh
The same applies to "average speed" as
to "average fuel consumption".
DDiissttaannccee ccoovveerreedd
KKmm
The same which applies to "distance cov-
ered" applies to "driving time" (see
below). The maximum displayed distance
is 9,999 km.
AAuuttoonnoommyy
KKmm
This function indicates the distance which
the vehicle can drive maintaining the
same driving style.
Fuel calculation is based on the average
fuel consumption during the last 50 kilo-
meters.
After resetting the fuel display (i.e. after
disconnecting the battery) the real fuel
range will be displayed after approxi-
mately 50 kilometers).
INSTRUMENT PANEL –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.11
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
AAvveerraaggee ffuueell
ccoonnssuummppttiioonn
ØØ ll//110000 kkmm
Indicates the average fuel consumption,
not the consumption at the moment.
After switching on the ignition or after
deleting the corresponding memory, the
average fuel consumption is displayed
after having driven approximately 300
meters. Until that moment, the screen will
display lines instead of the function. The
figure is updated every 5 seconds.
MMuullttiiffuunnccttiioonn IInnddiiccaattoorr 11
– indicates
the average fuel consumption of the par-
tial trip.
MMuullttiiffuunnccttiioonn IInnddiiccaattoorr 22
– indicates
the average fuel consumption of all of the
partial trips (see also "memory of total
route").
NNoottee
The quantity of fuel which has been used
is not indicated.
CCuurrrreenntt ccoonnssuummppttiioonn
ll//110000 kkmm
Indicates the current consumption in
l/100 km.
The consumption is calculated in intervals
of 2 seconds. When the vehicle is
stopped, the consumption is indicated in
l/h.
66 SSeelleeccttoorr lleevveerr ppoossiittiioonn ddiissppllaayy**
The position of the automatic gearbox
selector lever is indicated in the display.
See "Automatic gearbox" chapter.
77 MMiilleeaaggee cclloocckk// TTrriipp mmiilleeaaggee
The upper counter registers the total dis-
tance driven and the lower one the short
trips.
The last figure of the lower counter indi-
cates 100 m.
The trip mileage can be put back to zero
by pressing the reset knob next to the
speedometer (partial mileage clock).
2.12
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– INSTRUMENT PANEL
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
77 SSeerrvviiccee iinntteerrvvaall iinnddiiccaattoorr**
If a service is due, the word "Service" will
flash for about 20 seconds when the
engine is switched on, the vehicle is not
moving and the mileage clock reset but-
ton is not touched.
The deadline for any service will be dis-
played 3,000 km in advance.
IInntteerrmmiitttteenntt sseerrvviiccee** ffoorr 2200 sseecc--
oonnddss..
Indicates that the time for a new
service has elapsed.
SSeerrvviiccee KKmm 33,,000000** ffoorr 2200 sseeccoonnddss..
Indicates that the next service is due in
3,000 km. Every 100 km the number of
km will decrease by 100 km up to the indi-
cation "Service".
AAfftteerr tthhee sseerrvviiccee hhaass bbeeeenn ppeerrffoorrmmeedd
tthhee ddiissppllaayy nneeeeddss ttoo bbee rreesseett..
The display will be reset by a Technical
Service Centre as follows:
Switch ignition off
Keep the odometer reset button next to
the speedometer pressed down.
Without releasing the aforementioned
button, switch the ignition on.
SSEERRVVIICCEE
will then appear on the display. Next, turn
the button toward the right, for at least
one second.
The display automatically returns to
normal mode (total km + partial km), and
in this way, the system remains activated
for the oil change service.
NNootteess
DDoo nnoott zzeerroo tthhee ddiissppllaayy bbeettwweeeenn tthhee
sseerrvviiccee iinntteerrvvaallss.. OOtthheerrwwiissee aann iinnccoorr--
rreecctt rreeaaddiinngg wwiillll aappppeeaarr..
IIff tthhee bbaatttteerryy sshhoouulldd bbee ddiissccoonn--
nneecctteedd,, tthhee sseerrvviiccee iinnddiiccaattoorr iinnffoorrmmaa--
ttiioonn wwiillll bbee rreettaaiinneedd..
IIff tthhee iinnssttrruummeenntt ppaanneell cchhaannggeess
dduuee ttoo rreeppaaiirr,, tthhee sseerrvviiccee iinntteerrvvaall ddiiss--
ppllaayy mmuusstt bbee rreesseett.. TThhiiss sshhoouulldd bbee
ccaarrrriieedd oouutt bbyy aa TTeecchhnniiccaall SSeerrvviiccee
CCeennttrree.. IIff tthhee iinnddiiccaattoorr iiss nnoott rreepprroo--
ggrraammmmeedd,, tthhee sseerrvviiccee wwoorrkk mmuusstt bbee
ddoonnee iinn aaccccoorrddaannccee wwiitthh tthhee
MMaaiinntteennaannccee aanndd IInnssppeeccttiioonn PPllaann aanndd
nnoott tthhee sseerrvviiccee iinntteerrvvaall iinnddiiccaattoorr..
OOnnllyy aafftteerr aa sseerrvviiccee hhaass bbeeeenn ccaarrrriieedd
oouutt aanndd tthhee iinnddiiccaattoorr hhaass bbeeeenn rreesseett
wwiillll tthhee sseerrvviiccee iinntteerrvvaall iinnddiiccaattoorr
rreeggaaiinn iittss vvaalliiddiittyy..
FFaaiilluurree iinnddiiccaattoorr
If a failure occurs, "FAIL" would appear
either on the instrument panel or the trip
meter. The defect should be repaired by a
Technical Service Centre as soon as possi-
ble.
INSTRUMENT PANEL ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.13
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
WWaarrnniinngg llaammppss
The layout of the warning lamps depends
on the model version and engine fitted.
The symbols shown here are also on the
actual warning lamps.
Page
1 – Indicators ..................................2.15
2 – Coolant temperature/level*........2.15
3 – Trailer indicators* ......................2.16
4 – Fuel level* .................................2.16
5 – Main beam ................................2.16
6 – Warning lamps display screen ...2.16
7 – Upper display:
Selector lever position display* .2.16
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
Rpm x 1000
20
0
Km/h
40
60
80
100
140
180
220
260
10
30
50
70
90
120
160
200
240
km
60
90
120
0
1/2
1/1
1
!
EPC
P R N D 3 2 1
0 04
3647
0.0
5
1
2
3
4
1
6 7
LEO-004
2.14
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– INSTRUMENT PANEL
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
Page
8 – Seat belt warning lamp*...........2.17
9 – Alternator ................................2.17
10 – Brakes/Hand brake..................2.18
11 – Engine oil pressure/level .........2.18
12 – Tailgate ...................................2.19
13 Diagnosis*/Excess of pollution .2.19
14 – Electronic immobilizer..............2.19
15 – Brake wear monitor* ................2.19
16 – Windscreen washer water
level*.......................................2.20
Page
17 – Anti-locking brake system
(ABS)* .....................................2.20
18 – TCS Wheel spin control*/
ESP Electronic Stability
Program*.................................2.21
19 – Parking light/dipped beam ......2.21
20 – Rear fog light* .........................2.22
21 – Air Bag system
1)
......................2.22
22 – Preheating system/
Electronic Accelerator-
Pedal Control (EPC)*.................2.22
1)
This equipment may vary according to the
country.
6
7
2
0
4
0
1
0
30
5
0
!
EPC
P
8
9
10
11
12
171819
13
14
21
22
20 16 15
IB9-024
INSTRUMENT PANEL –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.15
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
11 IInnddiiccaattoorrss
The pilot light flashes at the same time as
the indicator. If a turn signal fails, the
warning lamp flashes twice as fast. (Not
when towing a trailer).
For more data, see "Indicators and dipped
beam lever" chapter.
22 CCoooollaanntt tteemmppeerraattuurree//
lleevveell**
The warning lamp lights up for a few sec-
onds as a functional check when ignition
is switched on.
If the lamp does not go out afterwards or
lights up or flashes when driving, either
the coolant temperature is too high or the
coolant level too low. An acoustic signal
will sound 3 times as an additional warn-
ing:
SSttoopp tthhee vveehhiiccllee iimmmmeeddiiaatteellyy,, sswwiittcchh
tthhee eennggiinnee ooffff
and check the level. If
necessary, add coolant. For more informa-
tion, see the chapter “Instruments”.
WWaarrnniinngg nnootteess
NNeevveerr ooppeenn tthhee bboonnnneett ooff yyoouurr
ccaarr iiff yyoouu sseeee sstteeaamm oorr ccoooollaanntt
ccoommiinngg ffrroomm tthhee eennggiinnee ccoommppaarrtt--
mmeenntt RRiisskk ooff ssccaallddiinngg!! WWaaiitt uunnttiill
nnoo mmoorree sstteeaamm oorr ccoooollaanntt ccaann bbee
sseeeenn..
DDoo nnoott ttoouucchh tthhee ffaann.. TThhee ffaann ccaann
sswwiittcchh oonn ssuuddddeennllyy eevveenn wwhheenn
tthhee eennggiinnee iiss sswwiittcchheedd ooffff..
PPlleeaassee nnoottee tthhee ffoolllloowwiinngg ppooiinnttss
ttoo aavvooiidd ssccaallddiinngg wwiitthh hhoott ccoooollaanntt::
EExxeerrcciissee ccaauuttiioonn wwhheenn ooppeenniinngg
tthhee ccoooollaanntt eexxppaannssiioonn ttaannkk!! WWhheenn
tthhee eennggiinnee iiss hhoott tthhee ccoooolliinngg ssyyss--
tteemm iiss uunnddeerr pprreessssuurree DDaannggeerr
ooff ssccaallddiinngg!! TThheerreeffoorree lleett eennggiinnee
ccooooll ddoowwnn bbeeffoorree uunnssccrreewwiinngg tthhee
ccaapp!!
TToo pprrootteecctt yyoouurr ffaaccee,, hhaannddss aanndd
aarrmmss yyoouu sshhoouulldd ccoovveerr tthhee ccaapp ooff
tthhee rraaddiiaattoorr wwiitthh aa llaarrggee,, tthhiicckk
ccllootthh ttoo pprrootteecctt aaggaaiinnsstt sstteeaamm oorr
hhoott fflluuiidd..
EEnnssuurree tthhaatt tthhee ccoooollaanntt lliiqquuiidd
ddooeess nnoott ddrroopp oonn tthhee hhoott eexxhhaauusstt
oorr aannyy ootthheerr hhoott eennggiinnee ccoommppoo--
nneennttss.. TThhee aannttiiffrreeeezzee ccoonnttaaiinneedd iinn
tthhee ccoooollaanntt ccoouulldd iiggnniittee..
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
Rpm x 1000
20
0
Km/h
40
60
80
100
140
180
220
260
10
30
50
70
90
120
160
200
240
km
60
90
120
0
1/2
1/1
1
!
EPC
P R N D 3 2 1
0 04
3647
0.0
5
1
2
3
4
1
6 7
LEO-004
2.16
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– INSTRUMENT PANEL
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
If the level is correct the failure may be
due to a fan failure. In this case check the
radiator fan fuse and replace if necessary.
See "Fuses" chapter.
If the warning lamp does not go out
although coolant level and fan fuse are in
order,
ddoo nnoott ddrriivvee oonn
call in expert
assistance.
If the trouble is located only in the radia-
tor fan, and assuming the coolant level is
in order and the temperature warning
lamp is off, you may drive on to the near-
est Technical Service Centre In order to
make good use of the air stream for cool-
ing, do not let engine idle or drive very
slowly.
33 TTrraaiilleerr iinnddiiccaattoorrss**
The warning lamp* flashes when turn sig-
nals are switched on when towing a
trailer.
If a turn signal fails on the trailer or vehi-
cle, the warning lamp does not flash.
44 FFuueell lleevveell**
When the ignition is switched on, the
warning light lights up as a functional
check.
The warning lamp comes on when there
are about 7 litres left in tank.
55 MMaaiinn bbeeaamm
The warning lamp comes on when main
beam is on or when the headlight flasher
is used.
66 WWaarrnniinngg llaammppss ddiissppllaayy ssccrreeeenn
77 SSeelleeccttoorr lleevveerr ppoossiittiioonn ddiissppllaayy**
The automatic gearbox selector lever is
shown on the display; See the "Automatic
gearbox" chapter.
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
Rpm x 1000
20
0
Km/h
40
60
80
100
140
180
220
260
10
30
50
70
90
120
160
200
240
km
60
90
120
0
1/2
1/1
1
!
EPC
P R N D 3 2 1
0 04
3647
0.0
5
1
2
3
4
1
6 7
LEO-004
INSTRUMENT PANEL –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.17
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
88 SSeeaatt bbeelltt wwaarrnniinngg llaammpp**
The warning lamp lights up (only for cer-
tain countries) for about 6 seconds after
ignition as a reminder to fasten your
safety belt.
If the seat belt is not fastened, in some
countries an acoustic signal will sound
after switching on the ignition which will
stop after approximately 6 seconds or
when the seat belt is fastened.
PPlleeaassee rreeffeerr ttoo cchhaapptteerrSSeeaatt bbeellttss..
99 AAlltteerrnnaattoorr
The warning lamp comes on when the
ignition is switched on and must go out
when the engine is started.
The alternator is driven by a long-life
ribbed belt.
If the warning lamp lights during the jour-
ney,
ssttoopp,, sswwiittcchh ooffff eennggiinnee
and check
ribbed belt.
If it is
lloooossee
or broken,
ddoo nnoott ddrriivvee oonn
– the coolant pump is no longer being dri-
ven. The belt must be checked/ renewed.
If the warning lamp comes on although
the V–belt or ribbed belt is not broken or
loose, one can normally drive on to the
nearest Technical Service Centre.
As the battery will continue to discharge,
all electrical consumers which are not
absolutely necessary should be switched
off.
6
7
2
0
4
0
1
0
30
5
0
!
EPC
P
8
9
10
11
12
171819
13
14
21
22
20 16 15
IB9-024
2.18
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– INSTRUMENT PANEL
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
1100 BBrraakkeess//HHaanndd bbrraakkee
The warning lamp comes on when the
brake fluid level is too low.
The ignition must be switched on.
On vehicles with ABS*, the warning lamp
will light up for a few seconds when the
ignition is switched on or the engine
started. If the ABS system* fails it will also
light up together with the ABS warning
lamp.
WWaarrnniinngg
IIff tthhee ppiilloott lliigghhtt ddooeess nnoott ggoo oouutt oorr
iitt ccoommeess oonn dduurriinngg tthhee jjoouurrnneeyy,,
tthhee fflluuiidd lleevveell iinn tthhee ddeeppoossiitt iiss ttoooo
llooww.. HHaavvee tthhee bbrraakkee ssyysstteemm sseerr--
vviicceedd iimmmmeeddiiaatteellyy aatt aa TTeecchhnniiccaall
SSeerrvviiccee CCeennttrree..
MMeeaannwwhhiillee yyoouu wwiillll hhaavvee ttoo pprreessss
hhaarrddeerr oonn tthhee bbrraakkee ppeeddaall aanndd
bbrraakkiinngg ddiissttaanncceess wwiillll bbee ggrreeaatteerr..
IIff tthhee bbrraakkee ssyysstteemm aanndd AABBSS ppiilloott
lliigghhttss ccoommee oonn aatt tthhee ssaammee ttiimmee,,
tthhee rreeaarr wwhheeeellss mmaayy lloocckk pprreemmaa--
ttuurreellyy wwhhiillee bbrraakkiinngg.. GGoo iimmmmeeddii--
aatteellyy ttoo aa TTeecchhnniiccaall SSeerrvviiccee CCeennttrree
ddrriivviinngg vveerryy ccaarreeffuullllyy aanndd ttaakkee pprree--
ccaauuttiioonnss..
HHaanndd bbrraakkee
The pilot light will come on when the hand
brake is set and the ignition is switched
on. It should go out when the hand brake
is taken off.
1111 EEnnggiinnee ooiill pprreessssuurree//
lleevveell
The warning light lights up for a few sec-
onds as a functional check when the igni-
tion is switched on.
If the warning lamp is red or yellow or
flashes it indicates that the engine oil
pressure or level is too low. This warning
lamp will also light up if there is a defect
in the oil level indicator.
IIff lliigghhttss uupp oorr ffllaasshheess rreedd
((iinnssuuffffiicciieenntt ooiill pprreessssuurree))
Should the warning light flash or light up
while driving you will also hear three
times an acoustic warning as soon as the
engine runs at over 1500 r.p.m. You must
stop the car and turn the engine off: check
the oil level and top up if necessary. See
the "Engine oil" chapter.
If the warning lamp flashes even though
the oil level is in order, do not continue
driving. Do not even run the engine at
idling speed. Call in expert assistance.
If while driving the engine speed de-
creases below idling speed the oil pres-
sure warning lamp may light up. Increase
engine speed by accelerating or changing
down gear.
INSTRUMENT PANEL –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.19
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
LLiigghhttss uupp yyeellllooww ((ooiill lleevveell** ttoooo llooww))
If the pilot light lights up yellow the level
is too low. Stop engine and refill oil. See
"Engine oil" chapter.
When opening the bonnet the oil level
warning is reset. However, if you do not
refill oil the warning will reappear after
about 100 km.
FFllaasshheess yyeellllooww ((ddeeffeeccttiivvee ooiill lleevveell**
iinnddiiccaattoorr))
If the oil level indicator is defective an
acoustic signal will sound and the warn-
ing lamp will flash several times.
From the moment of the defect to the
check-up of the engine the oil level needs
to be checked regularly, preferably when
filling the tank.
1122 TTaaiillggaattee
The pilot light* comes on if the tailgate is
open or badly closed.
1133 DDiiaaggnnoossiiss**//
EExxcceessss ooff ppoolllluuttiioonn
This pilot light lights up when the ignition
is switched on as a testing device and
goes out after a few seconds.
In case of failure due to excessive pollu-
tion it will start to flash.
1144 EElleeccttrroonniicc iimmmmoobbiilliizzeerr
When switching the ignition on, the data
from the vehicle key is automatically
processed. This procedure is confirmed by
the warning lamp lighting up briefly.
If an unauthorized key is used the pilot
light will flash continuously. The vehicle
cannot be started. See also "Keys with
remote control" chapter.
1155 BBrraakkee wweeaarr mmoonniittoorr**
The pilot light comes on for about 3 sec-
onds as a check when you switch the igni-
tion on. If the pilot light comes on while
you are driving you will also hear an
alarm.
If when you switch the ignition on the
pilot light lights up and you hear the
alarm, it means the brake pads are worn.
IInn tthhiiss ccaassee yyoouu sshhoouulldd ggoo ttoo aa
TTeecchhnniiccaall SSeerrvviiccee CCeennttrree ttoo hhaavvee tthhee
ffrroonntt aanndd rreeaarr bbrraakkee ppaaddss cchheecckkeedd**..
6
7
2
0
4
0
1
0
30
5
0
!
EPC
P
8
9
10
11
12
171819
13
14
21
22
20 16 15
IB9-024
2.20
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– INSTRUMENT PANEL
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
1166 WWiinnddssccrreeeenn wwaasshheerr
wwaatteerr lleevveell**
When the ignition is switched on, this
warning light lights up as a functional
check.
This warning lamp will light up if the water
level in the screen washer reservoir
becomes too low.
Add water to the windshield and head-
light washers. See "Windshield washer"
chapter.
1177 AAnnttii--lloocckkiinngg bbrraakkee
ssyysstteemm ((AABBSS))**
When the ignition is switched on, this
warning light lights up as a functional
check.
This warning lamp monitors the
AABBSS
and
EEDDLL
* systems.
AAnnttii--lloocckk BBrraakkee SSyysstteemm ((AABBSS))**
The warning lamp comes on for a few sec-
onds when the ignition is switched on or
the engine started. The lamp goes out
after an automatic test sequence has
been completed.
If the ABS warning lamp does not come on
when the ignition is switched on, does
not go out, or comes on when driving, the
system is faulty.
A fault in the ABS system is indicated as
follows:
JJuusstt tthhee AABBSS wwaarrnniinngg llaammpp lliigghhttss
uupp..
The vehicle can still be braked with
normal braking system but without ABS.
TThhee vveehhiiccllee sshhoouulldd bbee ttaakkeenn ttoo aa
TTeecchhnniiccaall SSeerrvviiccee CCeennttrree aass ssoooonn aass
ppoossssiibbllee..
AABBSS wwaarrnniinngg llaammpp lliigghhttss uupp
ttooggeetthheerr wwiitthh bbrraakkee ssyysstteemm wwaarrnniinngg
llaammpp..
Not only is the ABS system defec-
tive, but a
cchhaannggee iinn nnoorrmmaall bbrraakkiinngg
cchhaarraacctteerriissttiiccss ccaann aallssoo bbee eexxppeecctteedd..
WWaarrnniinngg
IIff tthheerree iiss aa ffaauulltt iinn tthhee AABBSS ssyysstteemm
tthhee rreeaarr wwhheeeellss ccaann lloocckk rreellaattiivveellyy
qquuiicckkllyy.. IInn cceerrttaaiinn cciirrccuummssttaanncceess
tthhiiss ccoouulldd mmaakkee tthhee bbaacckk eenndd ooff
tthhee ccaarr sswwiinngg vviioolleennttllyy..
IIff tthhiiss hhaappppeennss ddrriivvee wwiitthh uuttmmoosstt
ccaarree ttoo tthhee nneeaarreesstt TTeecchhnniiccaall
SSeerrvviiccee CCeennttrree ttoo hhaavvee tthhee ffaauulltt
rreeppaaiirreedd..
In versions with an anti-skid regulator in
the driving wheels, or an electronic stabil-
ity programme, the TCS/ESP pilot light
will also come on if the ABS fails. For more
details see pages 3.11, 3.12 and 3.13.
EElleeccttrroonniicc DDiiffffeerreennttiiaall LLoocckk ((EEDDLL))**
The EDL system works in conjunction with
the ABS. Failure of the EDL system is indi-
cated by the ABS warning lamp lighting
up.
TThhee vveehhiiccllee sshhoouulldd bbee ttaakkeenn ttoo aa
TTeecchhnniiccaall SSeerrvviiccee CCeennttrree aass ssoooonn aass
ppoossssiibbllee..
Further details on EDL are given on page
3.11.
INSTRUMENT PANEL –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.21
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
1188 DDrriivvee wwhheeeellss ssppiinn
rreegguullaattoorr ((TTCCSS))**
The warning light lights up for a few sec-
onds as a functional check when the igni-
tion is switched on; it should go off after a
couple of seconds.
If the TCS works while the vehicle is in
motion, the pilot light flashes.
If the system is disconnected or has a
fault, the pilot light will stay on.
As the TCS works in combination with the
ABS, if the ABS breaks down the TCS pilot
light also comes on.
For more information see page 3.11.
1188 EElleeccttrroonniicc SSttaabbiilliittyy
PPrrooggrraamm ((EESSPP))**
The warning light lights up for a few sec-
onds as a functional check when the igni-
tion is switched on; it should go off after a
couple of seconds.
If the ESP works while the vehicle is in
motion, the pilot light flashes.
If the system is disconnected or has a
fault, the pilot light will stay on.
As the ESP works in combination with the
ABS, if the ABS breaks down the ESP pilot
light also comes on.
For more information see page 3.13.
1199 PPaarrkkiinngg lliigghhtt//
ddiippppeedd bbeeaamm
Dipped beam, parking or side light pilot
light (green). Works with the ignition off.
6
7
2
0
4
0
1
0
30
5
0
!
EPC
P
8
9
10
11
12
171819
13
14
21
22
20 16 15
IB9-024
2.22
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– INSTRUMENT PANEL
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
2200 RReeaarr ffoogg lliigghhtt**
The pilot light will light up as soon as the
rear fog light is switched on. For further
details see "Switches" chapter.
2211 AAiirr BBaagg ssyysstteemm
11))
When the ignition is turned on, the warn-
ing light will remain lit for a few seconds.
If the warning light flashes for about 12
seconds following engagement of the
ignition, this means that at least one Air
Bag has been disconnected in a Technical
Service. See “Deactivation of the Air
Bag”.
TThheerreeffoorree iiff tthhee wwaarrnniinngg lliigghhtt ddooeess
nnoott ffllaasshh oorr iitt lliigghhttss oorr ffllaasshheess wwhhiillee
tthhee vveehhiiccllee iiss iinn uussee,, iitt mmeeaannss tthhaatt
tthheerree iiss pprroobblleemm wwiitthh tthhee AAiirr BBaagg..
PPrroocceeeedd iimmmmeeddiiaatteellyy ttoo aa TTeecchhnniiccaall
SSeerrvviiccee ttoo ssoollvvee tthhee pprroobblleemm..
1)
This equipment may vary according to the
country.
2222 PPrreehheeaattiinngg ssyysstteemm
(Diesel engines only)
When the engine is
ccoolldd
the warning
lamp comes on when key is turned to
Drive position (ignition on).
If the warning lamp does not come on,
there is a defect in the glow plug system
call in expert assistance.
Once the pilot light switched off switch
engine on immediately. See "Starting the
engine" chapter.
When the engine is
wwaarrmm
the glow plug
lamp does not come on the engine can
be started straight away.
NNoottee
If while driving a fault occurs in the diesel
engine management system, this is indi-
cated by the warning lamp flashing. The
engine must be checked as soon as pos-
sible by a Technical Service Centre.
2222 EElleeccttrroonniicc aacccceelleerraattoorr--
ppeeddaall ccoonnttrrooll ((EEPPCC))
If there is a fault in the accelerator pedal
working, a warning light will switch on.
Have the fault repaired at a Technical
Service Centre.
OPENING AND CLOSING –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.23
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
KKeeyyss
The vehicle is supplied with two keys
AA
which fit all locks.
In addition, plastic key chain
BB
with the
key number is included.
WWaarrnniinngg
AAllwwaayyss ttaakkee tthhee kkeeyy ffrroomm tthhee
iiggnniittiioonn wwhheenneevveerr yyoouu lleeaavvee
tthhee vveehhiiccllee eevveenn iiff oonnllyy ffoorr aa
mmoommeenntt.. TThhiiss iiss ppaarrttiiccuullaarrllyy iimmppoorr--
ttaanntt iiff cchhiillddrreenn aarree ttoo rreemmaaiinn iinn tthhee
vveehhiiccllee.. TThheeyy mmiigghhtt ssttaarrtt tthhee
eennggiinnee oorr ssoommee ootthheerr eelleeccttrriiccaall
ccoommppoonneenntt,, ee..gg.. eelleeccttrriicc wwiinnddoowwss..
RRiisskk ooff aacccciiddeenntt!!
WWaaiitt uunnttiill tthhee vveehhiiccllee hhaass
ssttooppppeedd bbeeffoorree ttaakkiinngg tthhee kkeeyy oouutt..
OOtthheerrwwiissee tthhee sstteeeerriinngg mmaayy bblloocckk..
RReeppllaacceemmeenntt kkeeyyss
FFoorr rreeaassoonnss ooff sseeccuurriittyy,, rreeppllaacceemmeenntt
kkeeyyss aarree oonnllyy aavvaaiillaabbllee ffrroomm SSEEAATT
OOffffiicciiaall SSeerrvviiccee CCeennttrreess..
KKeeyy ttaagg
The key tag contains the key number as
well as the secret code for the immo-
bilizer, which are needed to obtain
replacement keys. With this number you
can order a duplicate of your key from a
SEAT Official Service Center.
NNoottee
YYoouu sshhoouulldd kkeeeepp tthhiiss ppllaassttiicc kkeeyy
cchhaaiinn iinn aa ppaarrttiiccuullaarrllyy ssaaffee ppllaaccee
ssiinnccee oonnllyy wwiitthh tthhiiss nnuummbbeerr ccaann
ccooppiieess ooff tthhee kkeeyy bbee mmaaddee..
For this reason you should give the buyer
this key tag if you sell the vehicle.
A
B
B11-002D
2.24
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– OPENING AND CLOSING
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
Vehicles with remote control* have two
keys. One is a conventional key (see pre-
vious page). The other incorporates a
remote control function* (see "Radio-fre-
quency remote control" chapter).
NNoottee
In some model versions the remote con-
trol key may be folded. Its remote control
function is identical to any remote control
key. See "Radio-frequency remote con-
trol" chapter.
FFoollddaabbllee kkeeyy**
TToo uunnffoolldd
the key sword, press button
AA
.
It will unfold with a spring.
TToo ffoolldd
the key sword, press button
AA
and
guide it with your hand until it is com-
pletely folded.
LEO-005
A
LEO-006
KKeeyyss wwiitthh rreemmoottee ccoonnttrrooll**
OPENING AND CLOSING –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.25
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
EElleeccttrroonniicc iimmmmoobbiilliisseerr
The immobiliser prevents unauthorised
persons from using your vehicle.
A micro-chip is located in the head of the
key which automatically deactivates the
immobiliser when the key is inserted in
the ignition lock.
The system is automatically activated
when the ignition is switched off.
NNoottee
The engine can thus only be started with a
correctly coded Genuine SEAT key.
Trouble free operation of your vehicle can
only be guaranteed when using genuine
keys.
DDoooorrss
2.26
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– OPENING AND CLOSING
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
FFrroomm tthhee oouuttssiiddee ooff tthhee vveehhiiccllee
, it may
be locked or unlocked using the driver
door key.
UUppoonn ooppeenniinngg
, the latch will rise up (for
vehicles with central locking).
For vehicles equipped with electric win-
dows and central locking, if the key is
maintained in the opening position all of
the electric side windows will open.
UUppoonn cclloossiinngg
, the latch will descend (for
vehicles with central locking).
In some vehicle models equipped with
electric windows and central locking, if
the key is maintained in the locking posi-
tion on the driver side, any side windows
left open as well as the electric sunroof
will close.
For vehicles without central locking, the
passenger door and the rear doors may be
locked from the outside without using a
key. Just press the button down and close
the door.
The latch on the driver’s door may not be
pushed down while the door is open (only
in vehicles without central locking). This
avoids accidentally leaving the keys in the
ignition.
WWaarrnniinngg!!
EExxeerrcciissee eexxttrreemmee ccaauuttiioonn wwhheenn
cclloossiinngg tthhee wwiinnddoowwss aanndd tthhee ssuunn--
rrooooff ffrroomm tthhee oouuttssiiddee ooff tthhee vveehhii--
ccllee..
CClloossiinngg ffrroomm tthhee oouuttssiiddee wwiitthh--
oouutt ttaakkiinngg ccaarree oorr oobbsseerrvviinngg aallll tthhee
vveehhiiccllee mmaayy ccaauussee bbrruuiissiinngg ffoorr
ootthheerr ppeeooppllee eessppeecciiaallllyy cchhiillddrreenn..
WWhheenn lloocckkiinngg aa vveehhiiccllee,, nneevveerr
lleeaavvee cchhiillddrreenn uunnaaccccoommppaanniieedd
iinnssiiddee,, aass iitt wwiillll mmaakkee iitt mmoorree ddiiffffii--
ccuulltt ttoo pprroovviiddee aassssiissttaannccee iiff
rreeqquuiirreedd..
FFrroomm tthhee iinnssiiddee ooff tthhee vveehhiiccllee
, all the
doors may be locked by pushing the secu-
rity buttons down (in vehicles without
central locking).
WWaarrnniinngg!!
WWhheenn tthhee ddoooorrss aarree lloocckkeedd,, aannyy
iinnttrruussiioonn iiss iimmppeeddeedd,, ffoorr eexxaammppllee
wwhhiillee ssttooppppeedd aatt aa rreedd lliigghhtt..
OPENING AND CLOSING –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.27
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
CCeennttrraall lloocckkiinngg**
When the key is used in the driver’s door,
all doors and the boot are unlocked at the
same time by the central locking system.
The central locking system is fitted with a
lloocckkiinngg sseeccuurriittyy ssyysstteemm
(double lock):
When the vehicle is locked with the key or
the remote control from the outside, all of
the doors are locked impeding any
attempt to force them.
This system may be activated from the
oouuttssiiddee
either by using the key or the
radio-frequency remote control*.
LLoocckkiinngg llooccaattiioonnss ooff tthhee vveehhiiccllee
OOuuttssiiddee::
Driver’s door or by using the radio-fre-
quency remote control*.
IInnssiiddee::
By using the central locking switch
located on the handle of the driver’s door
(simple closure) (see page 2.29).
OOppeenniinngg
To
ooppeenn
your vehicle turn the key in the
lock of the driver’s door to the opening
position or use the radio-frequency
remote control*. All of the doors will be
unlocked
When the vehicle is opened using the
radio-frequency remote control*, the lock-
ing security system as well as the anti
theft alarm* are immediately deactivated.
The indicator on the driver’s door will stop
flashing. This warning light is fitted to
vehicles equipped with the locking secu-
rity system or the anti theft alarm*.
When the vehicle is opened using the key,
the locking security system (double lock-
ing) and the anti-theft alarm* are immedi-
ately deactivated.
When the vehicle is opened, the interior
lighting will come on for 30 seconds as if
a door is open and the indicators will
flash twice.
If, for any reason, the central locking
ceases to function then, in general, the
drivers door and boot may be opened
conventionally using the key but neither
the locking security system nor the anti
theft alarm can be activated.
If the key is maintained in the opening
position in the driver’s door the electric
windows will open, in vehicles equipped
with them.
NNootteess
If for any reason the central locking
ceases to function, neither the rear doors
nor the passenger door may be opened.
The lock mechanism of the driver’s door,
the boot and the ignition locking mecha-
nism all possess a
rroottaattiioonn mmeecchhaanniissmm
(which will turn freely without the key)*.
When the locking mechanism is operated
with any object other than the key, the
rotation mechanism is activated. The
manipulated cylinder will rotate without
opening the vehicle or turning the igni-
tion on.
If the rotation mechanism is activated
when the key is inserted then remove the
key fully and then reinsert it to open the
vehicle. There will be no damage to the
locks.
1)
This function may vary according to the model
and country.
2.28
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– OPENING AND CLOSING
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
LLoocckkiinngg
To
lloocckk
your vehicle,
ttuurrnn tthhee kkeeyy
oonnccee
(the double lock is activated) to the
locking position in the driver’s door lock.
All of the doors and the boot will lock. The
locking security system (double lock) and
the anti theft alarm* will be immediately
activated and the indicator light on the
driver’s door will begin to flash to indicate
this. This warning light is fitted to vehicles
equipped with the locking security system
or the anti theft alarm*.
When the vehicle is locked, all of the inte-
rior lights that may be on are turned off
and the indicator lights flash once.
The activation of the locking security sys-
tem (double lock) is indicated by the
flashing of the indicator light located on
the top of the driver’s door panel at the
level of the window. Also, for vehicles
equipped with the anti theft alarm*, the
indicator light will indicate when the
alarm is on.
WWaarrnniinngg!!
IIff tthhee vveehhiiccllee iiss cclloosseedd ffrroomm tthhee
oouuttssiiddee bbyy ttuurrnniinngg tthhee kkeeyy oonnccee ttoo
tthhee lloocckkiinngg ppoossiittiioonn ((ddoouubbllee lloocckk)),,
nnoo ppeerrssoonneessppeecciiaallllyy cchhiillddrreenn--
sshhoouulldd rreemmaaiinn iinnssiiddee tthhee vveehhiiccllee
dduuee ttoo tthhee ffaacctt tthhaatt tthhee ddoooorrss ccaann--
nnoott bbee ooppeenneedd ffrroomm tthhee iinnssiiddee
uussiinngg tthhee ddoooorr hhaannddllee oorr tthhee cceenn--
ttrraall lloocckkiinngg sswwiittcchh ((sseeee cceennttrraall
lloocckkiinngg sswwiittcchh iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss)).. IIff tthhee
vveehhiiccllee iiss eeqquuiippppeedd wwiitthh eelleeccttrriicc
wwiinnddoowwss,, tthheessee ccaannnnoott bbee ooppeenneedd
ffrroomm tthhee iinnssiiddee eeiitthheerr ((sseeee tthhee
iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss ffoorr tthhee eelleeccttrriicc wwiinn--
ddoowwss))..
CChhiillddrreenn sshhoouulldd nneevveerr bbee lleefftt
aalloonnee iinnssiiddee tthhee vveehhiiccllee dduuee ttoo tthhee
ffaacctt tthhaatt iiff tthhee ddoooorrss aarree aacccciiddeenn--
ttaallllyy lloocckkeedd,, iitt wwiillll bbee ddiiffffiiccuulltt ttoo
pprroovviiddee aassssiissttaannccee iiff nneeeeddeedd..
If the key is
ttuurrnneedd ttwwoo ccoonnsseeccuuttiivvee
ttiimmeess
to the locking position in less than
one second then only the simple locking
mechanism is activate for all doors and
the boot. The locking security system
(double lock) is
nnoott
activated.
If the locking security system (double
lock) is not activated then the vehicle may
be unlocked
ffrroomm tthhee iinnssiiddee
. To do this,
simply pull the corresponding door han-
dle until the door opens.
For vehicles
1)
fitted with electric win-
dows or an electric sunroof, when the key
is maintained in the locking position the
electric windows will close fully followed
by the electric sunroof if it is open.
If the driver’s door is
iinnccoorrrreeccttllyy
cclloosseedd
or
ooppeenn
(door “ajar”), the vehicle
cannot be locked. In order to lock the
doors of the vehicle, the driver’s door
should be completely closed. If any other
door of the vehicle is incorrectly shut then
all doors except this door will be locked. If
properly closed afterwards, this door will
join the locking system of the vehicle.
In the case where the vehicle is opened
using the radio-frequency remote control
and neither the locks or the doors are
used, after 30 seconds the vehicle will
automatically be relocked so that it is not
accidentally left open.
1)
This function may vary according to the model
and country.
OPENING AND CLOSING –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.29
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
CCeennttrraall lloocckkiinngg bbuuttttoonn**
The central locking button makes it possi-
ble to lock/unlock the whole vehicle from
the inside. The button is located in the
door release lever on the driver’s door
(see illustration).
LLoocckkiinngg
By pressing the right hand side of the
switch
AA
all doors and the boot lid/tail-
gate are locked. It is now no longer possi-
ble to open the doors or boot lid/tailgate.
Unwanted access from outside (e.g. at
traffic lights) is also prevented in this
way.
If the driver’s door is
ooppeenn
it will not be
locked. This is to prevent you from locking
yourself out.
The locking security system (double lock)
and the anti theft alarm* are
nnoott
acti-
vated if the push button is used.
AAuuttoommaattiicc LLoocckkiinngg
The doors will lock automatically when
the vehicle exceeds speeds of 15 km/h.
NNootteess
IIff tthhee vveehhiiccllee iiss lloocckkeedd uussiinngg tthhee cceenn--
ttrraall lloocckkiinngg sswwiittcchh,, iinnddiivviidduuaall ddoooorrss
mmaayy bbee uunnlloocckkeedd.. TToo ddoo tthhiiss,, ssiimmppllyy
ppuullll tthhee ccoorrrreessppoonnddiinngg ddoooorr hhaannddllee
uunnttiill tthhee ddoooorr ooppeennss..
A
B
LEO-007A
2.30
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– OPENING AND CLOSING
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
UUnnlloocckkiinngg
Pushing the left part of the locking switch
BB
will open all doors.
AAuuttoommaattiicc UUnnlloocckkiinngg
The doors unlock automatically when the
key is removed from the ignition.
The button will also function when the
ignition is switched off.
WWaarrnniinngg
IIff tthhee cceennttrraall lloocckkiinngg bbuuttttoonn iinn
tthhee ddoooorr rreelleeaassee lleevveerr oonn tthhee ddrrii--
vveerrss ddoooorr iiss ooppeerraatteedd,, aallll ootthheerr
ddoooorrss aanndd tthhee ttaaiillggaattee aarree lloocckkeedd
aauuttoommaattiiccaallllyy..
HHoowweevveerr wwhheenn tthhee ddoooorrss aarree
lloocckkeedd oouuttssiiddee hheellpp iinn aann eemmeerr--
ggeennccyy iiss hhiinnddeerreedd,, aanndd ssoo cchhiillddrreenn
sshhoouulldd nneevveerr bbee lleefftt aalloonnee iinn tthhee
vveehhiiccllee..
LLoocckkiinngg tthhee ddoooorrss aanndd ttaaiillggaattee
pprreevveennttss iinnttrruuddeerrss ffrroomm ggeettttiinngg iinn
tthhee vveehhiiccllee,, ee..gg.. aatt ttrraaffffiicc lliigghhttss..
FFoorr vveehhiicclleess eeqquuiippppeedd wwiitthh AAiirr
BBaaggss aanndd oonnllyy iinn tthhee eevveenntt ooff aa ccooll--
lliissiioonn wwhheerree aann AAiirr BBaagg iiss ddeettoo--
nnaatteedd,, tthhee cceennttrraall lloocckkiinngg wwiillll
uunnlloocckk aallll ddoooorrss aauuttoommaattiiccaallllyy ttoo
ffaacciilliittaattee tthhee eevvaaccuuaattiioonn ooff tthhee
vveehhiiccllee.. TThhee vveehhiicclleess iinntteerriioorr lliigghhtt
aanndd tthhee wwaarrnniinngg lliigghhttss wwiillll rreemmaaiinn
lliitt uunnttiill tthhee kkeeyy iiss rreemmoovveedd ffrroomm
tthhee iiggnniittiioonn aanndd rreeiinnsseerrtteedd aaggaaiinn..
OOnnccee tthhee vveehhiiccllee hhaass bbeeeenn
lloocckkeedd wwiitthh tthhee rraaddiioo wwaavvee rreemmoottee
ccoonnttrrooll oorr wwiitthh aa rreegguullaarr kkeeyy tthhee
cceennttrraall lloocckkiinngg kknnoobb bbeeccoommeess
iinnaaccttiivvee.. IItt nnoo lloonnggeerr wwoorrkkss.. FFoorr
tthhiiss rreeaassoonn,, ddoo nnoott lleeaavvee aannyyoonnee
iinn tthhee vveehhiiccllee,, iinn ppaarrttiiccuullaarr cchhiill--
ddrreenn,, ssiinnccee iitt iiss nnoott ppoossssiibbllee ttoo
ooppeenn ffrroomm tthhee iinnssiiddee oorr ffrroomm tthhee
oouuttssiiddee.. FFuurrtthheerrmmoorree,, tthhee vveehhiiccllee
ccaannnnoott bbee uunnlloocckkeedd bbyy ssttiicckkiinngg
tthhee hhaanndd iinn tthhee wwiinnddooww aanndd
ppuulllliinngg tthhee kknnoobb ffrroomm tthhee iinnssiiddee oorr
tthhee cceennttrraall lloocckk ccoommmmaanndd..
TThheerreeffoorree,, nnoo iinnttrruuddeerr ccaann uunnlloocckk
tthhee vveehhiiccllee..
TTaakkee ggrreeaatt ccaarree wwhheenn cclloossiinngg tthhee
wwiinnddoowwss aanndd tthhee eelleeccttrriicc rrooooff**
ffrroomm tthhee oouuttssiiddee!!
IIff yyoouu cclloossee ffrroomm tthhee oouuttssiiddee
ccaarreelleessssllyy oorr wwiitthhoouutt vviissiibbiilliittyy yyoouu
mmaayy ccaauussee sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy eessppee--
cciiaallllyy ttoo cchhiillddrreenn..
OPENING AND CLOSING ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.31
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
CChhiilldd ssaaffeettyy
The rear doors also have child-proof
catches.
CChhiilldd lloocckk
Using the vehicle key, turn the child lock
slot in the direction of the arrow (figure
AA
). This way, the inside door handle of the
affected door is deactivated and the door
can only be opened from the outside. The
security button must be in the up
1)
posi-
tion and the vehicle unlocked.
RReemmoovviinngg tthhee cchhiilldd lloocckk
Using the vehicle key, turn the child lock
slot in the direction of the arrow (figure
BB
). This will reactivate the door handle of
the affected door and it may once again
be opened from the inside. The security
button must be in the up
1)
position and
the vehicle unlocked.
1)
Only vehicles without central locking.
B
A
B6L-0012
2.32
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– OPENING AND CLOSING
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
TTaaiillggaattee
When the key slot is vertical (
aa
) the tail-
gate/boot lid is locked or unlocked auto-
matically by the central locking system. It
can also be locked or unlocked separately
with the main key.
When key slot is horizontal (
bb
) the tail-
gate/boot lid will be locked all the time
after closing. It can then only be unlocked
with the main key.
To unlock boot lid, insert key and turn as
far as possible in the direction of the
arrow (
cc
). The key cannot be pulled out of
the slot in this position.
NNoottee
The alarm will go off if the boot is opened
manually using the key while the alarm is
activated.
TToo ooppeenn
the tailgate when the key slot is
vertical (see illustration), pull the handle
and lift the tailgate.
TToo cclloossee
pull the tailgate down using one
of the handles on the interior embellish-
ment and slam it gently.
If the key slot is horizontal it means the
tailgate is permanently locked and may
only be opened with the main key.
WWaarrnniinngg
AAfftteerr cclloossiinngg tthhee ttaaiillggaattee aallwwaayyss
ppuullll iitt uuppwwaarrddss ttoo mmaakkee ssuurree iitt iiss
pprrooppeerrllyy cclloosseedd.. OOtthheerrwwiissee iitt mmaayy
sspprriinngg ooppeenn wwhhiillee tthhee vveehhiiccllee iiss iinn
mmoottiioonn,, eevveenn iiff iitt hhaass bbeeeenn lloocckkeedd..
TThhee ttaaiillggaattee mmuusstt aallwwaayyss bbee
pprrooppeerrllyy cclloosseedd wwhheenn tthhee vveehhiiccllee
iiss iinn mmoottiioonn ttoo pprreevveenntt eexxhhaauusstt
ffuummeess ffrroomm ggeettttiinngg iinnssiiddee..
DDaannggeerr ooff iinnttooxxiiccaattiioonn!!
IB9-016
a
b
c
IB9-015
OPENING AND CLOSING –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.33
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
AAnnttii--tthheefftt aallaarrmm ssyysstteemm**
With the anti-theft alarm, break-in
attempts and theft of the vehicle are ren-
dered more difficult. The system triggers
acoustic and optical warning signals if
someone tries to gain unauthorised
access to the vehicle.
The alarm system and the locking security
system (double lock) are automatically
activated when the driver’s door is
locked. To lock the door either turn the
key
oonnccee
in the lock towards the locking
position or press button
22
on the radio-
frequency remote control*. The system is
then activated immediately and the indi-
cator light located on the driver’s door
will flash along with the flashers indicat-
ing that the system have been turned on.
For vehicles equipped with an addi-
tional alarm system* , if you access the
car by using the driver’s door key you
have 15 seconds to introduce the key into
the ignition lock and activate it. Other-
wise the alarm will trigger off for 30 sec.
and car start up will be deactivated.
You can only turn off the alarm by press-
ing the "open" key on the remote control.
For cars without radio-frequency remote
control keys you must wait for 30 sec.
until the alarm cuts off. Then close the
door with the key and repeat the previ-
ously described process all over again.
The alarm signal will be triggered for 30
seconds if access is attempted via any
door that is not the driver's.
NNoottee
When you lock the car the indicator pilot
lights will only come on if the alarm has
been properly activated (all security areas
have been properly locked).
If a door or the boot are left open when
the alarm is connected, they will not be
incorporated into the car’s protection sys-
tem. If after you lock the doors or boot,
they will be automatically incorporated
into the security areas and the indicator
signals will show.
If the vehicle is locked and the alarm is
activated, you do not need to open the car
to deactivate it.
To do this, turn the key twice in the dri-
ver’s door lock to the lock position or
press twice the lock button in the key han-
dle fitted with the radio-frequency remote
control.
The alarm will be triggered if, with the
vehicle locked, one of
the doors,
the bonnet, or
the boot
is opened or
the ignition is switched on.
When the alarm is triggered the horn
sounds and a flashing signal is activated
for about 30 seconds.
TToo ddiissaaccttiivvaattee tthhee aannttii--tthheefftt aallaarrmm
ttuurrnn tthhee kkeeyy iinn tthhee ooppeenniinngg ddiirreeccttiioonn
oorr pprreessss tthheeooppeenn kkeeyy oonn tthhee
rreemmoottee ccoonnttrrooll..
ttwwoo fflliicckkeerrss:: ooppeenn aanndd ddiissaaccttiivvaattee
tthhee aallaarrmm
oonnee fflliicckkeerr:: lloocckk aanndd aaccttiivvaattee aallaarrmm
2.34
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– OPENING AND CLOSING
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
NNootteess
The warning lamp goes out after
approx. 28 days. This prevents the battery
becoming discharged when the vehicle is
not used for a long period. The alarm sys-
tem remains activated.
The alarm signal will be triggered a sec-
ond time if one of the protected parts of
the car is interfered with again after the
alarm signal has stopped (for instance if
the tailgate is opened after one of the
doors has been opened).
The alarm can also be activated and
deactivated via the radio wave remote-
control*. Further information can be
found under the heading ”Radio wave
remote control”.
OPENING AND CLOSING –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.35
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
VVoolluummeettrriicc sseennssoorr**
This is a surveillance function or a control
incorporated in the anti-theft alarm sys-
tem which detects through ultrasound
unauthorized access to the vehicle inte-
rior (i.e. through a window).
This system has two sensors: a transmit-
ter and a receiver.
AAccttiivvaattee
The volumetric sensor is switched on
automatically when the anti-theft alarm is
activated whether by locking manually
with the key or by remote control.
DDeeaaccttiivvaattee
The volumetric sensor is deactivated
when:
1 Unlocking the vehicle manually with
the key in the door lock or by radio
wave remote control.
2 – Pressing the button located in the
vehicle’s interior behind the driver’s
door in the lower part for at least one
second immediately after having
unlocked the driver’s door and after
having removed the key from the
ignition.
NNoottee
If, after deactivating the volumetric
sensor, the door is locked with the remote
control or manually with the key in the
door lock within less than 30 seconds the
volumetric sensor is deactivated even
though all other anti-theft alarm functions
remain activated.
After this time-span the deactivation of
the volumetric sensor is canceled.
In case of relocking while the alarm was
activated without the volumetric sensor
function, this relocking will cause a con-
nection of all the alarm functions, except
for the volumetric sensor. If it was not dis-
connected voluntarily it will be reacti-
vated during the following alarm connec-
tion.
If the volumetric sensor caused the
alarm to set off this will be indicated by
flickering of the pilot light in the driver’s
door when unlocking the vehicle. This
flickering is different than the flickering of
the activated alarm.
If the volumetric sensor has caused the
alarm to set off three times the alarm sys-
tem will no longer go off.
Other sensors (door opening, luggage
compartment, etc.) will continue to set off
the alarm.
AR0-041
2.36
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– OPENING AND CLOSING
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
RRaaddiioo--ffrreeqquueennccyy rreemmoottee ccoonnttrrooll kkeeyy**
The following functions can be operated
using the radio wave remote control with-
out using the key manually.
Locking and unlocking the central lock-
ing system.
Connecting and disconnecting the anti-
theft alarm system*.
Switch on interior light (see "Interior
lights" chapter)
The radio wave transmitter with its battery
is located in the handle of the key. The
radio wave receiver is located inside the
vehicle.
The
eeffffeeccttiivvee rraannggee
(red area) of the
remote control is shown in the illustra-
tion. The maximum range depends on var-
ious conditions.
The range will reduce as the batteries lose
power.
NNoottee
The remote control becomes inopera-
tive when the key is in the ignition.
LEO-008
OPENING AND CLOSING –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.37
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
OOppeenniinngg aanndd cclloossiinngg tthhee vveehhiiccllee
To
uunnlloocckk
the vehicle, point the key from
within the effective range at the vehicle
and briefly press the “open” button
(arrow
11
). The indicators will flicker. To
lloocckk
the vehicle, briefly press the ”close”
button (arrow
22
). The indicators flicker
once.
If you press the ”close” button (arrow
22
)
ttwwiiccee
, the dead-lock mechanism and
anti-theft alarm are
ddeeaaccttiivvaatteedd
and the
indicators do not work.
SSeelleeccttiivvee UUnnlloocckkiinngg
Press the opening button (arrow
11
) once
to open only the driver’s door, leaving the
rest closed.
Press the opening button (arrow
11
) twice
to open all doors.
NNootteess
When the close or open buttons are
pressed a warning lamp will flash in the
key. If this lamp does not flash, the bat-
tery in the key might be discharged. In
this case a Technical Service Centre
should check or change the battery.
When the dead-lock mechanism and the
anti-theft alarm* are activated, proceed
as follows:
If the vehicle is unlocked by using the
open button on the radio-frequency
remote control*, all of the doors and the
boot
1)
will be relocked automatically if
they are not opened within 30 seconds.
However, the locking security system and
the anti theft alarm will remain deacti-
vated during these 30 seconds. This func-
tion prevents the vehicle being
aacccciiddeenn--
ttaallllyy ooppeenn
within range of the
radio-frequency remote control.
1)
The alarm and dead-lock mechanism will remain
in the same position as before opening.
2
1
LEO-009
2.38
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– OPENING AND CLOSING
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
SSyynncchhrroonniizzaattiioonn
If the vehicle cannot be opened by press-
ing the radio transmitter button, it could
be that the code of the key no longer
matches that of the control unit in the
vehicle. This can occur when the transmit-
ter button is frequently pressed outside
the effective range of the system.
WWee rreecc--
oommmmeenndd tthhaatt aa TTeecchhnniiccaall SSeerrvviiccee
CCeennttrree ttaakkee ccaarree ooff tthhiiss ffuunnccttiioonn..
To synchronize the key again the follow-
ing procedure must be followed:
1-
BBootthh
vehicle keys, the key with the
radio transmitter (
AA
) and the conven-
tional key (
BB
), must be used.
2- The synchronization process must be
completed within
3300 sseeccoonnddss
.
3- Use key (
BB
) to switch on ignition and
key (
AA
) to program.
4- Make sure that the vehicle is
ooppeenn
before you proceed to the program-
ming.
5- Place key (
BB
) in the ignition and switch
on.
6- Use key (
AA
) to lock the driver’s door
manually.
7- Now
uunnlloocckk
and
lloocckk
manually the
driver’s door with key (
AA
) while press-
ing button (
11 ooppeenn
).
8- Take the key out of the ignition.
Uncoded keys can be obtained at SEAT
Official Service Centers. These keys, how-
ever, must be synchronized by a SEAT
Official Service Center as the code for the
immobilizer also has to be programmed
in the head of the key.
AAuutthhoorriizzaattiioonn ffoorr uussee
The radio wave remote control fulfills all
norms. Its use has been approved by the
corresponding German office (Federal
Approvals Office For Telecommunications
of The Federal Republic of Germany).
All components have been marked
according to current stipulations.
This authorization is the basis for
approval in other countries.
OPENING AND CLOSING –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.39
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
EElleeccttrriicc wwiinnddoowwss**
The switches are located in the driver’s
door (see illustration).
11
– Driver’s door
22
– Front passenger door
33
– Safety switch*
44
– Right rear door*
55
– Left rear door.*
The electric windows can be activated
with the ignition on.
With the ignition off, the windows can be
activated for 10 minutes. They will stop
working when a front door is opened.
The safety switch blocks the buttons of
the rear windows. When the switch is
pressed again the buttons of the rear
doors will become operational.
There are additional controls on the pas-
senger door and the rear doors* for each
window. These controls will only open or
close their respective windows.
With the safety switch
33
in the driver’s
door, the rear electric windows can be
deactivated.
– Safety switch
oouutt
:
The switches in the rear doors can be
used.
– Safety switch
iinn
:
The switches in the rear doors cannot be
used.
2
1
3
4
5
LEO-010A
2.40
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– OPENING AND CLOSING
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
Electric windows with an automatic clos-
ing function* are equipped with a
ppoowweerr
lliimmiitteerr..
The windows stop closing automatically
should anything block it.
HHoowweevveerr tthhiiss
ppoowweerr lliimmiitteerr ffuunnccttiioonn ddooeess nnoott wwoorrkk
wwhheenn tthhee wwiinnddoowwss aarree cclloosseedd ffrroomm
oouuttssiiddee wwiitthh tthhee iiggnniittiioonn kkeeyy..
WWaarrnniinngg
AAllwwaayyss rreemmoovvee tthhee iiggnniittiioonn kkeeyy
wwhheenn lleeaavviinngg tthhee vveehhiiccllee eevveenn iiff
oonnllyy ffoorr aa sshhoorrtt ttiimmee.. NNeevveerr lleeaavvee
cchhiillddrreenn aalloonnee iinn tthhee vveehhiiccllee..
TThhee eelleeccttrriicc wwiinnddoowwss aarree oonnllyy
ddeeaaccttiivvaatteedd wwhheenn tthhee ddrriivveerrss oorr
ppaasssseennggeerr ddoooorrss aarree ooppeenneedd..
WWaattcchh oouutt wwhheenn cclloossiinngg tthhee wwiinn--
ddoowwss!! CCaarreelleessss oorr uunnccoonnttrroolllleedd
cclloossiinngg ooff tthhee wwiinnddoowwss ccaann ccaauussee
iinnjjuurriieess..
TThhee ddrriivveerr mmuusstt wwaarrnn tthhee ootthheerr
ooccccuuppaannttss ooff tthhee rriisskk wwhhiicchh ccaarree--
lleessss ooppeerraattiioonn ooff eelleeccttrriicc wwiinnddoowwss
eennttaaiillss..
NNoo oonnee sshhoouulldd rreemmaaiinn iinn tthhee
vveehhiiccllee wwhheenn lloocckkeedd ffrroomm tthhee oouutt--
ssiiddee,, aass tthhee wwiinnddoowwss ccaannnnoott bbee
ooppeenneedd iinn tthhee eevveenntt ooff aann eemmeerr--
ggeennccyy..
TTaakkee ggrreeaatt ccaarree wwhheenn cclloossiinngg tthhee
wwiinnddoowwss aanndd tthhee eelleeccttrriicc rrooooff**
ffrroomm tthhee oouuttssiiddee!!
CCaarreelleessss cclloossiinngg ffrroomm tthhee oouutt--
ssiiddee oorr wwiitthhoouutt vviissiibbiilliittyy ccaann ccaauussee
sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy,, eessppeecciiaallllyy ttoo cchhiill--
ddrreenn..
WWiinnddooww ooppeenniinngg aanndd cclloossiinngg
vvaarriiaannttss wwiitthh tthhee ddoooorr kkeeyyss
OOppeenniinngg vvaarriiaannttss
The window is
ooppeenneedd
by pressing the
corresponding door button lightly.
When the button is released the opening
process will stop.
Press the driver’s side door button full
down to open the window fully and auto-
matically.
When the button is pressed again the win-
dow stops immediately.
CClloossiinngg vvaarriiaannttss
The window is
cclloosseedd
by pulling the cor-
responding closing button lightly
When the button is released the closing
process will stop.
Pull the driver’s side door button fully
to close the window fully and automati-
cally.
When the button is pulled again the win-
dow stops immediately.
NNoottee
The controls of the passenger and rear
doors can only be used to open or close
the windows. Only the front windows may
be opened or closed automatically from
the driver's door controls.
OPENING AND CLOSING –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.41
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
TThhee rroollll--bbaacckk ffuunnccttiioonn**
1 – If the window in the driver or passen-
ger‘s door is hindered whilst closing
through stiffness or by an obstacle
(roll-back function), the window will
open again immediately.
2 – After the window has opened, you
must lift and hold the appropriate
switch for the affected window again
within 5 seconds. If the window is still
hindered whilst closing through stiff-
ness or by an obstacle, the window
will stop closing.
3 – After the window has stopped, you
must lift and hold the switch again
within 5 seconds in order to close the
window.
TThhee wwiinnddooww wwiillll nnooww cclloossee wwiitthh--
oouutt ppoowweerr lliimmiittaattiioonn..
NNoottee
If you wait for longer than 5 seconds
between the individual steps, the system
will reactivate.
WWaarrnniinngg
TTaakkee ggrreeaatt ccaarree wwhheenn cclloossiinngg tthhee
wwiinnddoowwss!! CClloossiinngg tthhee wwiinnddoowwss iinn
aa ccaarreelleessss oorr uunnccoonnttrroolllleedd mmaannnneerr
mmaayy ccaauussee bbrruuiisseess,, eessppeecciiaallllyy iinn
cchhiillddrreenn..
TThhee ddrriivveerr mmuusstt wwaarrnn tthhee ootthheerr
ooccccuuppaannttss ooff tthhee rriisskk wwhhiicchh ccaarree--
lleessss ooppeerraattiioonn ooff eelleeccttrriicc wwiinnddoowwss
eennttaaiillss..
2.42
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– OPENING AND CLOSING
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
FFuunnccttiioonn ooff tthhee eelleeccttrriicc wwiinnddoowwss
wwiitthh iiggnniittiioonn sswwiittcchheedd ooffff
After the ignition has been switched off,
the windows can still be operated for
about ten minutes so long as the driver or
passenger doors are not opened.
The windows on vehicles with central
locking can also be closed or opened
from the outside (in cars with a
sliding/electric roof you can only close
them). For this purpose, the key must be
in the lock of the driver’s door and held in
the locking or open position.
OOppeenniinngg
Press the front edge of the respective but-
ton.
CClloossiinngg
Lift the front edge of the respective but-
ton.
NNoottee
If the window in the driver or passenger
door is hindered whilst closing through
stiffness or by an obstacle (roll-back func-
tion), the window will open again immedi-
ately.
In this case you can only close the window
again after the ignition has been switched
on.
NNootteess
The automatic opening/closing, and roll-
back functions* on the driver and passen-
ger door windows will not function after
the vehicle battery has been discon-
nected/reconnected.
To reinstall this function after reconnect-
ing the battery, please note the following
points.
LLoocckk vveehhiiccllee
from the outside via the
driver’s door. When doing this please
ensure that all doors and windows are
closed completely.
LLoocckk tthhee vveehhiiccllee aaggaaiinn
via the driver’s
door.
HHoolldd tthhee kkeeyy iinn tthhee lloocckkiinngg ppoossii--
ttiioonn ffoorr aatt lleeaasstt oonnee sseeccoonndd..
This reactivates the system.
WWaarrnniinngg
BBee vveerryy ccaarreeffuull wwhheenn cclloossiinngg tthhee
eelleeccttrriicc wwiinnddoowwss aanndd rrooooff ffrroomm tthhee
oouuttssiiddee!!
BBee vveerryy ccaarreeffuull wwhheenn cclloossiinngg tthhee
wwiinnddoowwss!! CClloossiinngg ffrroomm tthhee oouuttssiiddee
wwiitthhoouutt vviissiibbiilliittyy oorr iinn aa ccaarreelleessss
mmaannnneerr ccaann ccaauussee sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy,,
eessppeecciiaallllyy wwiitthh cchhiillddrreenn..
CChhiillddrreenn sshhoouulldd nneevveerr rreemmaaiinn
aalloonnee iinnssiiddee tthhee vveehhiiccllee wwhheenn iitt iiss
lloocckkeedd ffrroomm tthhee oouuttssiiddee,, aass oouutt--
ssiiddee hheellpp wwiillll bbee hhiinnddeerreedd iinn tthhee
eevveenntt ooff aann eemmeerrggeennccyy..
OPENING AND CLOSING –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.43
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
SSlliiddiinngg//ttiillttiinngg rrooooff**
With ignition switched on, the sliding/
tilting roof can be opened and closed/
lifted and lowered with the rotary switch.
Press the switch for emergency or full
strength closing.
After the ignition has been switched off,
the roof can still be operated so long as
the driver or passenger doors are not
opened.
WWaarrnniinngg
TTaakkee ggrreeaatt ccaarree wwhheenn cclloossiinngg tthhee
rrooooff!! CClloossiinngg tthhee rrooooff ccaarreelleessssllyy oorr
iinn aann uunnccoonnttrroolllleedd mmaannnneerr mmaayy
ccaauussee bbrruuiisseess,, eessppeecciiaallllyy iinn cchhiill--
ddrreenn..
TThhee ddrriivveerr mmuusstt wwaarrnn tthhee ootthheerr
vveehhiiccllee ooccccuuppaannttss ooff tthhee rriisskk
wwhhiicchh ccaarreelleessss ooppeerraattiioonn ooff tthhee
rrooooff eennttaaiillss..
AAllwwaayyss rreemmoovvee tthhee iiggnniittiioonn kkeeyy
wwhheenn lleeaavviinngg tthhee vveehhiiccllee,, eevveenn
oonnllyy ffoorr aa mmoommeenntt.. NNeevveerr lleeaavvee
cchhiillddrreenn uunnaatttteennddeedd iinn tthhee vveehhii--
ccllee..
TToo ooppeenn
Turn the switch
cclloocckkwwiissee
. There are
intermediate opening positions that are
shown by notches on the switch. The
biggest notch shows the biggest opening
advisable for high speed driving with min-
imum aerodynamic noise.
To completely open the roof keep turning
the switch to position
BB
. In this position,
however, there can be noise due to the
wind.
TToo cclloossee
Turn the switch to rest position or starting
position
AA
. If you turn it
aannttii--cclloocckkwwiissee
the roof will close completely. If the roof is
completely open and you turn the switch
anti-clockwise, you can put the roof in the
intermediate opening positions repre-
sented by the notches.
TToo rraaiissee
From starting position
AA
turn the switch
aannttii--cclloocckkwwiissee
. The roof will be raised
according to the notches on the switch.
TToo cclloossee//lloowweerr
Turn the switch
cclloocckkwwiissee
until it reaches
the rest/starting position
AA
.
NNoottee
The sun screen to prevent intensive sun
rays shining in can be slid open or closed
by hand with roof open or closed.
You should ensure, especially when the
sun screen is closed that the tilting roof is
closed when the vehicle is parked or dur-
ing a sudden rainfall.
CCoonnvveenniieennccee lloocckkiinngg**
The sliding roof can also be closed when
locking the driver’s door:
Hold the key in the locking position until
the roof is closed.
A
B
TO1-001
2.44
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– OPENING AND CLOSING
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
RRoollll bbaacckk ffuunnccttiioonn
The roof has a roll back function to avoid
possible injury when closing the roof.
When the roof is closed in a normal way, it
will re-open automatically if it encounters
any obstacle.
HHoowweevveerr tthhiiss wwiillll nnoott
ooccccuurr iiff tthhee eemmeerrggeennccyy oorr mmaaxxiimmuumm
ssttrreennggtthh lloocckk hhaass bbeeeenn aaccttiivvaatteedd..
NNoottee
TThheerree iiss aann eemmeerrggeennccyy oorr mmaaxxiimmuumm
ssttrreennggtthh lloocckk wwhhiicchh sshhoouulldd oonnllyy bbee
uusseedd iinn ccaassee ooff aabbssoolluuttee nneecceessssiittyy,,
ee..gg.. wwhheenn ddrriivviinngg aatt hhiigghh ssppeeeeddss oorr
wwhheenn ddiirrtt oorr iiccee ssttoopp tthhee rraaiillss ffrroomm
ooppeerraattiinngg pprrooppeerrllyy.. TToo cclloossee pprreessss tthhee
lloowweerr ppaarrtt ooff tthhee sswwiittcchh aanndd tthhee rrooooff
wwiillll cclloossee ffoorrcciibbllyy..
WWaarrnniinngg
BBee vveerryy ccaarreeffuull wwhheenn cclloossiinngg tthhee
rrooooff!! CClloossiinngg ffrroomm tthhee oouuttssiiddee
wwiitthhoouutt vviissiibbiilliittyy oorr iinn aa ccaarreelleessss
mmaannnneerr ccaann ccaauussee sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy,,
eessppeecciiaallllyy wwiitthh cchhiillddrreenn..
TThhee ddrriivveerr sshhoouulldd wwaarrnn tthhee ootthheerr
ooccccuuppaannttss tthhaatt ccaarreelleessss uussee ooff tthhee
rrooooff iiss ddaannggeerroouuss..
AAllwwaayyss rreemmoovvee tthhee iiggnniittiioonn
wwhheenn lleeaavviinngg tthhee vveehhiiccllee eevveenn iiff
oonnllyy ffoorr aa sshhoorrtt ttiimmee.. NNeevveerr lleeaavvee
cchhiillddrreenn aalloonnee iinn tthhee vveehhiiccllee..
WWhheenn uussiinngg tthhee mmaaxxiimmuumm
ssttrreennggtthh cclloossuurree tthheerree iiss aa rriisskk ooff
aacccciiddeenntt oorr iinnjjuurryy.. TTaakkee eexxttrreemmee
ccaarree wwhheenn uussiinngg tthhiiss ffuunnccttiioonn..
EEmmeerrggeennccyy ooppeerraattiioonn
If the system should develop a fault the
roof can also be closed by hand.
Remove the plastic cover at rear using
a screwdriver.
Pull crank out of cover retainer, insert it
in the opening and close sliding roof.
Replace crank in retainer, and replace
cover.
B45-199C
LIGHTS AND VISIBILITY ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.45
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
SSwwiittcchheess
11 LLiigghhttiinngg sswwiittcchh
– Switched off
– Side lights
1)
– Dipped or main beam
The lamps will only function with the igni-
tion on. When the engine is being started
and after ignition has been switched off,
they automatically switch to the side
lights.
Low, high beam and flash light. See
"Indicators and dipped beam lever" chap-
ter.
NNoottee
If lights are not switched off and the igni-
tion key is removed, a buzzer* will sound
when the driver’s door is open.
FFrroonntt ffoogg lliigghhttss**
With lighting switch in side light or
dipped/main beam position pull switch
out to first detent.
1)
In some countries, when the side lights are
switched on with the ignition on, the dipped
headlights also come on with reduced inten-
sity.
RReeaarr ffoogg lliigghhtt**
VVeehhiicclleess wwiitthhoouutt ffoogg lliigghhttss
Turn lighting switch to dipped/main beam
position and pull switch out to stop.
VVeehhiicclleess wwiitthh ffoogg lliigghhttss
With lighting switch in dipped/main
beam position, pull switch out to 2nd
detent.
NNoottee
A warning lamp in the instrument panel
lights up when the rear fog light is
switched on.
Due to the amount of dazzle it causes,
the rear fog light should only be switched
on when the visibility is very poor (e.g. in
some E.U. countries, 50 metres).
The electrical system of the factory fitted
tow bar* is wired up so that when towing
a trailer fitted with rear fog lights, the rear
fog lights on the towing vehicle are auto-
matically switched off.
o
13
2
TO8-014A
2.46
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– LIGHTS AND VISIBILITY
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
22 IInnssttrruummeenntt lliigghhttiinngg
When the lights are on, the level of the
instrument lighting can be set to any
intensity by turning the knurled wheel
next to the light switch.
33 HHeeaaddlliigghhtt rraannggee ccoonnttrrooll**
With the electric adjustment of the head-
lamp range, headlights can be matched
exactly to the load condition of vehicle.
This prevents oncoming traffic from being
dazzled more than is unavoidable. At the
same time the correct headlight beam
adjustment provides the best possible
visibility for the driver.
The headlights can only be regulated with
the dipped headlights switched on.
To lower the beams, turn knurled disc
from the basic position (0) downwards.
44 HHeeaatteedd rreeaarr wwiinnddooww
The heating works only when ignition is
on. When heater is on a lamp in the switch
lights up.
AAss ssoooonn aass wwiinnddooww iiss cclleeaarr,,
sswwiittcchh eelleemmeenntt ooffff.. TThhee rreedduucceedd
ccuurrrreenntt ccoonnssuummppttiioonn hheellppss ttoo rreedduuccee
ffuueell ccoonnssuummppttiioonn sseeee ppaaggee 33..2200..
On vehicles with electrically adjustable
exterior mirrors the mirrors are heated as
long as the rear window heating is
switched on.
13
2
TO8-014A
BAL
FAD
R.D.S E-O-N
LOUD
MONO
TAPE
CD
CHANGER
CONTROL
FM
AM
RDS
TP
AS
SCAN
CD
AURA
1
2
3
SCAN
TRACK
SOUND SYSTEM
Cr
4
5 6
7
TO8-015
LIGHTS AND VISIBILITY ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.47
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
55 HHaazzaarrdd wwaarrnniinngg lliigghhttss
The system also works when the ignition
is switched off.
Switch on the hazard warning lights if, for
example:
Your vehicle stops because of a techni-
cal defect,
– You have an emergency
– You reach the tail end of a traffic jam.
When the hazard warning lights are
switched on, all turn signal lights flash
simultaneously. The warning lamps for
the indicators and a warning lamp in the
switch will also flash.
OObbsseerrvvee lleeggaall rreeqquuiirreemmeennttss wwhheenn
eemmppllooyyiinngg ssuucchh ssaaffeettyy mmeeaassuurreess..
66 SSeeaatt hheeaattiinngg** ffoorr lleefftt sseeaatt
For further information on its functions
see "Heated seats" chapter.
77 SSeeaatt hheeaattiinngg** ffoorr rriigghhtt sseeaatt
For further information on its functions
see "Heated seats" chapter.
SSwwiittcchheess iinn ddrriivveerrss ddoooorr
EElleeccttrriicc wwiinnddoowwss
To use the electric windows switches see
"Electric windows" chapter.
CCeennttrraall lloocckkiinngg bbuuttttoonn
To use this switch see "Central locking"
chapter.
WWiinngg mmiirrrroorr aaddjjuussttmmeenntt
See "Rear-view mirrors" chapter.
2.48
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– LIGHTS AND VISIBILITY
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
SSuunn vviissoorrss
SSwwiittcchheess iinn tthhee cceennttrraall ccoonnssoollee
UUnnlloocckkiinngg tthhee ttaannkk ffllaapp
You must press the key to unlock the tank
flap. It can only be unlocked when the
ignition is off.
AAnnttii--sskkiiddddiinngg ssyysstteemm ooff tthhee ddrriivvee
wwhheeeellss ((TTCCSS))**.. EElleeccttrroonniicc SSttaabbiilliittyy
PPrrooggrraamm ((EESSPP))**
The TCS or ESP connect automatically
when the engine is switched on. If neces-
sary, they may be switched off briefly by
pressing corresponding switch.
The pilot light will light up if it is discon-
nected. See "Warning lamps" chapter.
For further information see pages 3.11,
3.12 and 3.13.
The sun visors can be pulled out of the
side mountings and swung towards the
doors.
The vanity mirrors have a sliding cover.
ESP
LEO-011
LIGHTS AND VISIBILITY ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.49
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
IInnddiiccaattoorrss aanndd ddiippppeedd bbeeaamm lleevveerr
The turn signals only work when the igni-
tion is switched on.
Right turn signals – lever up (
11
)
Left turn signals – lever down (
22
)
When the turn signals are switched on the
pilot light will light up simultaneously. See
"Warning lamps" chapter.
The turn signals switch off automatically
when the steering wheel returns to its nor-
mal position.
TToo ssiiggnnaall aa llaannee cchhaannggee
Move the lever up (
11
) or down (
22
) to the
pressure point and hold in this position –
the warning lamp should flash at the
same time.
HHeeaaddlliigghhtt ffllaasshheerr
Pull the lever towards the steering wheel
(
33
) – the main beam warning lamp will
light up.
SShhoorrtt oorr lloonngg bbeeaammss
With the long or short beam connected
push the lever towards the steering wheel
(
44
). When main beam is on, the main
beam pilot light will light up.
PPaarrkkiinngg lliigghhttss**
The parking lights only work when igni-
tion is switched off.
Right parking lights – lever up (
11
)
Left parking lights – lever down (
22
)
If the ignition key has been removed, a
buzzer* will sound when the driver’s door
is open.
NNoottee
TThhee uussee ooff tthhee ssiiggnnaallss aanndd lliigghhttiinngg
ddeessccrriibbeedd hheerree iiss ssuubbjjeecctt ttoo llooccaall rreegg--
uullaattiioonnss..
1
2
4
3
TO8-016A
2.50
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– LIGHTS AND VISIBILITY
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
IInntteerriioorr lliigghhttss
AA FFrroonntt iinntteerriioorr lliigghhtt
Switch positions:
0
Off
Left – Light on continuously
Right – Door contact switch
Interior lights with delayed switch off*
remain on for about 30 seconds after
doors are closed.
BB FFrroonntt rreeaaddiinngg lliigghhtt**
The reading light is turned on or off by
pressing the appropriate switch
BB
.
BBoooott lliigghhtt
The light is on when the tailgate is open
(including with lights and ignition off).
You must therefore always make sure you
close the boot, as well as when you park
the car.
RReeaarr iinntteerriioorr lliigghhttss
Switch positions:
0
Off
Intermediate position Door contact
switch
Left – Light on continuously
CCoonnttrrooll ooff iinntteerriioorr lliigghhttss
The interior light is switched on for
approx. 30 seconds when the vehicle is
unlocked, a door opened or the ignition
key removed. The switch must be in the
door contact position for this function.
It is however switched off as soon as the
vehicle is locked or the ignition switched
on.
With the door open, the interior light will
remain on for a maximum of ten minutes.
This prevents the battery from discharg-
ing.
GGlloovvee bbooxx lliigghhtt**
The light in the glove box on the passen-
ger side only comes on when the ignition
is on and the lid is open.
B45-146C
LIGHTS AND VISIBILITY ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.51
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
WWiinnddssccrreeeenn wwiippeerrss aanndd wwaasshheerrss
WWaarrnniinngg
TThhee wwiinnddsshhiieelldd wwiippeerr bbllaaddeess mmuusstt
bbee iinn ppeerrffeecctt ccoonnddiittiioonn ttoo eennssuurree
ggoooodd vviissiibbiilliittyy ((sseeee ""WWiinnddssccrreeeenn
wwiippeerrss"" cchhaapptteerr))..
Wipers and washers only work when igni-
tion is switched on.
WWhheenn iitt iiss ffrreeeezziinngg,, cchheecckk tthhaatt tthhee
wwiippeerr bbllaaddeess aarree nnoott ffrroozzeenn ttoo tthhee
ggllaassss bbeeffoorree sswwiittcchhiinngg tthhee wwiippeerrss oonn
ffoorr tthhee ffiirrsstt ttiimmee..
The heated windscreen washer jets* are
switched on when the ignition is switched
on and the amount of heat is regulated
automatically according to the outside
temperature.
NNoottee
Fill container. See "Windscreen washer"
chapter.
Replace wiper blades. See "Wiper
blades" chapter.
WWiinnddssccrreeeenn
WWiinnddssccrreeeenn wwiippeerrss ooffff
Lever at position
00
.
IInntteerrmmiitttteenntt wwiippee
Lever at position
11
.
Use lever
AA
to change the intervals of the
intermittent wipe. Four levels are avail-
able.
Lever to the right – brief intervals
Lever to the left – long intervals
The intervals of each level are set in func-
tion of the time that elapses between
each sweep of the wipers.
WWiippeerr ssllooww
Lever at position
22
.
WWiippeerr ffaasstt
Lever at position
33
.
FFlliicckk wwiippee
Lever at position
44
.
AAuuttoommaattiicc wwaasshh//wwiippee ffaacciilliittyy
To turn on wipers and washer, pull lever
towards steering wheel to position
55
.
Release lever
The washer stops and the wipers carry on
for about 4 seconds.
RRaaiinn sseennssoorr**
If the vehicle is fitted with a rain sensor
and the intermittent wipe is activated this
sensor is in charge of adjusting automati-
cally the duration of the intervals to the
amount of rain.
Position
AA
of the lever for the windscreen
wipers is used to individually adjust the
sensitivity of the rain sensor.
After switching off the ignition, the rain
sensor needs to be switched on again. To
do that the intermittent wipe needs to be
switched off and switched on again.
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
LEO-027
2.52
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– LIGHTS AND VISIBILITY
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
RReeaarr wwiinnddssccrreeeenn
IInntteerrmmiitttteenntt wwiippee
TTuurrnn oonn::
Push lever to position
66
.
The wipers wipe approximately every 6
seconds.
TTuurrnn ooffff::
Move the lever towards the steering
wheel. If you turn off the windscreen
wiper while wiping, the windscreen wiper
will function until the wipe is completed.
AAuuttoommaattiicc wwaasshh//wwiippee ffaacciilliittyy
TTuurrnn oonn::
Push the lever forward to position
77
:
The washer/wipe facility keeps working
intermittently. To turn off completely move
the lever towards the steering wheel.
HHeeaaddlliigghhtt wwaasshheerr ssyysstteemm**
When the main or dipped beam is on, the
lenses are washed every time the wind-
screen is washed.
At regular intervals, such as when filling
the tank, the dirt on the lenses (insects)
should be removed.
7
6
LEO-012
LIGHTS AND VISIBILITY ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.53
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
WWiippeerr bbllaaddeess
WWaarrnniinngg
TThhee wwiippeerr bbllaaddeess mmuusstt bbee iinn
ggoooodd ccoonnddiittiioonn ffoorr cclleeaarr vviissiibbiilliittyy..
IInn oorrddeerr ttoo pprreevveenntt ssttrreeaakkss oonn
tthhee wwiinnddssccrreeeenn yyoouu sshhoouulldd cclleeaann
tthhee wwiippeerr bbllaaddeess rreegguullaarrllyy wwiitthh aa
wwiinnddooww cclleeaanniinngg pprroodduucctt.. IIff tthhee
wwiinnddoowwss aarree ppaarrttiiccuullaarrllyy ddiirrttyy,, ee..gg..
iinnsseecctt rreemmaaiinnss,, aa ssppoonnggee oorr ccllootthh
sshhoouulldd bbee uusseedd ttoo cclleeaann tthhee
bbllaaddeess..
CChhaannggee tthhee wwiippeerr bbllaaddeess oonnccee
oorr ttwwiiccee aa yyeeaarr ffoorr ssaaffeettyy rreeaassoonnss..
WWiippeerr bbllaaddeess mmaayy bbee ppuurrcchhaasseedd
ffrroomm TTeecchhnniiccaall SSeerrvviiccee CCeennttrreess..
WWhheenn iitt iiss ffrreeeezziinngg,, cchheecckk tthhaatt tthhee
wwiippeerr bbllaaddeess aarree nnoott ffrroozzeenn ttoo tthhee
ggllaassss bbeeffoorree sswwiittcchhiinngg tthhee wwiippeerrss oonn
ffoorr tthhee ffiirrsstt ttiimmee..
If the wiper blades drag, it may be caused
by one of the following:
If the vehicle has been washed in an
automatic car wash, residual wax may be
left on the windscreen. This wax can only
be removed with special detergent.
Consult a Technical Service Centre for
more information.
The blades will not drag if you use a wax
dissolving windscreen cleaner. Grease
solvents will not work.
Damaged wiper blades can also drag.
In this case the blades should be
renewed.
The blades are set at an incorrect angle.
Have the angle checked and, if necessary,
adjusted by a Technical Service Centre.
CChhaannggiinngg wwiippeerr bbllaaddeess
TTaakkiinngg tthhee wwiippeerr bbllaaddee ooffff
Hinge the wiper arm up and position
the blade perpendicular to the wiper arm.
Press the retaining spring in the direc-
tion of arrow
AA
.
Detach the wiper blade in the direction
of arrow
BB
and then remove from the arm
in the opposite direction.
SSeeccuurriinngg tthhee wwiippeerr bbllaaddee
The retaining spring must engage audibly
in the wiper arm.
When fitting wiper blades with moulded
wind deflectors one should ensure that
the deflector is pointing downwards.
B1H-052
2.54
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– LIGHTS AND VISIBILITY
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
To remove the rear wiper blade, do the fol-
lowing:
Before you follow the aforementioned
steps, remove cover
AA
by pressing in the
direction of arrow
11
and then as indicated
by arrow
22
. Proceed as indicated in the
before mentioned chapter (change of
wiper blades).
A
1
2
LEO-013
LIGHTS AND VISIBILITY ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.55
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
RReeaarr--vviieeww mmiirrrroorrss
AAddjjuussttiinngg mmiirrrroorrss
The rear view mirrors should always be
adjusted properly before moving off so
that good vision to the rear is obtained.
AAnnttii--ddaazzzzllee iinntteerriioorr mmiirrrroorr
The lever on the lower edge of the mirror
should be pointing to the rear when the
basic setting is made.
To set the anti-dazzle position, pull lever
forwards.
EExxtteerriioorr mmiirrrroorrss ccoonnttrroolllleedd mmeecchhaannii--
ccaallllyy ffrroomm iinnssiiddee
are adjusted with the
knob in the door trim panel.
AAuuttoommaattiicc** aannttii--ddaazzzzllee mmiirrrroorr
Adjust interior mirror by hand.
If the ignition is switched on the interior
mirror automatically darkens depending
on the light from behind (i.e. a headlight).
When you engage the reverse gear or put
the selector lever on
RR
the mirror returns
to its original position (is no longer dark).
EElleeccttrriiccaallllyy aaddjjuussttaabbllee mmiirrrroorrss**
Electrically adjustable mirrors* are set by
pressing the edge of the knob
AA
in the dri-
ver’s door trim.
The surface of the mirror may be angled
upwards, downwards, to the left or the
right, as required.
With swivel knob (
AA
) select the driver or
passenger wing mirrors.
NN
– Neutral position
RR
– Driver’s mirror
LL
– Passenger’s mirror
When you adjust the
lleefftt
mirror the right
one moves in time, and a separate adjust-
ment of the right mirror should not normally
be necessary. If you wish to adjust it sepa-
rately, activate the right mirror. You should
now be able to adjust it.
If the electric adjustment fails, the mirrors
can be adjusted manually by pressing on
the surface.
A
L
N
R
LEO-014C
2.56
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– LIGHTS AND VISIBILITY
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
NNoottee ffoorr vveehhiicclleess wwiitthh ccoonnvveexx oorr
aasspphheerriiccaall oouuttssiiddee mmiirrrroorrss **
CCoonnvveexx
(curved outwards) mirrors
enlarge the field of view but they make
objects look smaller.
TThheessee mmiirrrroorrss aarree
oonnllyy ooff lliimmiitteedd uussee iinn eessttiimmaattiinngg hhooww
ffaarr aawwaayy aa ffoolllloowwiinngg vveehhiiccllee iiss..
AAsspphheerriiccaall
exterior mirrors have a mirror
surface with different curvature. This
wide-angle mirror increases the area of
vision even more so than conventional
convex mirrors.
TThheeiirr uusseeffuullnneessss iiss aallssoo
lliimmiitteedd wwhheenn jjuuddggiinngg tthhee ddiissttaannccee ttoo
vveehhiicclleess aapppprrooaacchhiinngg ffrroomm bbeehhiinndd..
MMiirrrroorr hheeaattiinngg**
The electrically operated outside mirrors
are heated as long as the heated rear win-
dow is switched on. The ignition must be
switched on for this purpose.
FFoollddiinngg eexxtteerriioorr mmiirrrroorrss iinn
The exterior mirrors can be folded in.
To do this pull mirror housing towards
vehicle.
NNoottee
Before putting the vehicle through an
automatic washing plant, the mirrors
should be folded in to prevent them from
becoming damaged.
FFoollddiinngg eexxtteerriioorr mmiirrrroorrss bbaacckk
WWaarrnniinngg
WWhheenn ffoollddiinngg tthhee mmiirrrroorr bbaacckk oouutt
eennssuurree tthhaatt yyoouurr ffiinnggeerrss aarree nnoott
ttrraappppeedd bbeettwweeeenn tthhee mmiirrrroorr aanndd
tthhee bbrraacckkeett DDaannggeerr ooff iinnjjuurryy!!
LIGHTS AND VISIBILITY ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.57
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
EElleeccttrriicc ffoollddiinngg wwiinngg mmiirrrroorrss**
Use control
AA
to select the passenger or
driver’s wing mirror, or the fold-away func-
tion, as well as mirror adjustment (see
diagram).
NN
– Neutral position
RR
– Driver’s wing mirror
LL
– Passenger’s wing mirror
PP
– Folding away of wing mirrors
The fold-away position is recommended,
for example, when parking or driving in
cramped conditions.
To
ffoolldd aawwaayy tthhee wwiinngg mmiirrrroorrss
, starting
from positions
LL
,
RR
or
NN
, select position
PP
with control
AA
.
TToo uunnffoolldd tthhee wwiinngg mmiirrrroorrss ((uussee ppoossii--
ttiioonn))
, do the opposite, from
PP
to
LL
,
RR
or
NN
.
NNoottee
If the mirror housing is moved by an exter-
nal force (e.g. knocked when maneuver-
ing) the mirrors must be folded right in
electrically.
UUnnddeerr nnoo cciirrccuummssttaanncceess
mmuusstt tthhee mmiirrrroorr
housing be adjusted by
hand as the operation of the mirror might
be affected. To place the mirrors in use
position, using control
AA
, they will not
work for about 15 seconds.
Be careful not to damage the mirrors
when using control
AA
.
P
A
L
N
R
LEO-014B
2.58
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– SEATS AND LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
FFrroonntt sseeaattss
The correct adjustment of the seats is
important for:
reaching the controls safely and quickly
– relaxed low-fatigue body position
mmaaxxiimmuumm pprrootteeccttiioonn ffrroomm tthhee sseeaatt
bbeellttss aanndd tthhee AAiirr BBaagg SSyysstteemm..
WWaarrnniinngg
FFoorr tthhiiss rreeaassoonn tthhee ffrroonntt sseeaattss
sshhoouulldd nnoott bbee ppuusshheedd ttoooo cclloossee ttoo
tthhee sstteeeerriinngg wwhheeeell oorr tthhee iinnssttrruu--
mmeenntt ppaanneell..
YYoouurr ffeeeett sshhoouulldd rreemmaaiinn iinn tthhee
ffoooottwweellll wwhhiillee tthhee vveehhiiccllee iiss iinn
mmoottiioonn nneevveerr rreessttiinngg oonn tthhee
iinnssttrruummeenntt ppaanneell oorr sseeaattss..
Please adjust your seat as detailed on the
next pages. Please also note the basic
positions for the driver’s and passenger
seats on this page.
DDrriivveerrss sseeaatt
We recommend that you position the dri-
ver’s seat as follows:
Set the driver’s seat forwards/back-
wards in such a way that the pedals can
be fully depressed with a slightly
angled leg.
Set the backrest in such a way that it is
fully against your back and that you can
reach the upper point of the steering
wheel with your arms at a slight angle.
WWaarrnniinngg
NNoo iitteemmss sshhoouulldd bbee kkeepptt iinn tthhee
ffoooottwweellll,, aass tthheeyy ccoouulldd bblloocckk tthhee
ppeeddaallss iinn tthhee ccaassee ooff aa ssuuddddeenn
bbrraakkiinngg mmaannooeeuuvvrree..
YYoouu wwoouulldd nnoo lloonnggeerr bbee aabbllee ttoo
bbrraakkee,, cchhaannggee ggeeaarr oorr aacccceelleerraattee!!
FFrroonntt ppaasssseennggeerr sseeaatt
We recommend that you position the front
passenger seat as follows:
Backrest in an upright position.
Place the feet in the footwell in a com-
fortable position.
At the same time
ppuusshh tthhee sseeaatt bbaacckk aass
ffaarr aass ppoossssiibbllee..
SEATS AND LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.59
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
DDrriivveerr aanndd ffrroonntt ppaasssseennggeerr sseeaattss
((mmaannuuaall aaddjjuussttmmeenntt))
11 TToo mmoovvee sseeaatt bbaacckkwwaarrddss aanndd
ffoorrwwaarrddss
Lift lever and move seat. Then release
lever and move seat further so that the
catch engages.
WWaarrnniinngg
FFoorr ssaaffeettyy rreeaassoonnss tthhee ddrriivveerrss sseeaatt
mmuusstt oonnllyy bbee mmoovveedd bbaacckkwwaarrddss oorr
ffoorrwwaarrddss wwhheenn tthhee vveehhiiccllee iiss ssttaa--
ttiioonnaarryy..
22 AAddjjuussttiinngg bbaacckkrreesstt
Take weight off backrest and turn knob by
hand.
WWaarrnniinngg
DDoo nnoott lloowweerr tthhee bbaacckkrreesstt ttoooo ffaarr
wwhheenn oonn tthhee mmoovvee bbeeccaauussee tthhee
sseeaattbbeellttss aarree nnoo lloonnggeerr ffuullllyy eeffffeecc--
ttiivvee..
33 AAddjjuussttiinngg lluummbbaarr ssuuppppoorrtt**
Turning the wheel will arch the lumbar
support cushion to greater or lesser
degree. This prevents the fatigue that
accompanies long journeys.
44 AAddjjuussttiinngg sseeaatt hheeiigghhtt**
By “pumping” the lateral lever the seat
can be lifted or lowered.
LLiiffttiinngg::
Lift/pump lever up from base
position.
LLoowweerriinngg::
Press/pump the lever down
from the base position.
WWaarrnniinngg
FFoorr ssaaffeettyy rreeaassoonnss tthhee hheeiigghhtt ooff
tthhee ddrriivveerrss sseeaatt mmuusstt oonnllyy bbee
aaddjjuusstteedd wwhheenn tthhee vveehhiiccllee iiss ssttaa--
ttiioonnaarryy..
BBee ccaarreeffuull wwhheenn aaddjjuussttiinngg tthhee
sseeaatt hheeiigghhtt!! CCaarreelleessss aanndd uunnccoonn--
ttrroolllleedd aaddjjuussttmmeenntt ccaann ccaauussee
iinnjjuurriieess..
TThhee eelleeccttrriiccaall aaddjjuussttmmeenntt ooff tthhee
sseeaattss wwiillll aallssoo ffuunnccttiioonn wwhheenn tthhee
iiggnniittiioonn iiss ooffff oorr wwhheenn tthhee kkeeyy hhaass
bbeeeenn wwiitthhddrraawwnn ffuullllyy..
FFoorr tthhiiss rreeaassoonn cchhiillddrreenn sshhoouulldd
nneevveerr bbee lleefftt uunnaatttteennddeedd iinn tthhee
vveehhiiccllee..
B45-017C
2.60
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– SEATS AND LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
DDrriivveerr aanndd ffrroonntt ppaasssseennggeerr sseeaattss
((eelleeccttrriiccaall aaddjjuussttmmeenntt))**
The seats are electrically adjusted using
the switches
AA
and
BB
.
The seats can also be adjusted in this way
when the ignition is switched off.
Using the handwheel
CC
the
lluummbbaarr ssuupp--
ppoorrtt
is set mechanically. Please also refer
to the description (Pos. 3) of the manual
adjustment.
WWaarrnniinngg
FFoorr ssaaffeettyy rreeaassoonnss tthhee hheeiigghhtt ooff
tthhee ddrriivveerrss sseeaatt mmuusstt oonnllyy bbee
aaddjjuusstteedd wwhheenn tthhee vveehhiiccllee iiss ssttaa--
ttiioonnaarryy..
BBee ccaarreeffuull wwhheenn aaddjjuussttiinngg tthhee
sseeaatt hheeiigghhtt.. CCaarreelleessss aanndd uunnccoonn--
ttrroolllleedd aaddjjuussttmmeenntt ccaann ccaauussee
iinnjjuurriieess..
TThhee eelleeccttrriiccaall aaddjjuussttmmeenntt ooff tthhee
sseeaattss wwiillll aallssoo ffuunnccttiioonn wwhheenn tthhee
iiggnniittiioonn iiss sswwiittcchheedd ooffff oorr wwhheenn
tthhee kkeeyy hhaass bbeeeenn wwiitthhddrraawwnn ccoomm--
pplleetteellyy..
FFoorr tthhiiss rreeaassoonn,, cchhiillddrreenn sshhoouulldd
nneevveerr bbee lleefftt uunnaatttteennddeedd iinn tthhee
vveehhiiccllee..
SSwwiittcchh AA**
The seat is adjusted in the corresponding
arrow direction by pressing the switch:
11
– Seat forwards / back
22
– Front seat cushion up / down
33
– Rear seat cushion up / down
22
and
33
at the same time – Seat up / down
B45-180CB45-182C
SEATS AND LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.61
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
SSwwiittcchh BB**
The backrest is adjusted in the corre-
sponding arrow direction by pressing the
switch:
Arrow
11
: Backrest comes forward
Arrow
22
:Backrest moves back
WWaarrnniinngg
DDoo nnoott hhaavvee tthhee bbaacckkrreesstt ttoooo ffaarr
ffoorrwwaarrdd wwhhiillee tthhee vveehhiiccllee iiss iinn
mmoottiioonn aass tthhiiss mmaayy aaffffeecctt tthhee
eeffffeeccttiivveenneessss ooff tthhee sseeaatt bbeellttss..
B45-181C
2.62
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– SEATS AND LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
HHeeaadd rreessttrraaiinnttss**
The head restraints are height adjustable
and should be set to suit the size of the
occupant. Correctly adjusted head
restraints together with the seat belts
offer effective protection. The front head
restraints can also be adjusted to a differ-
ent angle.
AAddjjuussttiinngg hheeiigghhtt
Grip sides of head restraint with both
hands and pull up or push down.
The best protection is obtained when
the upper edge of restraint is
aatt lleeaasstt
at
eye level or higher.
RReemmoovviinngg aanndd iinnssttaalllliinngg
To remove, pull restraints up to the stop,
press button (arrow) and at the same time
take restraints out.
To remove the rear head restraint first pull
the backrest forwards a little.
To install again, push the restraint rods
into the guides until they are heard to
engage. You do not need to press the key.
B45-016CB1S-017P
SEATS AND LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.63
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
AArrmmrreesstt**
FFrroonntt aarrmmrreesstt**
The armrest can be adjusted to several
different positions.
To adjust, press the button in the front
end of the armrest
AA
and fold down the
rest. Then raise the rest notch by notch
until the desired position has been
reached.
There is a stowage compartment in the
armrest. To open, press button
BB
.
When the armrest is folded down, free-
dom of movement. For this reason, the
armrest should not be folded down when
driving in town traffic
B45-022C
2.64
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– SEATS AND LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
66 SSeeaatt hheeaattiinngg** ffoorr lleefftt sseeaatt
The cushion and backrest of the front
seats can be heated electrically when the
ignition is on.
The heating is switched on and regulated
to your comfort with the knurled wheel.
To switch heating off, turn knurled wheel
to the basic position (
0
).
77 SSeeaatt hheeaattiinngg** ffoorr rriigghhtt sseeaatt
The cushion and backrest of the front
seats can be heated electrically when the
ignition is on.
The heating is switched on and regulated
to your comfort with the knurled wheel.
To switch heating off, turn knurled wheel
to the basic position (
0
).
The steering column can be adjusted at
will both for reach and for height. Press
the lever
AA
beneath the steering column
down and move the steering wheel to the
desired position. Then press the lever
firmly up again.
WWaarrnniinngg
TThhee sstteeeerriinngg ccoolluummnn mmaayy oonnllyy
bbee aaddjjuusstteedd wwhhiillsstt tthhee vveehhiiccllee iiss
ssttaattiioonnaarryy..
FFoorr ssaaffeettyy rreeaassoonnss,, tthhee lleevveerr
mmuusstt aallwwaayyss bbee ffiirrmmllyy pprreesssseedd uupp,,
ssoo tthhaatt tthhee ppoossiittiioonn ooff tthhee sstteeeerriinngg
ccoolluummnn ddooeess nnoott ssuuddddeennllyy cchhaannggee
wwhhiillee tthhee vveehhiiccllee iiss iinn mmoottiioonn..
HHeeaatteedd sseeaattss** AAddjjuussttaabbllee sstteeeerriinngg ccoolluummnn**
BAL
FAD
R.D.S E-O-N
LOUD
MONO
TAPE
CD
CHANGER
CONTROL
FM
AM
RDS
TP
AS
SCAN
CD
AURA
1
2
3
SCAN
TRACK
SOUND SYSTEM
Cr
6
7
TO8-018
A
TO8-018A
SEATS AND LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.65
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
TThhee mmoovveemmeenntt ooff tthhee ppeeddaallss mmuusstt nnoott
bbee rreessttrriicctteedd!!
FFoorr tthhiiss rreeaassoonn,, ddoo nnoott llooccaattee aannyy
iitteemmss iinn tthhee ffoooottwweellll wwhhiicchh ccoouulldd rroollll
oorr sslliiddee uunnddeerrnneeaatthh tthhee ppeeddaallss..
Around the pedal area there should not
be any foot mats or other additional floor
covering materials:
In the case of defects in the brake sys-
tem, a greater pedal travel may be neces-
sary.
It should always be possible to depress
the clutch and accelerator pedals fully.
All pedals must be able to return,
unhindered, to their rest positions.
For these reasons, the only foot mats
which may be used are those which leave
the pedal area completely free and which
are prevented from slipping.
WWaarrnniinngg
UUnnddeerr nnoo cciirrccuummssttaanncceess sshhoouulldd
aannyy iitteemmss bbee kkeepptt iinn tthhee ffoooottwweellll,,
aass tthheeyy ccoouulldd bblloocckk tthhee ppeeddaallss iinn
ccaassee ooff aa ssuuddddeenn bbrraakkiinngg mmaannooeeuu--
vvrree..
YYoouu wwoouulldd nnoo lloonnggeerr bbee aabbllee ttoo
bbrraakkee,, cchhaannggee ggeeaarr oorr aacccceelleerraattee!!
In the interests of good handling ensure
that the load (persons and luggage) is
distributed evenly. Heavy items should
always be carried as near to the rear axle
as possible or better still, between the
axles.
Stale air escapes through ventilation
openings in the side trim* of the luggage
compartment. For this reason, it is best to
keep these openings uncovered.
PPeeddaallss LLuuggggaaggee ccoommppaarrttmmeenntt
2.66
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– SEATS AND LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
WWaarrnniinngg nnootteess
WWaarrnniinngg
TThhee ppeerrmmiissssiibbllee ppaayyllooaaddss aanndd
GGVVWW mmuusstt nnoott bbee eexxcceeeeddeedd sseeee
cchhaapptteerr ""TTeecchhnniiccaall DDaattaa""..
IItt sshhoouulldd bbee nnootteedd tthhaatt wwhheenn
ttrraannssppoorrttiinngg hheeaavvyy iitteemmss tthhee hhaann--
ddlliinngg wwiillll cchhaannggee dduuee ttoo tthhee ddiiss--
ppllaacceemmeenntt ooff tthhee cceennttrree ooff ggrraavviittyy..
DDrriivviinngg ssttyyllee aanndd ssppeeeedd mmuusstt,,
tthheerreeffoorree,, bbee aalltteerreedd ttoo ssuuiitt..
TThhee llooaadd mmuusstt bbee ssttoowweedd iinn ssuucchh
aa wwaayy tthhaatt nnoo iitteemmss ccaann ffllyy ffoorrwwaarrdd
iiff tthhee bbrraakkeess aarree aapppplliieedd ssuuddddeennllyy
uussee tthhee llaasshhiinngg eeyyeess** iiff nneecceess--
ssaarryy..
NNoo ppeeooppllee oorr cchhiillddrreenn aarree ttoo
ttrraavveell iinn tthhee llooaaddiinngg aarreeaa oorr tthhee
bboooott.. AAllll ppaasssseennggeerrss mmuusstt wweeaarr
sseeaatt bbeellttss.. SSeeee ""SSeeaatt bbeellttss"" cchhaapp--
tteerr..
NNeevveerr ddrriivvee wwiitthh tthhee bboooott
lliidd//ttaaiillggaattee ooppeenn oorr nnoott pprrooppeerrllyy
cclloosseedd.. EExxhhaauusstt ggaass ccoouulldd tthheenn bbee
ddrraawwnn iinnttoo tthhee vveehhiiccllee iinntteerriioorr..
LLaasshhiinngg eeyyeess**
On the saloon, four eyelets are provided
in the luggage compartment for securing
items of luggage. There are two eyelets in
the front sides of the luggage compart-
ment, one left and one right. The other
two eyelets are near the loading edge
(see illustration).
The lashing eyes comply with Standard
DIN 75410.
LEO-020
SEATS AND LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.67
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
RReeaarr sshheellff
RReemmoovviinngg tthhee sshheellff
From the rear end of the car, with the tail-
gate raised, unhitch the stays
BB
from their
housings
AA
. Remove the shelf from its
housing, pulling outwards.
The rear shelf can be used to place cloth-
ing but care should be taken to avoid
reducing visibility through the rear win-
dow.
To ensure correct ventilation of the car
interior, the slot between the shelf and
the rear window must not be obstructed.
WWaarrnniinngg
NNoo hheeaavvyy oorr hhaarrdd oobbjjeeccttss mmuusstt bbee
ssttoorreedd oonn tthhee sshheellff ssiinnccee tthhiiss
ccoouulldd eennddaannggeerr tthhee ssaaffeettyy ooff tthhee
ooccccuuppaannttss ooff tthhee vveehhiiccllee iinn tthhee
ccaassee ooff ssuuddddeenn bbrraakkiinngg..
TThhee ssttoorraaggee ooff ssuucchh hheeaavvyy oorr hhaarrdd
oobbjjeeccttss oonn tthhee rreeaarr sshheellff ccoouulldd
rreessuulltt iinn ddaammaaggee ttoo tthhee hheeaatteerr eellee--
mmeennttss iinn tthhee rreeaarr wwiinnddooww..
A
B
IB9-019
2.68
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– SEATS AND LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
IInnccrreeaassiinngg bboooott ssppaaccee**
You may tip the rear seats forwards to
increase the boot space: if it is a split seat
each half can be tipped separately.
Headrests must be removed before lower-
ing the back seat*. To do so you will need
to push the back of the seat forward a lit-
tle. See the "Headrests" chapter.
Place the safety belts through the
tongues in the housing provided for this
purpose.
The front seats must be placed so that the
back seats do not collide with them, to
avoid damage.
FFoollddiinngg ddoowwnn tthhee sseeaatt
Pull on the tape (arrow
11
) to raise the
cushion a little and then pull it forwards
as far as possible. Then raise the rear part
of the cushion (arrow
22
).
RReeaarr sseeaatt
1
2
B1J-007D
TO2-003
SEATS AND LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.69
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
Pull the release lever on the backrest in
the direction of the arrow (or both levers
at the same time if the seat is not split)
and lower the backrest.
RRaaiissiinngg tthhee sseeaatt
First lift up the backrest.
Lift the cushion and then push it back-
wards until it fits into place. When you do,
ppuullll tthhee mmiiddddllee sseeaatt bbeelltt oouutt,, ootthheerr--
wwiissee iitt wwiillll bbee ttrraappppeedd bbeettwweeeenn tthhee
sseeaatt aanndd tthhee bbaacckkrreesstt aanndd yyoouu wwiillll nnoott
bbee aabbllee ttoo uussee iitt..
AAllssoo mmaakkee ssuurree tthhee ssiiddee bbeellttss aarree nnoott
ttrraappppeedd bbyy tthhee bbaacckkrreesstt..
WWaarrnniinngg
TThhee rreeaarr sseeaatt bbaacckkrreesstt mmuusstt bbee
pprrooppeerrllyy eennggaaggeedd ssoo tthhaatt aarrttiicclleess
iinn tthhee lluuggggaaggee aarreeaa ddoo nnoott sslliiddee
ffoorrwwaarrdd iiff tthhee bbrraakkeess aarree aapppplliieedd
ssuuddddeennllyy..
B1J-008DB1J-004D
2.70
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– SEATS AND LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
When loads are to be carried on the roof,
the following should be noted:
As the rain channels are moulded into
the roof for streamlining reasons, the nor-
mal type of roof rack cannot be used. To
avoid risks we advise that only the cross
bars provided by the factory are used.
These cross bars are the basis for a
complete roof load carrying system. For
safety reasons when carrying luggage,
bicycles, surf boards, skis and boats, the
appropriate special adapters are
required.
The roof rack system must be installed
according to the enclosed instructions.
Open the plastic covers to secure the feet
of the rack to the roof.
When fitting the feet to the roof make sure
they fit exactly into the special grooves
and properly attach to the appropriate
part of the groove.
Distribute the load evenly. Each cross
bar may carry 40 kg if loaded uniformly
over the full length. The permissible roof
load (including the carrier system) of 75
kg and the permissible gross vehicle
weight must not be exceeded. See chap-
ter "Technical Data".
WWaarrnniinngg
WWhheenn ccaarrrryyiinngg hheeaavvyy oorr llaarrggee
oobbjjeeccttss oonn tthhee rrooooff,, bbeeaarr iinn mmiinndd
tthhaatt tthhee vveehhiiccllee hhaannddlliinngg cchhaannggeess
dduuee ttoo tthhee ddiissppllaacceemmeenntt ooff tthhee
cceennttrree ooff ggrraavviittyy aanndd tthhee iinnccrreeaasseedd
aarreeaa eexxppoosseedd ttoo tthhee wwiinndd..
DDrriivviinngg ssttyyllee aanndd ssppeeeedd mmuusstt bbee
aaddaapptteedd ttoo aallllooww ffoorr tthhiiss..
If your vehicle has a sliding/lifting sun
roof make sure it does not collide with the
load.
RRooooff rraacckk**
SEATS AND LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.71
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
Press forcefully on the cover on the
marked side in the direction of the arrow.
Lift the aforementioned cover until there
is a 90° angle in relation to the roof of the
vehicle.
Then place the roof rack* in the mounting
for roof racks (note instructions included
in the roof rack*).
To close proceed in reverse. Ensure that
the cover is well closed. It must be flush
to the roof channels.
90°90°
LEO-045
2.72
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– SEATS AND LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
FFrroonntt aasshhttrraayy
OOppeenniinngg
Push the front of the ashtray
BB
. See figure.
EEmmppttyyiinngg
Take the ashtray by the side groves (
AA
)
pulling it upwards.
RReeppllaacciinngg
Push in.
CClloossiinngg
It can only be closed by pressing on the
lloowweerr ppaarrtt ooff tthhee aasshhttrraayy
(
CC
)
..
RReeaarr
OOppeenniinngg
Open the lid.
EEmmppttyyiinngg
Remove the inside by pulling it upwards,
with the lid open.
RReeppllaacciinngg
Push in and downwards.
AAsshhttrraayyss
B8L-067
B
C
A
B8L-098
SEATS AND LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.73
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
The cigarette lighter is switched on by
pushing in the element. When the heating
element glows, the lighter springs out
automatically pull it out immediately
and use it.
WWaarrnniinngg
EExxcceerrcciissee ccaauuttiioonn wwhheenn uussiinngg tthhee
cciiggaarreettttee lliigghhtteerr.. IItt ccaann ccaauussee
bbuurrnnss..
TThhee cciiggaarreettttee lliigghhtteerr aanndd tthhee
ssoocckkeett aallssoo wwoorrkk wwhheenn tthhee iiggnniittiioonn
iiss sswwiittcchheedd ooffff aanndd tthhee kkeeyy
rreemmoovveedd..
FFoorr tthhiiss rreeaassoonn cchhiillddrreenn sshhoouulldd
nneevveerr bbee lleefftt iinn tthhee vveehhiiccllee oonn tthheeiirr
oowwnn..
The
1122--VVoolltt ssoocckkeett
of the lighter can be
used for other electrical accessories with
a capacity of up to 120 Watts. When the
engine is not running this will however
discharge the battery. For further informa-
tion see “Accessories”.
EElleeccttrriicc ssoocckkeett iinn tthhee bboooott**
The electric socket is located in the wheel
area on the left side.
It can be used for electrical accessories
with a maximum capacity of 150 W. When
the engine is not running, however, it will
discharge the battery. For further informa-
tion see the chapter on “Accessories”.
WWaarrnniinngg
FFoorr ssaaffeettyy rreeaassoonnss tthhee gglloovvee ccoomm--
ppaarrttmmeenntt lliidd sshhoouulldd aallwwaayyss bbee
cclloosseedd wwhhiillee ddrriivviinngg..
Lift the catch in order to open the passen-
ger side glove compartment*.
SSttoowwaaggee bbooxx wwiitthh CCDD--CChhaannggeerr**
Depending on which car radio they are
equipped with, some vehicles have a CD-
Changer* for up to 6 compact disks in the
stowage box.
CCiiggaarreettttee lliigghhtteerr//
eelleeccttrriicc ssoocckkeett SSttoowwaaggee bbooxx
TO8-020
2.74
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– SEATS AND LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
VVeehhiiccllee wwaalllleett ssttoowwaaggee
ccoommppaarrttmmeenntt
This stowage box is intended for the vehi-
cle wallet.
NNoottee
If the vehicle wallet does not fit in this
compartment you may store it in the glove
compartment on the passenger side or in
any of the stowage boxes on the doors.
Located in the central console.
OOppeenniinngg
Press the edge of the drink can holder and
it will spring open.
CClloossiinngg
Push the drink can holder closed.
WWaarrnniinngg
TThhee ddrriinnkk ccaann hhoollddeerr sshhoouulldd
aallwwaayyss rreemmaaiinn cclloosseedd wwhhiillee ddrrii--
vviinngg ttoo rreedduuccee rriisskk iinn tthhee eevveenntt ooff
ssuuddddeenn bbrraakkiinngg oorr aann aacccciiddeenntt..
DDrriinnkk ccaann hhoollddeerr**
LEO-022
CLIMATE CONTROL ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.75
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
WWaarrnniinngg
FFoorr rrooaadd ssaaffeettyy iitt iiss iimmppoorrttaanntt
tthhaatt aallll wwiinnddoowwss aarree ffrreeee ooff iiccee,,
ssnnooww aanndd mmiisstt.. OOnnllyy tthheenn ccaann
cclleeaarr vviissiioonn bbee gguuaarraanntteeeedd..
YYoouu sshhoouulldd tthheerreeffoorree ffaammiilliiaarriissee
yyoouurrsseellff wwiitthh tthhee ccoorrrreecctt ooppeerraattiioonn
ooff tthhee hheeaattiinngg aanndd vveennttiillaattiioonn ssyyss--
tteemm aass wweellll aass rreemmoovviinngg ddaammpp--
nneessss aanndd ffrroosstt ffrroomm tthhee wwiinnddoowwss..
TThhee hhiigghheesstt ppoossssiibbllee lleevveell ooff
hheeaattiinngg aanndd qquuiicckk ddeeffrroossttiinngg ooff
tthhee wwiinnddoowwss ccaann oonnllyy bbee aacchhiieevveedd
wwhheenn tthhee eennggiinnee hhaass aacchhiieevveedd iittss
ooppeerraattiinngg tteemmppeerraattuurree..
VVeennttss
The illustration shows the air vents on the
dashboard.
Cooled, heated or unheated air comes out
of all the vents.
All vents can be adjusted by swivelling
control
CC
(see illustration on next page).
Vents
33
and
44
open and close separately,
with knurled wheels at the side.
The air flow from the vents can be
adjusted horizontally or vertically.
HHeeaattiinngg aanndd vveennttiillaattiioonn
5
5
5
5
5
5
3
2
3
2
1
1
1
4
4
LEO-023
2.76
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– CLIMATE CONTROL
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
CCoonnttrroollss
AA TTeemmppeerraattuurree sseelleeccttoorr
The temperature can be gradually
increased by turning the control clock-
wise.
BB BBlloowweerr
Air flow can be adjusted to four speeds.
In position 0 the fan is switched off.
CC SSwwiivveell kknnoobb ffoorr aaiirr ddiissttrriibbuuttiioonn
AAiirr ffllooww ffoorr
ffoooott wweellll
Vents
55
are opened.
Vents
33
and
44
must be closed for all the
air to go to the feet.
AAiirr ffllooww ffoorr tthhee
wwiinnddssccrreeeenn
In this position you cannot connect posi-
tion
DD
for air recirculation.
Additionally, vents
33
can be used to direct
hot air to the side windows.
Vents
11
and
22
are opened.
AAiirr ffllooww ffrroomm
tthhee vveennttss
Vents
11
,
22
and
55
are closed. The air comes
out of vents
33
and
44
.
In the above positions there is always
some air leaking out of the other vents.
DD AAiirr rreecciirrccuullaattiioonn
In this mode, no air is drawn from outside
and air is drawn in from the vehicle inte-
rior and recirculated.
The air recirculation function stops pol-
luted air from outside entering the vehi-
cle.
YYoouu sshhoouulldd nnoott ddrriivvee ffoorr ttoooo lloonngg
wwiitthh tthhiiss mmooddee sswwiittcchheedd oonn..
IIff tthhee wwiinnddoowwss sstteeaamm uupp yyoouu sshhoouulldd
pprreessss tthhee aaiirr cciirrccuullaattiioonn bbuuttttoonn aaggaaiinn
iimmmmeeddiiaatteellyy ttoo sswwiittcchh iitt ooffff oorr sseelleecctt
tthhee ppoossiittiioonn ..
BAL
FAD
TREB
BASS
R.D.S E-O-N
LOUD
MONO
TAPE
CD
PTY
PROG
CHANGER
CONTROL
PHONES
FM
AM
RDS
TP
AS
TRACK
<
TRACK +
>
DX
MAN
SCAN
CD
RND
AU
R
4
5
6
1
2
3
SCAN
RND
TRACK
A B C
D
TO2-001
CLIMATE CONTROL ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.77
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
AAddjjuussttmmeenntt iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss
DDeeffrroossttiinngg wwiinnddssccrreeeenn aanndd ssiiddee
wwiinnddoowwss
Rotary switch
BB
to stage
IIIIII
.
Rotary regulator
AA
turned fully to right.
Rotary regulator
CC
to ....................
Adjust vents
33
so that additional warm
air can be directed to the side windows.
DDeemmiissttiinngg wwiinnddssccrreeeenn aanndd ssiiddee
wwiinnddoowwss
When the windows mist up due to high air
humidity, e.g. when it is raining, we rec-
ommend the following settings:
Rotary switch
BB
to stage
IIII
or
IIIIII
.
Rotary regulator
AA
, if necessary, into
heating range.
Rotary regulator
CC
as required, between
and .
Additional warm air can be directed to
the side windows via vents
33
.
HHeeaattiinngg iinntteerriioorr qquuiicckkllyy
Rotary switch
BB
to level
IIIIII
.
Rotary regulator
CC
to....................
Turn control
AA
as far clockwise as pos-
sible.
Open vents
33
.
HHeeaattiinngg iinntteerriioorr ccoommffoorrttaabbllyy
When the windows are clear and the
desired temperature has been reached we
recommend the following settings:
Rotary switch
BB
to level
IIII
or
IIIIII
.
Rotary regulator
AA
at the desired heat
output.
Rotary regulator
CC
to ...................
Set vents
33
.
VVeennttiillaattiioonn ((ffrreesshh aaiirr ooppeerraattiioonn))
With the following settings, unheated
fresh air flows from vents
33
and
44
:
Rotary switch
BB
to desired stage (level
IIIIIIII
for maximum air flow).
Rotary regulator
AA
anti–clockwise to
the stop
Rotary regulator
CC
to ....................
Vents
33
and
44
open.
If required, regulator
CC
can be turned to
another position.
2.78
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– CLIMATE CONTROL
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
AAiirr ccoonnddiittiioonniinngg**
GGeenneerraall nnootteess
To ensure that the heating and ventila-
tion can work properly, the air inlet in
front of the windscreen should be kept
free from ice, snow and leaves.
To prevent the windows from steaming
up the fan should always be left on low
when you are driving slowly.
Press button
DD
to stop polluted air from
outside getting into the vehicle.
DDoo nnoott
ddrriivvee ttoooo ffaasstt iinn tthhiiss ppoossiittiioonn ttoo ssttoopp
tthhee wwiinnddoowwss ffrroomm sstteeaammiinngg uupp..
The air and pollen* filter removes impuri-
ties from the air (e.g. pollen, dust, etc.).
Only put the rotary switch to 0 when the
air outside is polluted by gases.
The pollen and dust filter elements
should be changed in accordance with
the Inspection and Maintenance Plan, to
avoid a reduction in heat and de-icing
capacity.
WWaarrnniinngg
FFoorr rrooaadd ssaaffeettyy iitt iiss iimmppoorrttaanntt
tthhaatt aallll wwiinnddoowwss aarree ffrreeee ooff iiccee,,
ssnnooww aanndd mmiisstt.. OOnnllyy tthheenn ccaann
cclleeaarr vviissiioonn bbee gguuaarraanntteeeedd..
YYoouu sshhoouulldd tthheerreeffoorree ffaammiilliiaarriissee
yyoouurrsseellff wwiitthh tthhee ccoorrrreecctt ooppeerraattiioonn
ooff tthhee hheeaattiinngg aanndd vveennttiillaattiioonn ssyyss--
tteemm aass wweellll aass rreemmoovviinngg ddaammpp--
nneessss aanndd ffrroosstt ffrroomm tthhee wwiinnddoowwss..
TThhee hhiigghheesstt ppoossssiibbllee lleevveell ooff
hheeaattiinngg aanndd qquuiicckk ddeeffrroossttiinngg ooff
tthhee wwiinnddoowwss ccaann oonnllyy bbee aacchhiieevveedd
wwhheenn tthhee eennggiinnee hhaass aacchhiieevveedd iittss
ooppeerraattiinngg tteemmppeerraattuurree..
CLIMATE CONTROL ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.79
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
The air conditioner is a combined cooling
and heating system which provides the
maximum possible comfort all the year
round.
The cooling system only works when the
engine is running, the ambient tempera-
ture is above about +5°C and the ventila-
tor is set to positions
II
to
IIIIIIII
.
When the cooling system is switched on it
reduces not only the temperature inside
the vehicle but also the air humidity mak-
ing the vehicle occupants feel more com-
fortable, when there is a high level of
humidity.
CCoonnttrrooll eelleemmeennttss
AA TTeemmppeerraattuurree sseelleeccttoorr
TToo tthhee rriigghhtt
– increases heat output
TToo tthhee lleefftt
– decreases heat output
If the air conditioning is connected the
cooling capacity is increased if you turn
the regulator to the right.
BB BBlloowweerr
Air throughput can be adjusted in four
stages.
In position 0 the blower is switched off,
but air is let in from the outside. If you
want to stop polluted (smelly) air coming
in from outside press switch
EE
(air circula-
tion).
WWaarrnniinngg
AAss tthhiiss mmaayy mmaakkee tthhee wwiinnddoowwss
sstteeaamm uupp yyoouu sshhoouulldd nnoott ddrriivvee ffoorr
ttoooo lloonngg iinn tthhiiss ppoossiittiioonn..
CC AAiirr ddiissttrriibbuuttiioonn
AAiirr ffllooww ffoorr
ffoooottwweellll
Vents
55
are opened.
All vents
33
and
44
must be opened to
direct all the air flow to the feet.
AAiirr ffllooww ffoorr tthhee
wwiinnddssccrreeeenn aarreeaa
Vents
33
can be used to direct air to the
side windows.
Vents
11
and
22
are opened.
AAiirr ffllooww ooff
tthhee vveennttss
Vents
11
,
22
and
55
are closed. The air comes
out of vents
33
and
44
.
In the positions mentioned above there is
always a leak of air to the remaining
vents.
BAL
FAD
TREB
BASS
R.D.S E-O-N
LOUD
MONO
TAPE
CD
PTY
PROG
CHANGER
CONTROL
PHONES
FM
AM
RDS
TP
AS
TRACK
<
TRACK +
>
DX
MAN
SCAN
CD
RND
AUR
4
5
6
1
2
3
SCAN
RND
TRACK
A B C
D
AC
E
TO2-002
2.80
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– CLIMATE CONTROL
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
DD AAiirr ccoonnddiittiioonneerr oonn//ooffff
The system can be switched on by press-
ing button
DD
.
The system is switched off by pressing the
button again.
EE AAiirr rreecciirrccuullaattiioonn
Air recirculation is connected by pressing
button
EE
. It is disconnected by pressing
the same button again.
Air recirculation may work with or without
the air conditioning.
WWaarrnniinngg
HHoowweevveerr,, yyoouu sshhoouulldd oonnllyy ddrriivvee iinn
tthhiiss mmooddee ffoorr aa sshhoorrtt ttiimmee,, aass nnoo
aaiirr iiss ddrraawwnn ffrroomm oouuttssiiddee,, aanndd tthhee
wwiinnddoowwss mmaayy sstteeaamm uupp..
Button
EE
may not be used if the rotary
regulator
CC
is near the position .
AAiirr vveennttss
Depending on the position of rotary regu-
lators
AA
,
BB
,
CC
and buttons
DD
and
EE
, heated
or unheated fresh air or cooled air flows
from all vents.
The vents are controlled by the rotary reg-
ulator
CC
.
Vents
33
and
44
can be opened or closed
separately:
Knurled wheel turned up – vent open.
Knurled wheel turned down – vent closed.
The height of the air flow can be modified
by moving the grille of vents
33
and
44
.
The rear footwell vents are supplied
together with vents
55
.
5
5
5
5
5
5
3
2
3
2
1
1
1
4
4
AC
LEO-024
CLIMATE CONTROL ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.81
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
DDeeffrroossttiinngg wwiinnddssccrreeeenn aanndd ssiiddee
wwiinnddoowwss
Rotary regulator
BB
to level
IIIIII..
Rotary regulator
CC
to ...................
Rotary regulator
AA
completely to the right
Close vents
44..
Open vents
33..
Turn control
BB
to level
IIII
or
IIIIII
.
If necessary, turn control
AA
upwards
slightly into the heat area.
If needed, turn rotary regulator
CC
to
between and .
You can also use vents
33
to direct hot
air onto the side windows.
QQuuiicckk hheeaattiinngg ooff tthhee iinntteerriioorr
Put rotary regulator
BB
to position
IIIIII
.
Put rotary regulator
CC
to ..............
Turn switch
AA
clockwise as far as possi-
ble.
Open vents
33
.
HHeeaattiinngg iinntteerriioorr ccoommffoorrttaabbllyy
When the windows are clear and the
desired temperature has been reached we
recommend the following settings:
Rotary regulator
BB
to level
IIII
or
IIIIII
.
Turn switch
AA
to the required level of
heat.
Put switch
CC
to ...........................
Adjust vents
33
as required.
VVeennttiillaattiioonn ((ffrreesshh aaiirr))
With the following settings, unheated
fresh air flows from vents
33
and
44
:
Rotary switch
BB
to the required level
(level
IIIIII
for maximum air flow).
Regulator
AA
as far to the right as possi-
ble.
Rotary switch
CC
to .......................
Open vents
33
and
44
.
If necessary switch
CC
can also be set to
other positions.
2.82
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– CLIMATE CONTROL
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
MMaaxxiimmuumm ccoooolliinngg
Close all windows and sliding/raising
roof.
Switch
BB
to speed
IIIIIIII
.
Switch
AA
to the left.
Rotary regulator
CC
to ...................
Open vents
33
and
44
.
Connect the air conditioning by press-
ing switch
DD
.
Press switch
EE
to connect air recirculation.
WWaarrnniinngg
TThhiiss rruunnnniinngg mmooddee ddrraawwss aanndd
uusseess tthhee aaiirr ffrroomm iinnssiiddee tthhee iinnttee--
rriioorr.. TThhiiss mmooddee sshhoouulldd oonnllyy bbee
ccoonnnneecctteedd ffoorr aa sshhoorrtt ttiimmee,, aass nnoo
ffrreesshh aaiirr iiss ttaakkeenn ffrroomm oouuttssiiddee..
YYoouu sshhoouulldd nnoott ssmmookkee iinn tthhee ccaarr wwhheenn
tthhee aaiirr rreecciirrccuullaattiioonn mmooddee iiss iinn ooppeerraa--
ttiioonn..
IIddeeaall ccoooolliinngg
Rotary switch
BB
to speed
IIII
or
IIIIII
(ideal
cooling levels).
Rotary switch
AA
as far to the left as pos-
sible. The temperature can then be
changed at will by moving the switch to
the right.
Rotary switch
CC
to .......................
Open vents
33
and
44
.
Press button
DD
.
Adjust vents
33
and
44
so that the air is
blown backwards over the driver’s head.
In this mode air is taken from outside and
cooled.
CLIMATE CONTROL ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.83
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
GGeenneerraall nnootteess
When the outside temperature is low
the fan will not switch on until the cooling
liquid has reached the right temperature,
unless the fan is manually switched on
.
The air inlet in front of the windscreen
should be kept free from ice, snow and
dead leaves to avoid hindrance to the
heating or air conditioning systems.
In automatic gear box versions, the
kick-down mechanism briefly switches off
the air conditioning compressor when
moving down a gear, so the engine can
keep up full capacity.
If the cooling liquid gets too hot the
compressor switches off when the engine
is subjected to great effort, to guarantee
perfect engine cooling.
At low outside temperatures (less than
+5°C) the refrigeration group (compres-
sor) is automatically switched off, and
may not even be switched on manually
(with
DD
key).
When the compressor is on the inside
temperature and humidity of the car is
reduced. This stops the windows from
steaming up.
Best results are obtained from the air
conditioning if the windows and sun roof*
remain closed.
However if the inside of the car is over-
heated, e.g. because it has been in the
sun, the cooling process can be speeded
up by briefly opening the windows.
When it is very hot or humid, water may
condense on the evaporator and drip
down to form a puddle under the car. This
is perfectly normal and does not mean
there is a leak.
The dust and pollen filter separates
impurities from the air (e.g. dust, pollen
etc.). If the air is polluted by gases the air
recirculation mode should be connected.
The dust and pollen filter elements*
should be changed in accordance with
the Maintenance and Inspection Plan, to
prevent a loss in the air conditioning
capacity.
IIff yyoouu tthhiinnkk tthhee aaiirr ccoonnddiittiioonniinngg
mmaayy bbee ddaammaaggeedd,, sswwiittcchh iitt ooffff aanndd
hhaavvee iitt cchheecckkeedd iimmmmeeddiiaatteellyy aatt aa
TTeecchhnniiccaall SSeerrvviiccee CCeennttrree..
OOnnllyy tthheenn sshhoouulldd yyoouu sswwiittcchh iitt oonn
aaggaaiinn..
AAllll rreeppaaiirrss ooff SSEEAATT aaiirr ccoonnddiittiioonniinngg
mmoodduulleess rreeqquuiirree ssppeecciiaalliisseedd iinnffoorrmmaa--
ttiioonn aanndd ttoooollss..
SSoo mmaakkee ssuurree yyoouu ggeett iinn ttoouucchh wwiitthh
yyoouurr llooccaall TTeecchhnniiccaall SSeerrvviiccee CCeennttrree iiff
aannyytthhiinngg ggooeess wwrroonngg..
2.84
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– CLIMATE CONTROL
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
UUssiinngg aaiirr ccoonnddiittiioonneerr
eeccoonnoommiiccaallllyy
In cooling operation the air conditioner
compressor places demands on the
engine and therefore influences the fuel
consumption.
If the inside temperature is very high
after the car has been parked in the sun,
we recommend that you open doors or
windows briefly to enable the hot air to
escape.
The air conditioner should not be
switched on during a journey if the win-
dows or sliding/tilting roof are open.
If the desired interior temperature can
be attained without switching on the air
conditioner, the fresh air operation
should be selected.
CLIMATE CONTROL ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.85
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
CClliimmaattrroonniicc**
WWaarrnniinngg
FFoorr rrooaadd ssaaffeettyy iitt iiss iimmppoorrttaanntt
tthhaatt aallll wwiinnddoowwss aarree ffrreeee ooff iiccee,,
ssnnooww aanndd mmiisstt.. OOnnllyy tthheenn ccaann
cclleeaarr vviissiioonn bbee gguuaarraanntteeeedd..
YYoouu sshhoouulldd tthheerreeffoorree ffaammiilliiaarriissee
yyoouurrsseellff wwiitthh tthhee ccoorrrreecctt ooppeerraattiioonn
ooff tthhee hheeaattiinngg aanndd vveennttiillaattiioonn ssyyss--
tteemm aass wweellll aass rreemmoovviinngg ddaammpp--
nneessss aanndd ffrroosstt ffrroomm tthhee wwiinnddoowwss..
TThhee hhiigghheesstt ppoossssiibbllee lleevveell ooff
hheeaattiinngg aanndd qquuiicckk ddeeffrroossttiinngg ooff
tthhee wwiinnddoowwss ccaann oonnllyy bbee aacchhiieevveedd
wwhheenn tthhee eennggiinnee hhaass aacchhiieevveedd iittss
ooppeerraattiinngg tteemmppeerraattuurree..
VVeennttss
The vents are adjusted automatically or
manually, depending on the operating
system chosen.
The diagram shows the vents around the
instrument panel.
Normal, hot and cold air comes out of the
vents.
Vents
33
and
44
may be opened or closed
independently by means of the knurled
wheels on either side.
They can be directed horizontally or verti-
cally.
5
5
5
5
5
5
3
2
3
2
1
1
1
4
4
AUTO
+
-
+
-
LEO-025
2.86
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– CLIMATE CONTROL
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
The Climatronic* system automatically
provides a uniform temperature inside the
vehicle.
To do so it automatically adjusts the tem-
perature of the air released, the fan revo-
lutions (air flow) and the air distribution.
This automatic adjustment may be modi-
fied manually if necessary.
The illustration shows the controls on the
instrument panel. To the left of the screen
you can see the temperature and the
automatic functions selected, and to the
right the manual ones.
NNoorrmmaall rreeccoommmmeennddeedd aaddjjuussttmmeenntt ffoorr
aallll sseeaassoonnss ooff tthhee yyeeaarr::
After switching the ignition on.
sseelleecctt tthhee tteemmppeerraattuurree ooff 2222 °°CC ((7711 °°FF))
aanndd
pprreessss tthhee AAUUTTOO kkeeyy
With this adjustment you will very quickly
achieve a pleasant environment inside
the car.
This setting should only be adjusted for
your own personal comfort.
CCoonnttrroollss
AAuuttoommaattiicc
((nnoorrmmaall mmooddee))
The temperature, volume and air distribu-
tion are automatically adjusted to provide
and maintain the required temperature in
a short time. Any variation in outside tem-
perature is quickly compensated.
DDee--ffrroossttiinngg
The windscreen is quickly de-frosted or
freed from moisture.
The temperature is automatically regu-
lated. The maximum air flow comes from
vents
11
and
22
.
CCoooolliinngg ssyysstteemm
oonn//ooffff
You can switch the cooling system (com-
pressor) off to save fuel. However this
may reduce comfort. If the heat inside the
car becomes too high, just switch the
compressor on again or press AUTO.
AUTO
+
-
+
-
TO8-027
CLIMATE CONTROL ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.87
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
++ TTeemmppeerraattuurree sseelleeccttiioonn
The temperature can be adjusted between
18°C (64°F) and 29°C (84°F). In the
extreme positions of
LLOO
and
HHII
there
is no temperature adjustment. The device
constantly provides maximum heat or
cool.
TThhee tteemmppeerraattuurree ddiissppllaayy mmaayy bbee
cchhaannggeedd ffrroomm °°CC ttoo °°FF aass ffoolllloowwss::
Press key and keep it pressed. Then
press key
++
on the temperature selection.
++ FFaann rreevvoolluuttiioonnss
This key can be used to increase or lower
the automatic number of revolutions (air
volume) of the fan. When you press it
mmaann
appears on the right of the dis-
play. The revolution speed is shown in
segments or bars next to the symbol .
If you press the key when the fan is at its
lowest level the system switches itself off.
To
sswwiittcchh oonn
the air conditioning again
you must press the
AAUUTTOO
button, one
of the temperature selection buttons or
the fan button with the positive symbol.
You do not normally need to disconnect
the device from the fan.
AAiirr cciirrccuullaattiioonn
In this mode no air is drawn from outside,
and the inside air is circulated around the
car. This stops polluted air from coming in
from the outside. Do not have it on this
mode for too long.
IIff tthhee wwiinnddoowwss sstteeaamm uupp ddiissccoonnnneecctt
tthhee aaiirr cciirrccuullaattiioonn mmooddee bbyy pprreessssiinngg
tthhee aaiirr cciirrccuullaattiioonn bbuuttttoonn aaggaaiinn oorr bbyy
sseelleeccttiinngg aa ppoossiittiioonn ..
NNoottee
If the air conditioner compressor tem-
porarily switches itself off, e.g. because of
over exertion of the engine, press the air
circulation button again.
AAiirr ddiissttrriibbuuttiioonn kkeeyyss
The programmed air distribution may be
altered by using buttons , and .
These buttons may be used in combina-
tion or alone. When you press one of
these buttons
mmaann
appears on the dis-
play.
AAiirr ffoorr tthhee wwiinnddoowwss
If you press this button all the air comes
out of vents
11
,
22
and
33
. Unlike the
mode the air volume does not change.
AAiirr ffrroomm tthhee ddaasshhbbooaarrdd aanndd
rreeaarr cceennttrraall ccoonnssoollee
All the air from vents
33
and
44
comes out of
the dashboard and the rear central con-
sole.
AAiirr ffoorr tthhee ffoooottwweellll
All the air flow is directed to vents
55
and
the vents under the front seats.
If you want to connect automatic air distri-
bution again, you will have to switch off
the corresponding functions one by one
or press the
AAUUTTOO
button, or .
2.88
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– CLIMATE CONTROL
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
GGeenneerraall nnootteess
When the outside temperature is low the
fan will not switch itself on until the coolant
has reached the right temperature, unless
the fan is manually switched on .
The air inlet in front of the windscreen
should be kept free of ice, snow and dead
leaves to avoid hindrance to the heating
or cooling systems.
In automatic gear box versions, the
kick-down mechanism briefly switches off
the air conditioning compressor when
moving down a gear, so the engine can
keep up full capacity.
If the coolant overheats the compressor
switches itself off when the engine is
under a great effort, to guarantee perfect
engine cooling.
At low outside temperatures (below
+5 °C) the refrigeration group (compres-
sor) is automatically switched off, and
cannot be switched on manually .
With the compressor on both the inside
temperature and humidity of the car are
reduced. This stops the windows from
steaming up.
Best results are obtained from the
Climatronic with the windows and sun
roof* closed.
However if the inside of the car is over-
heated, e.g. because it has been in the
sun, the cooling process can be speeded
up by briefly opening the windows.
When it is very hot or humid outside,
water may condense on the evaporator
and drip down to form a puddle under the
car. This is perfectly normal and does not
mean there is a leak.
The dust and pollen filter separates
impurities from the air (e.g. dust, pollen
etc.). If the air is polluted by gases the air
recirculation mode should be connected.
The dust and pollen filter elements
should be changed in accordance with
the Maintenance and Inspection Plan, to
prevent a loss in the air conditioning
capacity.
IIff yyoouu tthhiinnkk tthhee CClliimmaattrroonniicc ssyysstteemm
mmaayy bbee ddaammaaggeedd,, sswwiittcchh iitt ooffff aanndd hhaavvee
iitt cchheecckkeedd iimmmmeeddiiaatteellyy aatt aa TTeecchhnniiccaall
SSeerrvviiccee CCeennttrree..
OOnnllyy tthheenn sshhoouulldd yyoouu sswwiittcchh iitt oonn
aaggaaiinn..
AAllll rreeppaaiirrss ooff SSEEAATT CClliimmaattrroonniicc mmoodd--
uulleess rreeqquuiirree ssppeecciiaalliisseedd iinnffoorrmmaattiioonn
aanndd ttoooollss..
SSoo mmaakkee ssuurree yyoouu ggeett iinn ttoouucchh wwiitthh
yyoouurr llooccaall TTeecchhnniiccaall SSeerrvviiccee CCeennttrree iiff
aannyytthhiinngg ggooeess wwrroonngg..
CLIMATE CONTROL ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.89
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
OOppeerraattiinngg ffaauullttss
If the cooling system does not work, it
may be due to one of the following:
temperature is below +5 °C.
the cooling system compressor has
switched itself off temporarily due to the
coolant temperature being too high.
– the fuses have blown.
Check the fuse and, if necessary,
replace it. If the fuse was not the cause,
have the Climatronic checked.
If the cooling output drops, have the sys-
tem checked.
2.90
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– DRIVING
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
Reverse gear may only be engaged when
the vehicle is stationary. When engine is
running, depress clutch fully and wait a
few seconds before moving gear lever, to
prevent grating noises.
When reverse gear is engaged with igni-
tion on, the reversing lights come on.
Some model versions may have 6 gears*.
Its layout is indicated on the selector
lever.
NNoottee
FFoorr ssaaffeettyy rreeaassoonnss,, ddoo nnoott rreesstt yyoouurr
hhaanndd oonn tthhee ggeeaarr lleevveerr wwhhiillee ddrriivviinngg..
DDrriivviinngg pprrooggrraammmmeess ssooffttwwaarree
The gearbox management is fitted with
several driving programmes. According to
the driving style or to the momentary situ-
ation, an
eeccoonnoommyy,,
low-consumption, or
a more
ssppoorrttyy
programme will be
selected.
The programme is selected
aauuttoommaattii--
ccaallllyy
depending on the movement of the
accelerator pedal.
If the accelerator pedal is moved slowly,
or at a normal rate, the gearbox will shift
into a higher gear earlier, and down into a
lower gear later to
rreedduuccee ffuueell ccoonnssuummpp--
ttiioonn
.
A more
ssppoorrttyy
programme is selected
when the accelerator pedal moves
ffaasstt
.
The pedal does not have to be depressed
to the point of
kkiicckk--ddoowwnn
(see page
2.93). In this mode, the gearbox will shift
up later to make full use of the engine
power reserves.
MMaannuuaall ggeeaarrbbooxx AAuuttoommaattiicc ggeeaarrbbooxx**
2
4
5
3
1
R
TO8-028 B8L-009
DRIVING ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.91
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
The downward shift occurs at a higher
rate of revolutions than in the economy
programmes.
The gear box is self adapting, and contin-
uously selects the most suitable gear pro-
gramme. At the same time, the driver can
also make the gear box switch to a more
“sporty” programme by pressing the
accelerator quickly. Depending on road
speed, this makes the gearbox shift down
early into a lower gear for quicker acceler-
ation (for instance to overtake another
vehicle), without having to press the
accelerator all the way down to the kick-
down position. After the gear box has
shifted back up it returns to the original
programme, depending on your style of
driving.
The gear box adapts the gear shifts for
uphill and downhill gradients. This pre-
vents the gearbox from shifting up and
down unnecessarily on uphill gradients.
On downhill gradients, the gearbox shifts
down into a lower gear when the driver
presses the brake pedal. This makes use
of the braking effect of the engine without
having to change down manually.
NNoottee
Depending on road resistance, for exam-
ple when trailer towing or on uphill
stretches, a programme is automatically
selected which provides more power by
shifting into a lower gear. This prevents
frequent gear changes.
SSeelleeccttoorr lleevveerr lloocckk
In positions “
PP
” and “
NN
” with the ignition
switched on the selector lever is locked.
To move the selector lever out of these
positions the brake pedal must be
depressed and the selector lever button
pushed in. This prevents a gear from
being engaged inadvertently and the
vehicle from unintentionally moving off.
A delay circuit prevents the selector lever
from locking when it is moved quickly
past the
NN
position (for instance from
RR
to
DD
”). This enables for example the
vehicle to be “rocked” out of a “bogged
down” position. The shift lock only locks
the selector lever if it is left in the
NN
position for more than about 1 second
without the brake pedal being depressed.
At speeds above 5 km/h the selector lever
lock is automatically switched-off in posi-
tion “
NN
”.
SSaaffeettyy iinntteerrlloocckk ffoorr iiggnniittiioonn kkeeyy..
The key can only be withdrawn with the
ignition switched off and the selector
lever in position “
PP
” (parking lock).
WWhheenn tthhee iiggnniittiioonn kkeeyy iiss rreemmoovveedd,, tthhee
sseelleeccttoorr lleevveerr iiss lloocckkeedd iinn ppoossiittiioonn PP..
2.92
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– DRIVING
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
SSeelleeccttoorr lleevveerr ppoossiittiioonnss
In the combi-instrument there is a display
that shows the selector lever position cur-
rently selected.
WWaarrnniinngg
NNeevveerr sshhiifftt sseelleeccttoorr lleevveerr ttoo ppoossii--
ttiioonnRR oorrPP wwhhiillsstt tthhee vveehhiiccllee iiss
iinn mmoottiioonn..
TThhee ggeeaarrss ccoouulldd bbee ddaamm--
aaggeedd rriisskk ooff aacccciiddeenntt!!
PP PPaarrkkiinngg lloocckk
The driving wheels are locked mechani-
cally.
The parking lock may only be engaged
when the vehicle is stationary. Before
moving the lever in or out of the
PP
” posi-
tion the lock button in the selector lever
handle must be pressed. Before moving
the selector lever out of the
PP
position
with the ignition switched on, the brake
pedal must also be depressed.
RR RReevveerrssee ggeeaarr
The reverse gear should only be engaged
when the vehicle is stationary and with
the engine idling. Before engaging the
position
RR
” from the positions
PP
” or
NN
the brake pedal must be depressed and
the lock button in the selector lever han-
dle must also be pressed.
The reversing lights come on when the
selector lever is in the
RR
position with
the ignition switched on.
NN NNeeuuttrraall ((iiddlliinngg ppoossiittiioonn))
To move the lever out of neutral when sta-
tionary or at speeds below 5 km/h and
with ignition switched on depress the
brake pedal and press the lock button in
the selector lever handle.
DD NNoorrmmaall ddrriivviinngg ppoossiittiioonn
The four forward gears are shifted up and
down automatically depending upon
engine load and road speed.
Under certain driving conditions it is
advantageous to engage one of the fol-
lowing described selector lever positions.
33 PPoossiittiioonn ffoorrhhiillllyy rreeggiioonnss
The
11sstt
,
22nndd
and
33rrdd
gears are shifted up
and down automatically depending upon
engine load, road speed and selected
programme (
EE
or
SS
). The
44tthh
gear is not
engaged. This increases the engine brak-
ing effect when the accelerator pedal is
released.
This selector position is recommended in
situations where the gearbox alternates
frequently between
33rrdd
and
44tthh
gears in
the “
DD
” position.
2
3
!
EPC
P R N D 3 2 1
LEO-026
DRIVING ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.93
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
22 PPoossiittiioonn ffoorr sstteeeepp hhiillllss
This selector lever position is suitable for
long climbs and descents.
The
11sstt
and
22nndd
gears are shifted up and
down automatically depending upon
engine load and speed. The
33rrdd
and
44tthh
gears are not engaged.
11 PPoossiittiioonn ffoorr vveerryy sstteeeepp hhiillllss
oorr mmaannooeeuuvvrreess
This selector lever position is recom-
mended for very steep descents.
To engage this gear, the lock button in the
selector lever handle must be pressed in.
The vehicle only moves in
11sstt
gear. The
22nndd
,
33rrdd
and
44tthh
gears are not engaged.
The cruise control* cannot be used in
position “
11
”.
NNoottee
When changing down manually the selec-
tor lever can be moved into gears
33
,
22
,
and
11
, but the gearbox will not change
down until it is no longer possible to over-
rev the engine.
KKiicckk--ddoowwnn ddeevviiccee
The kick-down device gives maximum
acceleration. When the accelerator pedal
is pressed right down past the full throttle
position, depending on road speed and
engine speed, the box changes down into
a lower gear. The shift into the next higher
gear then takes place as soon as the max-
imum specified engine speed is reached.
WWaarrnniinngg
PPlleeaassee nnoottee tthhaatt tthhee ddrriivviinngg wwhheeeellss
ccoouulldd ggoo iinnttoo aa ssppiinn iiff tthhee kkiicckk--
ddoowwnn ddeevviiccee iiss aapppplliieedd oonn rrooaaddss
wwiitthh bbllaacckk iiccee..
RRiisskk ooff sskkiiddddiinngg!!
NNootteess oonn ddrriivviinngg
SSttaarrttiinngg
The engine can only be started when
selector lever is at
NN
or
PP
”. See also
“Starting engine”.
SSeelleeccttiinngg aa ddrriivviinngg rraannggee
WWhheenn tthhee vveehhiiccllee iiss ssttaattiioonnaarryy aanndd
tthhee eennggiinnee iiss rruunnnniinngg aallwwaayyss ddeepprreessss
tthhee ffoooott bbrraakkee wwhheenn sseelleeccttiinngg aa ggeeaarr..
WWhheenn tthhee vveehhiiccllee iiss ssttaattiioonnaarryy ddoo nnoott
ddeepprreessss tthhee aacccceelleerraattoorr wwhheenn sseelleecctt--
iinngg aa ggeeaarr..
IIff tthhee lleevveerr iiss mmoovveedd aacccciiddeennttaallllyy iinnttoo
NN wwhheenn ddrriivviinngg,, rreelleeaassee aacccceelleerraattoorr
aanndd lleett tthhee eennggiinnee ssppeeeedd ddrroopp ttoo
iiddlliinngg bbeeffoorree sseelleeccttiinngg aa ffoorrwwaarrdd ggeeaarr
aaggaaiinn..
WWaarrnniinngg
WWhheenn tthhee eennggiinnee iiss rruunnnniinngg iitt iiss
nneecceessssaarryy ttoo hhoolldd tthhee vveehhiiccllee wwiitthh
tthhee ffoooott bbrraakkee iinn aallll ggeeaarrss.. BBeeccaauussee
wwiitthh aann aauuttoommaattiicc ggeeaarrbbooxx tthhee
ttrraannssffeerr ooff ppoowweerr iinn nnoott ffuullllyy iinntteerr--
rruupptteedd eevveenn aatt iiddlliinngg ssppeeeedd aanndd
tthhee vveehhiiccllee tteennddss ttooccrreeeepp..
2.94
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– DRIVING
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
WWhheenn tthhee vveehhiiccllee iiss ssttaattiioonnaarryy aanndd
aa ggeeaarr iiss eennggaaggeedd,, tthhee tthhrroottttllee
mmuusstt nnoott bbee ooppeenneedd iinnaaddvveerrtteennttllyy
oonn aannyy aaccccoouunntt ((ffoorr iinnssttaannccee bbyy
hhaanndd ffrroomm tthhee eennggiinnee ccoommppaarrtt--
mmeenntt)).. OOtthheerrwwiissee tthhee vveehhiiccllee wwiillll
mmoovvee iimmmmeeddiiaatteellyy eevveenn iiff tthhee
hhaanndd bbrraakkee hhaass bbeeeenn ffuullllyy aapppplliieedd..
BBeeffoorree wwoorrkkiinngg oonn tthhee vveehhiiccllee wwiitthh
tthhee eennggiinnee rruunnnniinngg,, aappppllyy tthhee
hhaannddbbrraakkee aanndd ppuutt tthhee sseelleeccttoorr
lleevveerr iinnPP..
MMoovviinngg ooffff
Select driving range (
RR
,
DD
,
33
,
22
,
11
).
WWaaiitt
uunnttiill tthhee ggeeaarrbbooxx hhaass sshhiifftteedd aanndd tthhee
ppoowweerr ffllooww iiss mmaaddee ttoo tthhee ddrriivviinngg
wwhheeeellss
(light selection jerk perceptible).
TThheenn oonnee ccaann aacccceelleerraattee..
SSttooppppiinngg
When the vehicle is stopped for a short
period, for example at traffic lights, it is
only necessary to apply the brakes. It is
not necessary to move selector lever to
NN
”. The engine should however only be
running at idling speed.
PPaarrkkiinngg
WWaarrnniinngg
TToo pprreevveenntt tthhee vveehhiiccllee ffrroomm rroolllliinngg
aawwaayy iinnaaddvveerrtteennttllyy,, yyoouu sshhoouulldd
aallwwaayyss aappppllyy tthhee hhaannddbbrraakkee ffiirrmmllyy
wwhheenn tthhee vveehhiiccllee hhaass ccoommee ttoo tthhee
ccoommpplleettee ssttoopp.. AAllssoo ppllaaccee tthhee ggeeaarr
sseelleeccttoorr lleevveerr iinn ppoossiittiioonnPP..
On a gradient the handbrake should be
applied firmly first and then the parking
lock engaged. This will ensure that the
locking mechanism is not too heavily
loaded and makes the lock easier to dis-
engage.
TTooww ssttaarrttiinngg
Vehicles with an automatic gearbox can-
not be started by towing or pushing the
vehicle. See "Tow start/towing" chapter.
When the battery is flat, the engine can
be started from the battery of another
vehicle by using jumper cables. See
“Emergency starting”.
TToowwiinngg
If a vehicle must be towed instructions in
the "Tow start/towing" chapter must be
followed strictly.
EEmmeerrggeennccyy pprrooggrraamm
In case of an electronic failure of the gear-
box, emergency programs are activated
depending on the type of failure.
The gear box continues to shift auto-
matically, but strong jerking is noticeable.
Consult a Technical Service Centre.
The gear box no longer shifts automati-
cally.
In this case, you can shift manually. Only
the
33rrdd
gear is available in the positions
"
DD
", "
33
" and "
22
" of the selector lever.
In the positions "
11
" and "
RR
" of the selec-
tor lever, the
11sstt
gear and reverse gear,
respectively, are available as customary.
It may happen that the gear oil is over-
heated when the torque converter has to
work harder, especially if
22nndd
gear is
missing.
In such cases, go to a Technical Service
Centre as soon as possible.
DRIVING –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.95
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
2.96
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– DRIVING
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
HHaannddbbrraakkee
To apply the handbrake pull lever up
firmly. On hills the 1st gear or with auto-
matic gearbox the parking lock should
also be engaged. The handbrake should
always be applied so firmly that it is not
possible to drive inadvertently with the
handbrake on.
When handbrake is applied with the igni-
tion on, the brake warning lamp comes
on.
To release handbrake, pull lever up
slightly, press locking knob (arrow) in and
push lever right down.
WWaarrnniinngg
TToo pprreevveenntt tthhee vveehhiiccllee ffrroomm
rroolllliinngg aawwaayy iinnaaddvveerrtteennttllyy,, yyoouu
sshhoouulldd aallwwaayyss aappppllyy tthhee hhaanndd--
bbrraakkee ffiirrmmllyy aafftteerr tthhee vveehhiiccllee hhaass
ccoommee ttoo aa ccoommpplleettee ssttoopp..
YYoouu sshhoouulldd aallssoo ppuutt tthhee ccaarr iinnttoo
ggeeaarr ((mmaannuuaall ggeeaarrbbooxx)) oorr tthhee ggeeaarr
sseelleeccttoorr lleevveerr iinn ppoossiittiioonnPP
((aauuttoommaattiicc ggeeaarrbbooxx))..
PPlleeaassee nnoottee tthhaatt tthhee hhaannddbbrraakkee
mmuusstt bbee rreelleeaasseedd ccoommpplleetteellyy aafftteerr
aapppplliiccaattiioonn.. IIff tthhee hhaannddbbrraakkee iiss
oonnllyy ppaarrttllyy rreelleeaasseedd iitt ccoouulldd lleeaadd
ttoo oovveerrhheeaattiinngg ooff tthhee bbrraakkeess aanndd
tthhuuss nneeggaattiivveellyy aaffffeecctt tthhee ffuunnccttiioonn
ooff tthhee bbrraakkee ssyysstteemm.. TThhiiss ccoouulldd
aallssoo lleeaadd ttoo pprreemmaattuurree rreeaarr bbrraakkee
lliinniinngg wweeaarr..
TO8-029
DRIVING ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.97
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
IIggnniittiioonn lloocckk
EElleeccttrroonniicc eennggiinnee bblloocckk
When switching ignition on vehicle and
key automatically compare data. This is
displayed by a pilot light in the dash-
board. See “Warning lamps” chapter.
If the wrong (i.e. false) key is used, the car
will not start and the immobiliser pilot
light will come on.
PPeettrrooll eennggiinneess
11 IIggnniittiioonn aanndd eennggiinnee sswwiittcchheedd ooffff::
SStteeeerriinngg ccaann bbee lloocckkeedd..
22 IIggnniittiioonn oonn
33 SSttaarrttiinngg eennggiinnee
DDiieesseell eennggiinneess
11 FFuueell ssuuppppllyy ccuutt ooffff aanndd eennggiinnee
sswwiittcchheedd ooffff::
SStteeeerriinngg ccaann bbee lloocckkeedd..
22 GGllooww pplluuggss // nnoorrmmaall rruunnnniinngg
ppoossiittiioonn
To avoid unnecessary strain on the bat-
tery, do not use any other major electrical
equipment while the glow plugs are pre-
heating.
33 SSttaarrttiinngg eennggiinnee
FFoorr aallll vveehhiicclleess::
PPoossiittiioonn 11::
To lock the steering wheel withdraw the
key and turn the wheel until you hear the
pin engage.
In vehicles with automatic gearbox the
key can only be turned to position
11
and
withdrawn when the selector lever is in
the “
PP
” position.
WWaarrnniinngg
OOnn vveehhiicclleess wwiitthh mmaannuuaall ggeeaarrbbooxx,,
nneevveerr rreemmoovvee tthhee kkeeyy ffrroomm tthhee
sstteeeerriinngg lloocckk wwhhiillee tthhee vveehhiiccllee iiss
mmoovviinngg.. OOtthheerrwwiissee tthhee sstteeeerriinngg
wwhheeeell mmaayy lloocckk uunneexxppeecctteeddllyy..
PPoossiittiioonn 22::
If the key is difficult to turn in the lock,
move the steering wheel until the key
turns freely.
PPoossiittiioonn 33::
Before the starter can be operated a sec-
ond time the key must be turned back to
position
11
. This prevents the starter motor
from engaging while the engine is run-
ning, as this could damage the starter.
IIggnniittiioonn kkeeyy lloocckk**
On vehicles with an automatic gearbox*
after switching off the ignition the igni-
tion key can only be withdrawn if the
selector lever is in the
PP
” position.
When the ignition key has been with-
drawn the selector lever is locked in this
position.
2
3
1
B8D-005
2.98
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– DRIVING
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
SSttaarrttiinngg tthhee eennggiinnee
GGeenneerraall nnootteess
WWaarrnniinngg
WWhheenn rruunnnniinngg tthhee eennggiinnee iinn ccoonn--
ffiinneedd ssppaacceess tthheerree iiss aa ddaannggeerr ooff
ppooiissoonniinngg..
Before starting, move gear lever to neu-
tral (with automatic gearbox, selector
lever in
PP
or
NN
position) and apply
handbrake firmly.
On vehicles with a manual gearbox
depress the clutch pedal when operating
starter so that starter only has to turn
engine.
As soon as engine starts, release the
ignition key so that starter can disengage.
After starting a cold engine it may
sound noisy for a moment or two because
the oil pressure has to build up in the
hydraulic tappets first. This is normal and
no cause for alarm.
DDoo nnoott wwaarrmm tthhee eennggiinnee uupp bbyy
rruunnnniinngg iitt wwhheenn tthhee vveehhiiccllee iiss ssttaa--
ttiioonnaarryy.. BBeeggiinn ddrriivviinngg tthhee vveehhiiccllee aass
ssoooonn aass ppoossssiibbllee..
Do not over-rev or use full throttle until
the engine has reached the normal oper-
ating temperature.
OOnn vveehhiicclleess wwiitthh aa ccaattaallyyttiicc ccoonn--
vveerrtteerr tthhee eennggiinnee mmuusstt nnoott bbee ssttaarrtteedd
bbyy ttoowwiinngg tthhee vveehhiiccllee iinn eexxcceessss ooff
5500 mm.. OOtthheerrwwiissee uunnbbuurrnneedd ffuueell ccaann
ppaassss iinnttoo tthhee ccoonnvveerrtteerr aanndd lleeaadd ttoo
ddaammaaggee..
BBeeffoorree ttooww ssttaarrttiinngg aann eennggiinnee,, aann
aatttteemmpptt sshhoouulldd bbee mmaaddee aatt uussiinngg tthhee
bbaatttteerryy ooff aannootthheerr vveehhiiccllee aass ssttaarrttiinngg
hheellpp.. SSeeee ""SSttaarrttiinngg hheellpp"" cchhaapptteerr..
PPeettrrooll eennggiinneess
These engines are equipped with a petrol
injection system that automatically sup-
plies the correct fuel/air mixture at all
ambient temperatures.
When engine
iiss ccoolldd oorr aatt ooppeerraattiinngg
tteemmppeerraattuurree
do
nnoott
accelerate before or
during the starting procedure.
If the engine does not start at once, stop
using the starter after 10 seconds. Wait
about half a minute and then try again.
If the engine does still not start, this may
be due to a blow out of the electric fuel
pump fuse. See "Fuses" chapter.
When the engine
iiss vveerryy hhoott
it may be
necessary to accelerate slightly after the
engine has started.
DRIVING ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.99
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
DDiieesseell eennggiinneess
GGllooww pplluugg ssyysstteemm
After switching to the driving position
(ignition on) the required glow plug
warm-up time is indicated by a lamp
which is controlled by the coolant temper-
ature. See “Warning lamps” chapter.
SSttaarrttiinngg aa ccoolldd eennggiinnee
Ambient temperature above +5 °C:
The engine can be started without pre-
glow. Do not depress throttle during the
starting procedure.
Ambient temperature below +5 °C:
Turn the key in the ignition lock to posi-
tion
22
the glow plug warning lamp comes
on. It goes out when the ignition temper-
ature is reached.
WWhhiillee tthhee ggllooww pplluuggss aarree wwoorrkkiinngg ddoo
nnoott sswwiittcchh oonn aannyy hheeaavvyy ccuurrrreenntt ccoonn--
ssuummeerrss bbeeccaauussee tthhiiss wwoouulldd ppllaaccee aann
uunnnneecceessssaarryy llooaadd oonn tthhee bbaatttteerryy..
If the engine does still not start, this may
be due to a blow out of the preheating
fuse. See "Fuses" chapter.
When the warning lamp goes out, start
the engine immediately.
Do not depress the accelerator while
starting.
If the engine only fires irregularly, con-
tinue to operate the starter a few seconds
longer (30 seconds at maximum) until the
engine runs under its own power.
If the engine does not start, switch the
glow plugs on again and try starting it
again as described.
SSttaarrttiinngg aa wwaarrmm eennggiinnee
The glow plug lamp does not come on
the engine can be started straight away.
SSttaarrttiinngg aafftteerr rruunnnniinngg oouutt ooff ffuueell
If the tank on vehicles with a diesel
engine was empty, starting after filling
with diesel fuel can take longer than nor-
mal up to one minute. This is because
the fuel system must first be freed of air
before starting.
2.100
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– DRIVING
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
SSttooppppiinngg tthhee eennggiinnee
VVaalliidd ffoorr aallll eennggiinneess::
WWhheenn tthhee eennggiinnee hhaass bbeeeenn ssuubbjjeecctteedd
ttoo aa hheeaavvyy eennggiinnee llooaadd ffoorr aa lloonngg ttii--
mmee,, tthhee eennggiinnee mmuusstt nnoott bbee sswwiittcchheedd
ooffff aabbrruuppttllyy.. LLeett iitt iiddllee ffoorr aabboouutt
22 mmiinnuutteess ttoo aavvooiidd oovveerrhheeaattiinngg..
WWaarrnniinngg
AAfftteerr tthhee eennggiinnee hhaass bbeeeenn ssttooppppeedd
tthhee ffaann ccaann ccoonnttiinnuuee rruunnnniinngg ffoorr aa
wwhhiillee ((uupp ttoo aabboouutt 1100 mmiinnuutteess)) wwiitthh
tthhee iiggnniittiioonn sswwiittcchheedd ooffff.. IItt ccaann aallssoo
ssttaarrtt ttoo rruunn aaggaaiinn ssuuddddeennllyy aafftteerr aa
sshhoorrtt ttiimmee iiff
tthhee ccoooollaanntt tteemmppeerraattuurree iinnccrreeaasseess
dduuee ttoo hheeaatt bbuuiilldd--uupp
wwhheenn tthhee eennggiinnee iiss hhoott aanndd tthhee
eennggiinnee ccoommppaarrttmmeenntt iiss hheeaatteedd
aaddddiittiioonnaallllyy bbyy ssttrroonngg ssuunnlliigghhtt..
SSppeecciiaall ccaarree mmuusstt tthheerreeffoorree bbee
ttaakkeenn wwhheenn wwoorrkkiinngg iinn tthhee eennggiinnee
ccoommppaarrttmmeenntt..
VVaalliidd ffoorr aallll vveerrssiioonnss wwiitthh ccaattaallyyttiicc
ccoonnvveerrtteerr**::
DDoo nnoott sswwiittcchh ooffff tthhee iiggnniittiioonn wwhhiillee
tthhee vveehhiiccllee iiss iinn mmoottiioonn wwiitthh aa ggeeaarr
eennggaaggeedd;; ootthheerrwwiissee uunnbbuurrnneedd ffuueell
mmaayy ggoo iinnttoo tthhee ccoonnvveerrtteerr,, wwhheerree iitt
wwoouulldd bbuurrnn aanndd ccaauussee oovveerrhheeaattiinngg,,
wwhhiicchh wwoouulldd ddaammaaggee tthhee ccoonnvveerrtteerr..
DRIVING –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.101
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
To relieve the foot on the accelerator
pedal this system can hold any speed
above around 30 km/h constant, so far as
this is permitted by engine output.
WWaarrnniinngg
TThhee ccrruuiissee ccoonnttrrooll ssyysstteemm sshhoouulldd
nnoott bbee uusseedd iinn ddeennssee ttrraaffffiicc aanndd
ppoooorr rrooaadd ccoonnddiittiioonnss ((sslliippppeerryy ssuurr--
ffaacceess,, aaqquuaappllaanniinngg,, ggrraavveell))..
WWhheenn tthhee ssyysstteemm iiss sswwiittcchheedd oonn ddoo
nnoott mmoovvee iinnttoo nneeuuttrraall wwiitthhoouutt ddee--
pprreessssiinngg tthhee cclluuttcchh ppeeddaall,, ootthheerrwwiissee
tthhee eennggiinnee wwiillll rraaccee aanndd ccaann,, uunnddeerr
cceerrttaaiinn cciirrccuummssttaanncceess,, bbeeccoommee ddaamm--
aaggeedd..
NNoottee
On vehicles with an automatic gearbox,
the Cruise Control System is only active
when the gear selector is in position
DD
,
33
or
22
. If any other position (
PP
,
NN
,
RR
or
11
) is
selected while driving, the last speed to
be stored is deleted and the system is
switched off.
SSwwiittcchhiinngg oonn
The system is
ooppeerraatteedd
with the sliding
switch
AA
and the press button
BB
on the
turn signal/main beam lever.
The system is
sswwiittcchheedd oonn
by moving
switch
AA
to
OONN
.
SSttoorriinngg ssppeeeedd
When the speed to be maintained has
been reached the press button
BB
(SET)
must be pressed briefly. The foot can then
be taken off the accelerator pedal.
The speed can also be increased in the
normal way with the accelerator pedal.
When the pedal is then released the pre-
viously programmed speed is resumed.
This however, is not the case when the
stored speed is exceeded by more than
10 km/h for a period of more than 5 min-
utes. The speed must then be stored
again.
WWaarrnniinngg
TThhee pprrooggrraammmmeedd ssppeeeedd mmuusstt oonnllyy
bbee rreessuummeedd wwhheenn iitt iiss nnoott ttoooo hhiigghh
ffoorr tthhee eexxiissttiinngg ttrraaffffiicc ccoonnddiittiioonnss!!
CCrruuiissee ccoonnttrrooll ssyysstteemm**
B
A
B8L-068
2.102
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– DRIVING
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
AAlltteerriinngg ssttoorreedd ssppeeeedd
RReedduucciinngg//sseettttiinngg
The stored speed can be reduced by
pressing button
BB
.
By pressing button
BB
briefly, the stored
speed is reduced by a preset amount. If
you press and hold the button, the speed
will decrease through automatic decelera-
tion. The speed reached when releasing
the button will be stored.
If the button is released at a speed of less
than approx. 30 km/h, the memory is
deleted. The speed must then, if neces-
sary, be reset using button
BB
after the
vehicle has accelerated to a speed higher
than approx. 30 km/h.
AAcccceelleerraattiinngg//ssttoorriinngg
The stored speed can be
iinnccrreeaasseedd
with-
out depressing the accelerator by moving
the slide control
AA
to
RREESS
.
By briefly pressing the slide control, the
speed is increased by a preset amount. If
the switch is moved to the left and held,
the speed is increased through automatic
acceleration. The speed reached when the
switch is released is then saved.
SSwwiittcchhiinngg ssyysstteemm ooffff
tteemmppoorraarriillyy
VVeehhiicclleess wwiitthh mmaannuuaall ggeeaarrbbooxx::
The system is
tteemmppoorraarriillyy sswwiittcchheedd ooffff
when the brake or clutch pedals are used
or when the switch
AA
is moved to
OOFFFF
(not
engaged).
The speed stored at this time will remain
in the memory.
To
rreessuummee
the previously stored speed
push switch
AA
fully to the left after the
brake or clutch pedals are released.
WWaarrnniinngg
TThhee pprrooggrraammmmeedd ssppeeeedd mmuusstt oonnllyy
bbee rreessuummeedd wwhheenn iitt iiss nnoott ttoooo hhiigghh
ffoorr eexxiissttiinngg ttrraaffffiicc ccoonnddiittiioonnss..
DRIVING –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2.103
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
VVeehhiicclleess wwiitthh aauuttoommaattiicc ggeeaarr bbooxx::
The system is
tteemmppoorraarriillyy sswwiittcchheedd ooffff
when the brake or clutch pedals are used
or when the switch
AA
is moved to OFF (not
engaged).
The speed stored at this time will
rreemmaaiinn
in the memory.
To
rreessuummee
the previously stored speed
push switch
AA
fully to the left after the
brake or clutch pedals are released.
WWaarrnniinngg
TThhee pprrooggrraammmmeedd ssppeeeedd mmuusstt oonnllyy
bbee rreessuummeedd iiff iitt ccoommpplliieess wwiitthh tthhee
ssppeeeedd rreegguullaattiioonnss ooff tthhaatt mmoommeenntt..
Furthermore, the system will be
sswwiittcchheedd
ooffff tteemmppoorraarriillyy
if the selector lever is
moved to positions
NN
or
11
.
The speed stored in the memory at this
time
wwiillll bbee ddeelleetteedd..
SSttoorriinngg ssppeeeedd
If no speed was saved before the system
was temporarily switched off or if the
stored speed was deleted, a new speed
can be stored in the following manner:
Move switch
AA
fully to the left and hold
until the desired speed has been reached.
The speed is stored when the switch is
released.
oorr
Press button
BB
briefly. The current
speed is stored
SSwwiittcchhiinngg tthhee ssyysstteemm ooffff
ccoommpplleetteellyy
VVeehhiicclleess wwiitthh aa mmaannuuaall ggeeaarr bbooxx::
The system is
ccoommpplleetteellyy sswwiittcchheedd ooffff
when switch
AA
is moved entirely to the
right (OFF engaged) or when the vehicle is
stopped and the ignition is switched off.
VVeehhiicclleess wwiitthh aauuttoommaattiicc ggeeaarr bbooxx::
The system is
ccoommpplleetteellyy sswwiittcchheedd ooffff
by selecting one of the following posi-
tions by moving the selector lever:
to positions
PP
,
NN
,
RR
or
11..
oorr
by switching the ignition off when the
vehicle is stationary.
B
A
B8L-068
FILLING THE TANK
Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4
Diesel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5
INTELLIGENT TECHNOLOGY
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7
Four-wheel drive* . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10
Wheelspin control (TCS)* . . . . . . 3.11
Electronic Stability Program
(ESP)*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13
Power steering* . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14
YOUR VEHICLE AND
THE ENVIRONMENT
The first 1,500 km and
afterwards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
Cleaning the exhaust fumes. . . . 3.16
Environment-friendly and
economical driving. . . . . . . . . . . 3.17
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.21
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24
Headlight covering . . . . . . . . . . . 3.25
CARE AND MAINTENANCE
Care of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 3.28
CHECKING AND REFILLING
Engine bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.35
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . 3.36
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.38
Cooling system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42
Radiator fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.44
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.45
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.46
Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . 3.51
SERVICING AND REPLACING
Accessories, modifications and
replacement of parts . . . . . . . . . 3.52
Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.53
Dust and pollen filter* . . . . . . . . 3.54
IF AND WHEN
First aid kit, warning triangle . . . 3.56
On board tools, spare wheel . . . 3.57
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.60
Changing wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.66
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.73
Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.76
Installing a radio . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.85
Mobile telephones and radio
telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.86
Emergency starting. . . . . . . . . . . 3.87
Tow start/towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.89
INDEX
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
3.1
UUnnlloocckkiinngg tthhee ttaannkk ffllaapp
To unlock the tank flap press the button.
The unlock function only functions if the
ignition is switched off.
The filler neck is in the rear right-side
panel.
You can reach the lockable cap after hav-
ing opened the tank flap (see illustration).
The tank holds about 55 liters. In four-
wheel drive vehicles it holds 62 liters.
AAss ssoooonn aass tthhee ccoorrrreeccttllyy ooppeerraatteedd
aauuttoommaattiicc nnoozzzzllee sswwiittcchheess ooffff ffoorr
tthhee ffiirrsstt ttiimmee,, tthhee ttaannkk iiss ffuullll.. DDoo nnoott
tthheenn ttrryy ttoo ppuutt mmoorree ffuueell iinn bbeeccaauussee
tthhee eexxppaannssiioonn ssppaaccee iinn tthhee ttaannkk wwiillll
bbee ffiilllleedd tthhee ffuueell ccaann tthheenn oovveerrffllooww
wwhheenn iitt bbeeccoommeess wwaarrmm..
After filling the tank, screw cap and close
tank flap until it engages. The cap is tied
to an anti-loss cord.
3.2
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– FILLING THE TANK
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
FFiilllliinngg tthhee ttaannkk
TO8-016 CON-009
NNootteess
Any fuel spillage should be wiped off the
paint finish immediately, as the paint
could otherwise be damaged, especially if
it is RME (“biodiesel”) fuel.
OOnn vveehhiicclleess wwiitthh aa ccaattaallyyttiicc ccoonnvveerrtteerr,,
nneevveerr ddrriivvee uunnttiill tthhee ffuueell ttaannkk iiss ccoomm--
pplleetteellyy eemmppttyy.. TThhee iirrrreegguullaarr ffuueell ssuupp--
ppllyy ccaann ccaauussee mmiissffiirriinngg.. TThhiiss aalllloowwss
uunnbbuurrnntt ffuueell iinnttoo tthhee eexxhhaauusstt ssyysstteemm,,
wwhhiicchh ccaann ccaauussee oovveerrhheeaattiinngg aanndd
ddaammaaggee ttoo tthhee ccaattaallyysstt..
FILLING THE TANK ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
3.3
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
In the chapter “Technical Data” and on
the inside of the tank flap you will find
information on the correct octane rating
for your engine.
GGeenneerraall nnootteess
Unleaded petrol must comply with
DIN EN
1)
228 and leaded petrol with
DIN 51 600.
If, in an emergency, the octane rating of
the available petrol is lower than that
required by the engine, only drive with
medium engine speeds and low engine
loading.
HHiigghh eennggiinnee llooaaddiinngg wwiitthh ffuullll
tthhrroottttllee oorr hhiigghh rreevvss ccaann ccaauussee eennggiinnee
ddaammaaggee..
Fill tank with petrol of the cor-
rect octane rating as soon as possible.
Fuel with a higher octane rating than
that required by the engine can be used
without limitation. There are, however, no
advantages regarding output and con-
sumption.
EEvveenn oonnee ttaannkkffuull ooff lleeaaddeedd ppeettrrooll
wwiillll ddeettrraacctt ffrroomm tthhee eeffffiicciieennccyy ooff
tthhee ccaattaallyyttiicc ccoonnvveerrtteerr..
SSeeee cchhaapptteerrFFiilllliinngg tthhee ttaannkk..
1)
European Standard.
PPeettrrooll aaddddiittiivveess
The quality of the fuel has a decisive influ-
ence upon the running behavior, perfor-
mance and service life of the engine. The
additives which are mixed into the petrol
are of particular significance. It is there-
fore advisable only to use good
qquuaalliittyy
ppeettrrooll ccoonnttaaiinniinngg aaddddiittiivveess..
3.4
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– FILLING THE TANK
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
PPeettrrooll
Diesel fuel must correspond to DIN EN
1)
590.
CCZZ
22))
nnoo lloowweerr tthhaann 4499..
RRMMEE ffuueell ((ddiieesstteerr))
According to norm DIN 51 606
3)
.
Vehicles with diesel engines can also run
on
RRMMEE ffuueell
(Rapeseed Methyl Ester).
Ask a Technical Service Centre or automo-
bile club where biodiesel is available.
See chapter "Filling the tank".
PPrrooppeerrttiieess ooff RRMMEE
RME is chemically produced from veg-
etable oil (predominantly rapeseed oil) in
a process whereby the oil is mixed with
methanol and converted, via a catalyst,
into RME.
RME is almost totally sulfur free. The
combustion of RME thus emits practically
no sulfur dioxide (SO
2
).
1)
European Standard.
2)
C
etan-
Z
ahl (Cetane Number). Measure of
diesel fuel ignitability.
3)
DIN preliminary Standard.
Exhaust gas contains less
– carbon monoxide
– hydrocarbons
– particles (i.e. soot)
than with conventional diesel fuel.
All emission values are lower than legal
requirements.
RME fuel is biodegradable.
Performance may be slightly lower.
Fuel consumption may be slightly
higher.
RME can be used in temperatures down
to approximately –10 °C.
Diesel must be added at ambient tem-
peratures of less than –10 °C to prevent
deterioration of the biodiesel due to low
temperatures. The mixing ratio of diesel
to biodiesel must be approximately
50:50.
IIff tthhee RRMMEE rraattiioo eexxcceeeeddss 5500%%,, ttoooo
mmuucchh ssmmookkee mmaayy bbee ffoorrmmeedd..
During the summer months, RME may
be mixed with diesel at any ratio.
FILLING THE TANK ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
3.5
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
DDiieesseell
DDrriivviinngg iinn wwiinntteerr
When using summer Diesel trouble may
be experienced at temperatures below
0 °C because the fuel thickens due to wax
separation.
For this reason winter Diesel which is
more resistant to cold is sold during the
winter in some countries, and this works
correctly down to between –15 °C and
–22 °C approximately, depending on the
brand of fuel used.
The biodiesel available in countries with
different climactic conditions usually has
different temperature characteristics.
Technical Service Centres or service sta-
tions in each country can inform you of
the specific characteristics of the respec-
tive diesel.
FFiilltteerr pprreehheeaattiinngg
The vehicle is fitted with a filter preheater.
This will ensure that the fuel system will
remain operational down to about –25 °C,
provided that winter Diesel which is cold
resistant down to –15 °C is used.
If, at temperatures below –25 °C the fuel
is waxed to such an extent that the engine
will not start it is sufficient to place the
vehicle in a warm enclosure for a while.
Fuel
aaddddiittiivveess
(anti-waxing agent), petrol
and similar fluids must
nnoott
be mixed with
Diesel fuel.
3.6
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– FILLING THE TANK
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
GGeenneerraall nnootteess
Brake lining wear depends to a large
extent on the operating conditions and
style of driving. On vehicles which are
used mainly in town traffic and stop/start
conditions or are driven hard it may be
necessary to have the thickness of the
brake linings checked by a Technical
Service Centre in between the intervals
given in the Inspection and Service
Schedule.
Change down in good time when dri-
ving downhill, in order to make use of the
engine braking effect. This relieves strain
on the brake system. When the brakes are
applied do not keep them on continu-
ously, apply and release alternately.
WWhhaatt ccaann hhaavvee aa nneeggaattiivvee eeffffeecctt oonn
tthhee bbrraakkeess??
WWeett oorr ggrriitttteedd rrooaadd ssuurrffaaccee
WWaarrnniinngg
UUnnddeerr cceerrttaaiinn ccoonnddiittiioonnss ee..gg..
aafftteerr ddrriivviinngg tthhrroouugghh wwaatteerr,, hheeaavvyy
rraaiinn ffaallllss oorr aafftteerr tthhee vveehhiiccllee hhaass
bbeeeenn wwaasshheedd,, tthhee bbrraakkeess ccoouulldd
sseett iinn llaatteerr tthhaann nnoorrmmaall dduuee ttoo
ddaammpp,, oorr iinn wwiinntteerr ffrroozzeenn,, bbrraakkee
ddiissccss aanndd lliinniinnggss tthhee bbrraakkeess
mmuusstt ffiirrsstt bbee ddrriieedd tthhrroouugghh ccaarreeffuull
bbrraakkiinngg..
FFuullll bbrraakkiinngg ppoowweerr mmiigghhtt aallssoo
sseett iinn llaatteerr tthhaann nnoorrmmaall eevveenn wwhheenn
ddrriivviinngg oonn ggrriitttteedd rrooaaddss iiff yyoouu
hhaavvee nnoott bbrraakkeedd ffoorr ssoommee ttiimmee
tthhee llaayyeerr ooff ssaalltt oonn tthhee bbrraakkee ddiisskkss
aanndd bbrraakkee lliinniinnggss mmuusstt ffiirrsstt bbee
wwoorrnn ddoowwnn wwhhiillsstt bbrraakkiinngg..
INTELLIGENT TECHNOLOGY –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
3.7
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
BBrraakkeess
OOvveerrhheeaattiinngg ooff tthhee bbrraakkeess
WWaarrnniinngg
NNeevveerr lleett tthhee bbrraakkeessrruubb bbyy
pprreessssiinngg tthhee ppeeddaall ttoooo lliigghhttllyy
wwhheenn yyoouu ddoo nnoott rreeaallllyy nneeeedd ttoo
bbrraakkee.. TThhiiss ccaauusseess tthhee bbrraakkeess ttoo
oovveerrhheeaatt,, lleeaaddss ttoo lloonnggeerr bbrraakkiinngg
ddiissttaanncceess aanndd ttoo aa hhiigghheerr lleevveell ooff
wweeaarr..
BBeeffoorree ssttaarrttiinngg oonn aa lloonngg ssttrreettcchh
ooff rrooaadd iinn aa vveerryy hhiillllyy aarreeaa,, pplleeaassee
rreedduuccee yyoouurr ssppeeeedd,, cchhaannggee ttoo aa
lloowweerr ggeeaarr ((mmaannuuaall ggeeaarrbbooxx)) oorr
cchhoooossee aa lloowweerr ppoossiittiioonn ((aauuttoo--
mmaattiicc ggeeaarrbbooxx)).. IInn tthhiiss wwaayy yyoouu
wwiillll uussee tthhee bbrraakkiinngg ppoowweerr ooff tthhee
eennggiinnee aanndd rreelliieevvee pprreessssuurree oonn tthhee
bbrraakkeess..
IIff aa ffrroonntt ssppooiilleerr,, ffuullll ssiizzee wwhheeeell
ttrriimmss eettcc..,, iiss rreettrrooffiitttteedd,, iitt iiss
nneecceessssaarryy ttoo eennssuurree tthhaatt tthhee ffllooww
ooff aaiirr ttoo tthhee ffrroonntt bbrraakkeess iiss nnoott
rreessttrriicctteedd ootthheerrwwiissee tthhee bbrraakkeess
ccaann oovveerrhheeaatt..
SSeerrvvoobbrraakkee
WWaarrnniinngg
TThhee sseerrvvoo iiss ooppeerraatteedd bbyy aa vvaaccuuuumm
wwhhiicchh iiss oonnllyy ggeenneerraatteedd wwhheenn tthhee
eennggiinnee iiss rruunnnniinngg.. FFoorr tthhiiss rreeaassoonn
tthhee vveehhiiccllee sshhoouulldd nnoott bbee aalllloowweedd
ttoo rroollll wwiitthh tthhee eennggiinnee sswwiittcchheedd
ooffff..
WWhheenn tthhee bbrraakkee sseerrvvoo iiss nnoott wwoorrkk--
iinngg bbeeccaauussee,, ffoorr eexxaammppllee,, tthhee
vveehhiiccllee iiss bbeeiinngg ttoowweedd oorr aa ddeeffeecctt
hhaass ooccccuurrrreedd oonn tthhee bbrraakkee sseerrvvoo
iittsseellff,, tthhee bbrraakkee ppeeddaall mmuusstt bbee
pprreesssseedd ccoonnssiiddeerraabbllyy hhaarrddeerr ttoo
ccoommppeennssaattee ffoorr tthhee aabbsseennccee ooff
sseerrvvoo aassssiissttaannccee..
AAnnttii--lloocckkiinngg bbrraakkee ssyysstteemm**
The ABS plays a major part in increasing
the active safety of the vehicle. The big
advantage when compared with a conven-
tional brake system is that even when
braking hard on a slippery road surface
the best possible steerability is retained
for the road condition because the wheels
do not lock.
SStteeeerriinngg ccoonnttrrooll iiss tthheerree--
ffoorree mmaaiinnttaaiinneedd,, ggiivviinngg tthhee bbeesstt ddrrii--
vviinngg ssttaabbiilliittyy ppoossssiibbllee..
However, one must not expect the ABS
system to shorten the braking distance
under all conditions. When driving on
gravel or on fresh snow covering a slip-
pery surface, i.e. when one should be dri-
ving very slowly and carefully, the stop-
ping distance may even be slightly longer.
PPlleeaassee aallssoo rreeffeerr ttoo tthhee nnootteess oonn tthhee
nneexxtt ppaaggee..
3.8
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– INTELLIGENT TECHNOLOGY
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
HHooww tthhee AABBSS** ssyysstteemm wwoorrkkss
An automatic check is made when a
speed of approx. 6 km/h is reached.
When this happens a pumping noise can
be heard.
When the turning speed of a wheel
reaches a level which is too low for the
vehicle speed and it tends to lock, the
brake pressure to this wheel is reduced.
On the front axle the brake pressure is
regulated for each wheel individually,
whereas on the rear axle, the pressure is
regulated for both wheels at the same
time. As a result the braking effect is the
same for both rear wheels and the driving
stability is retained as far as possible.
TThhiiss rreegguullaattiinngg pprroocceessss mmaakkeess iittsseellff
kknnoowwnn bbyy mmoovveemmeenntt ooff tthhee bbrraakkee
ppeeddaall aanndd iiss aaccccoommppaanniieedd bbyy nnooiisseess..
This is done deliberately as a warning to
the driver that a wheel or the wheels are
in the locking range.
SSoo tthhaatt tthhee AABBSS
ccaann rreegguullaattee eeffffeeccttiivveellyy iinn tthhiiss rraannggee
tthhee bbrraakkee ppeeddaall mmuusstt rreemmaaiinn
ddeepprreesssseedd oonn nnoo aaccccoouunntt sshhoouulldd iitt
bbee ppuummppeedd!!
WWaarrnniinngg
HHoowweevveerr tthhee AABBSS ssyysstteemm ccaannnnoott
oovveerrccoommee tthhee pphhyyssiiccaall lliimmiittss.. TThhiiss
mmuusstt bbee bboorrnnee iinn mmiinndd ppaarrttiiccuullaarrllyy
oonn sslliippppeerryy oorr wweett rrooaaddss.. WWhheenn tthhee
AABBSS ccoommeess iinnttoo tthhee ccoonnttrrooll rraannggee
tthhee ssppeeeedd mmuusstt iimmmmeeddiiaatteellyy bbee
aaddaapptteedd ttoo tthhee rrooaadd aanndd ttrraaffffiicc
ccoonnddiittiioonnss.. TThhee iinnccrreeaasseedd aammoouunntt
ooff ssaaffeettyy aavvaaiillaabbllee mmuusstt nnoott tteemmpptt
oonnee iinnttoo ttaakkiinngg rriisskkss..
If a defect occurs on the ABS it is indi-
cated by one or two warning lamps.
INTELLIGENT TECHNOLOGY –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
3.9
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
3.10
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– INTELLIGENT TECHNOLOGY
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
FFoouurr--wwhheeeell ddrriivvee**
TThhee ccoonncceepptt ooff ffoouurr--wwhheeeell ddrriivveess
The four-wheel drive vehicles are fitted
with a completely automatic drive on all
four wheels.
It automatically distributes the drive
power and adapts perfectly to the driving
style and specific surface conditions.
WWaarrnniinngg
TThhee ddrriivviinngg ssttyyllee aallwwaayyss nneeeeddss ttoo
bbee aaddjjuusstteedd ttoo ssuuiitt tthhee rrooaadd ssuurr--
ffaaccee aanndd ttrraaffffiicc ccoonnddiittiioonnss.. IInnccrreeaasseedd
ssaaffeettyy sshhoouulldd nnoott eennccoouurraaggee oonnee
ttoo ttaakkee uunnnneecceessssaarryy rriisskkss..
TThhee bbrraakkiinngg ccaappaacciittyy iiss lliimmiitteedd bbyy
tthhee aaddhheerreennccee ooff tthhee wwhheeeellss aanndd
ddooeess nnoott ddiiffffeerr ffrroomm aa rreegguullaarr vveehhii--
ccllee wwiitthh aa ttwwoo--wwhheeeell ddrriivvee..
FFoorr tthhiiss rreeaassoonn,, eevveenn tthhoouugghh oonn
sslliippppeerryy ssuurrffaaccee tthhee aacccceelleerraattiioonn
iiss ggoooodd,, iitt sshhoouulldd nneevveerr iinndduuccee
oonnee ttoo ddrriivvee aatt eexxcceessssiivvee ssppeeeeddss..
OOnn hhuummiidd ssuurrffaacceess kkeeeepp iinn mmiinndd
tthhaatt tthhee ffrroonntt wwhheeeellss ccaann aallssoo ssuuff--
ffeerr ffrroomm aaqquuaappllaanniinngg iiff tthhee ssppeeeedd
iiss eexxcceessssiivvee.. AAss ooppppoosseedd ttoo vveehhii--
cclleess wwiitthh ffrroonntt wwhheeeell ddrriivvee,, tthhee
bbeeggiinnnniinngg ooff aaqquuaappllaanniinngg iiss nnoott
aannnnoouunncceedd bbyy aa ssuuddddeenn iinnccrreeaassee
iinn eennggiinnee rreevvoolluuttiioonnss.. WWee rreeccoomm--
mmeenndd nnoott ttoo ddrriivvee aatt eexxcceessssiivvee
ssppeeeeddss aanndd aallwwaayyss aaddjjuusstt ttoo tthhee
rrooaadd ccoonnddiittiioonnss..
OOtthheerr iimmppoorrttaanntt nnootteess
WWiinntteerr ttyyrreess
With the four wheel drive, the vehicle’s
drive is good in the winter, even with ser-
ial tyres. However, we recommend the use
of winter tyres or all-weather tyres on
aallll
ffoouurr wwhheeeellss
to further improve driving
and braking.
SSnnooww cchhaaiinnss
Snow chains should be used on four-
wheel drives, particularly when it is
mandatory. More details on the use of
snow chains are indicated in the
"Wheels" chapter.
RRiimmss//ttyyrree cchhaannggee
FFoorr ffoouurr--wwhheeeell ddrriivvee vveerrssiioonnss,, aallll ffoouurr
wwhheeeellss mmuusstt hhaavvee tthhee ssaammee ttrreeaadd ssuurr--
ffaaccee..
FFoorr ffuurrtthheerr iinnffoorrmmaattiioonn,, sseeee ppaaggee
33..6633..
INTELLIGENT TECHNOLOGY –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
3.11
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
WWhheeeellssppiinn ccoonnttrrooll ((TTCCSS))**
In vehicles with front wheel traction, the
TCS lowers the engine power to stop the
wheel from spinning when you accelerate.
This feature works at any speed in combi-
nation with the ABS. If there is an ABS
breakdown, the TCS stops working.
Vehicles fitted with TCS* are also fitted
with an electronic differential lock (EDL).
The EDL makes it much easier, or even
possible, to pull away, accelerate and
climb steep gradiants in unfavourable
conditions.
The EDL works fully automatically – the
driver does not need to do anything at all.
It uses the ABS sensors to monitor the
speed of the driving wheels. Up to a speed
of about 80 km/h (50 mph), a difference in
speed of the drive wheels of approxi-
mately 100 rpm caused by a slippery road
surface on
oonnee ssiiddee
is balanced out by
slowing down the wheel which is slipping
and thereby applying more driving force
to the other drive wheel through the dif-
ferential.
TThhiiss ccoonnttrrooll pprroocceedduurree ccaann bbee ddeetteecctteedd
bbyy tthhee ssoouunndd iitt mmaakkeess..
IInn oorrddeerr ttoo oobbttaaiinn tthhee bbeesstt ppoossssiibbllee
ppeerrffoorrmmaannccee ffrroomm tthhee EEDDLL,, aallwwaayyss
uussee tthhee cclluuttcchh aanndd aacccceelleerraattoorr ppeeddaallss
aaccccoorrddiinngg ttoo tthhee rrooaadd ccoonnddiittiioonnss
wwhheenn bbeeggiinnnniinngg ttoo ddrriivvee..
WWaarrnniinngg
WWhheenn aacccceelleerraattiinngg oonn aa sslliippppeerryy
rrooaadd ssuurrffaaccee,, ee..gg.. oonn iiccee oorr ssnnooww,,
uussee tthhee aacccceelleerraattoorr ppeeddaall ccaarree--
ffuullllyy.. TThhee wwhheeeellss ccaann ssppiinn,, eevveenn
wwiitthh EEDDLL,, aanndd tthhuuss iimmppaaiirr ddrriivviinngg
ssttaabbiilliittyy..
To ensure that the brake disc of the
braked wheel does not overheat, the EDL
will automatically switch itself off if exces-
sive demands are placed on it. The vehi-
cle remains operational and has the same
characteristics as a vehicle without EDL.
For this reason, the switching off of the
EDL is not noticed.
As soon as the brakes have cooled off, the
EDL will switch itself back on again.
If the ABS warning lamp lights up there
may be a fault present in the EDL. Take the
vehicle to a Technical Service Centre as
soon as possible!
WWaarrnniinngg
TThhee ssttyyllee ooff ddrriivviinngg mmuusstt aallwwaayyss
bbee aaddaapptteedd ttoo ssuuiitt tthhee rrooaadd ssuurr--
ffaaccee aanndd ttrraaffffiicc ccoonnddiittiioonnss.. TThhee
iinnccrreeaasseedd ssaaffeettyy ooffffeerreedd bbyy tthhee
EEDDLL sshhoouulldd nnoott eennccoouurraaggee oonnee ttoo
ttaakkee uunnnneecceessssaarryy rriisskkss..
The TCS connects automatically once the
engine is started. If necessary, it can be
connected or disconnected by briefly
pressing the button located on the central
console next to the hand brake.
When the TCS is switched off a pilot light
comes on.
You should normally always have the TCS
on. Only in exceptional circumstances
when you want the wheels to spin should
you switch it off. For instance:
– With small emergency wheel,
When you are using snow chains.
When driving in deep snow or on a soft
surface.
When the car is stuck, to “rock” it out,
and
To go up slopes where each traction
wheel is on a surface with a very differ-
ent grip (I.e. ice on the left, dry asphalt
on the right). The EDS continues to func-
tion under these conditions.
Afterwards you should always reconnect
this device.
WWaarrnniinngg
DDrriivviinngg ssttyyllee sshhoouulldd aallwwaayyss bbee
mmooddiiffiieedd ttoo ssuuiitt tthhee ttrraaffffiicc aanndd
rrooaadd ccoonnddiittiioonnss.. TThhee ggrreeaatteerr ssaa--
ffeettyy pprroovviiddeedd bbyy tthhee TTCCSS sshhoouulldd
nnoott lleeaadd yyoouu ttoo ttaakkee ggrreeaatteerr rriisskkss..
NNoottee
For the TCS to work properly all four
wheels should be the same. Otherwise
engine performance may be reduced.
See also “Changing wheels”.
3.12
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– INTELLIGENT TECHNOLOGY
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
EElleeccttrroonniicc SSttaabbiilliittyy PPrrooggrraamm ((EESSPP))**
INTELLIGENT TECHNOLOGY ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
3.13
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
The ESP increases the control over the
vehicle in situations such as accelerating
or in turns.
The ESP expands the functions of the
ABS/TCS and decreases under any cir-
cumstance the risk of skidding. This con-
tributes to an improved stability of the
vehicle.
The system works in the total realm of
speed in relation to the ABS. In case of
failure in the ABS, the ESP will also fail.
The ESP connects automatically when the
engine is switched on and checks itself.
The ESP warning light lights up when
the system is disconnected. See the
"Switches" chapter.
The ESP pilot light lights up when the sys-
tem is disconnected. See “Warning
lights” chapter.
The ESP should always be connected.
Only in exceptional cases, when the skid-
ding effect is desired under extremely
sporty conditions, the system can be dis-
connected.
Afterwards the system should be recon-
nected.
The ABS and the EDS remain connected
even if the ESP is disconnected.
FFuunnccttiioonniinngg
The electronic stability program encom-
passes the ABS, EDS and TCS. In addition
to all available data for these functions,
the ESP control unit needs additional
measurements supplied by high precision
sensors. The measuring data consists of
the speed at which the vehicle turns
around its vertical axis, acceleration,
pressure on brakes and the turn of the
steering wheel.
With the help of the steering wheel sensor
and the vehicle’s speed, the desired
direction is determined and constantly
compared to the vehicle’s real behavior.
When differences occur, such as incipient
skidding, the ESP automatically brakes
the adequate wheel.
The vehicle stabilizes through the braking
force on the wheel. If the vehicle swings
out (tendency of the tail to swing out) the
brakes will act on the exterior front wheel.
In case the swerve is insufficient (ten-
dency to leave the curve) the braking
force will be exerted on the interior rear
wheel. The braking generates a noise.
WWaarrnniinngg
TThhee EESSPP ccaannnnoott oovveerrccoommee pphhyyssiiccaall
lliimmiittss.. TThhiiss mmuusstt bbee bboorrnnee iinn mmiinndd
ppaarrttiiccuullaarrllyy oonn wweett oorr iiccyy rrooaaddss..
TThhee ddrriivviinngg ssttyyllee mmuusstt aallwwaayyss bbee
aaddaapptteedd ttoo tthhee rrooaadd aanndd ttrraaffffiicc
ccoonnddiittiioonnss.. TThhee iinnccrreeaasseedd ssaaffeettyy
ooffffeerreedd bbyy tthhee EESSPP sshhoouulldd nnoott
eennccoouurraaggee oonnee ttoo ttaakkee uunnnneecceess--
ssaarryy rriisskkss..
3.14
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– INTELLIGENT TECHNOLOGY
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
PPoowweerr sstteeeerriinngg**
Do not keep the steering wheel fully
turned more than 15 seconds when the
engine is switched on, as the hydraulic oil
will be heated to a high temperature by
the servo pump.
TThhiiss ccoouulldd ddaammaaggee tthhee ppoowweerr sstteeeerr--
iinngg ssyysstteemm..
Furthermore every time you turn the steer-
ing wheel as far as it will go with the
engine off, you will hear a series of noises
made by the excessive effort of the servo
pump. The engine tick over may also be
reduced for a short time.
YOUR VEHICLE AND THE ENVIRONMENT –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
3.15
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
TThhee ffiirrsstt 11,,550000 kkmm aanndd aafftteerrwwaarrddss
RRuunnnniinngg--iinn
During the first few operating hours the
engine internal friction is higher than
later on when all the moving parts have
bedded down. How well this running-in
process is done depends to a consider-
able extent on the way the vehicle is dri-
ven during the first 1500 km.
UUpp ttoo 11000000 kkiilloommeettrreess
the following general rules apply:
DDoo nnoott uussee ffuullll tthhrroottttllee
DDoo nnoott ddrriivvee ffaasstteerr tthhaann 33//44 ooff ttoopp
ssppeeeedd
AAvvooiidd hhiigghh eennggiinnee ssppeeeeddss
Trailer towing should if possible be
avoided.
WWaarrnniinngg
NNeeww ttyyrreess mmuusstt aallssoo bbeerruunn iinn
bbeeccaauussee tthheeyy ddoo nnoott hhaavvee mmaaxxiimmuumm
aaddhheessiioonn aatt tthhee ssttaarrtt.. TThhiiss mmuusstt bbee
ttaakkeenn iinnttoo aaccccoouunntt bbyy ddrriivviinngg ccaarree--
ffuullllyy dduurriinngg tthhee ffiirrsstt 110000 kkmm..
NNeeww bbrraakkee lliinniinnggss mmuusstt aallssoo bbee
rruunn iinn aanndd ddoo nnoott hhaavvee tthhee ooppttii--
mmuumm ffrriiccttiioonn pprrooppeerrttiieess dduurriinngg tthhee
ffiirrsstt 220000 kkmm.. TThhee sslliigghhttllyy rreedduucceedd
bbrraakkiinngg eeffffeecctt ccaann bbee ccoommppeenn--
ssaatteedd ffoorr bbyy mmoorree pprreessssuurree oonn tthhee
bbrraakkee ppeeddaall.. TThhiiss aallssoo aapppplliieess
wwhheenn nneeww lliinniinnggss hhaavvee bbeeeenn ffiitttteedd..
FFrroomm 11000000 11550000 kkmm
The speed can be gradually increased to
the road or engine maximum.
DDuurriinngg aanndd aafftteerr tthhee rruunnnniinngg--iinn
ppeerriioodd tthhee ffoolllloowwiinngg aapppplliieess::
Do not overrev the engine when cold
either in neutral or in the gears.
All speeds and revs given are only valid
when engine is
pprrooppeerrllyy wwaarrmm
.
DDoo nnoott ddrriivvee wwiitthh uunnnneecceessssaarriillyy
hhiigghh eennggiinnee rreevvss.. CChhaannggiinngg uupp
oonnee ggeeaarr hheellppss ttoo ssaavvee ffuueell,, ddeeccrreeaassee
nnooiissee aanndd ppoolllluuttiioonn.. SSeeee aallssoo tthhee
""DDrriivviinngg eeccoonnoommiiccaallllyy aanndd eeccoollooggii--
ccaallllyy"" cchhaapptteerr..
Do not let engine labour change down
when engine no longer runs smoothly.
AAfftteerr tthhee rruunnnniinngg--iinn ppeerriioodd
On vehicles with a rev counter* the
maximum permissible engine speed is
shown by the beginning of the red zone
on the rev counter scale. The needle of the
counter must not move into this zone.
Extremely high engine revs will be auto-
matically governed.
3.16
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– YOUR VEHICLE AND THE ENVIRONMENT
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
CClleeaanniinngg tthhee eexxhhaauusstt ffuummeess
TThhee ppeerrffeecctt ffuunnccttiioonniinngg ooff tthhee cclleeaann--
iinngg ssyysstteemm ffoorr eexxhhaauusstt ffuummeess
is of
great importance for the environment-
friendly functioning of your vehicle.
Therefore, keep in mind the following
points:
Versions with a catalytic converter must
only use unleaded fuel. See "Filling the
tank".
In vehicles with a catalytic converter
never drive until the fuel tank is com-
pletely empty. Irregular fuel supply can
cause misfiring, thus allowing unburned
fuel into the exhaust system which can
cause overheating and damage to the cat-
alyst.
If while driving you experience starting
difficulties, loss of power or engine prob-
lems the cause could be a failure in the
ignition. In this case, fuel may have
entered the exhaust system without burn-
ing and may be released to the atmos-
phere. In addition, the catalyst can deteri-
orate due to overheating. Speed needs to
be decreased immediately. See the near-
est Technical Service Centre to fix the fail-
ure.
Do not fill the engine with too much oil.
See "Checking oil level".
Do not tow vehicles for more than 50 m
when trying to tow start. See "Tow
stat/starting" chapter.
WWaarrnniinngg
DDuuee ttoo ppoossssiibbllee hhiigghh tteemmppeerraa--
ttuurreess ooff tthhee ccaattaallyysstt,, ddoo nnoott ppaarrkk iinn
ppllaacceess wwhheerree tthhee ccaattaallyysstt iiss eeaassiillyy
eexxppoosseedd ttoo iinnffllaammmmaabbllee mmaatteerriiaall..
DDoo nnoott uussee aaddddiittiioonnaall pprrootteeccttiioonn
ffoorr tthhee bbooddyy oorr aannttiiccoorrrroossiivvee pprroodd--
uuccttss ffoorr ssuummppss aanndd eexxhhaauusstt ppiippeess,,
ccaattaallyyttiicc ccoonnvveerrtteerrss oorr hheeaatt sshhiieellddss..
TThhee aabboovvee mmeennttiioonneedd mmaatteerriiaall
ccoouulldd iiggnniittee wwhhiillee ddrriivviinngg..
NNoottee
Even when the filtering system for
exhaust fumes is in perfect working order,
under certain circumstances, the fumes
may smell like sulphur.
This depends on the percentage of sulfur
in the fuel.
Often it is sufficient to change brands or
buy super unleaded.
YOUR VEHICLE AND THE ENVIRONMENT –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
3.17
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
EEnnvviirroonnmmeenntt--ffrriieennddllyy aanndd eeccoonnoommiiccaall ddrriivviinngg
Three factors determine the fuel con-
sumption, the burden on the environment
and the wear on the engine, brakes and
tyres:
The personal driving style.
The individual conditions of the use of
the car.
Technical prerequisites.
The fuel consumption can be reduced by
10 to 15 percent by adopting a thoughtful
and economic driving style. This chapter
will help you lower pollution and save
money by following 10 suggestions.
SSuuggggeessttiioonn 11
TThhoouugghhttffuull ddrriivviinngg ssttyyllee
The highest fuel consumption takes place
during acceleration. If you drive in a
thoughtful manner you will have to brake
less and, therefore, accelerate less. You
can also let the vehicle roll, i.e. when you
can foresee that the following traffic light
will be red.
SSuuggggeessttiioonn 22
CChhaannggiinngg ggeeaarrss ssaavveess eenneerrggyy
Another way to save fuel is to change up
as quickly as possible. If you drive with
high engine revs the car will use up more
energy.
The illustration shows the relation
between the consumption (l/100 km) and
speed (km/h) in first, second, third,
fourth and fifth gear.
The following rules may be helpful. Never
drive more than a few meters in first gear.
When you reach 2,000 revolutions, you
should change up.
If you drive a vehicle with an automatic
gearbox, press the accelerator pedal gen-
tly. Do not press it to the kick-down posi-
tion. This way, a consumption oriented
program is automatically selected. It
changes up as soon as possible and takes
longer to change down.
30 50 70
km/h
90
l/100km
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B45-354P
3.18
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– YOUR VEHICLE AND THE ENVIRONMENT
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
SSuuggggeessttiioonn 33
AAvvooiidd ddrriivviinngg aatt mmaaxxiimmuumm ssppeeeedd
Try not to drive at maximum speed. The
increase of fuel consumption, exhaust
pollution and noise is disproportionate at
high speeds.
The illustration shows the relation
between consumption (l/100 km) and
speed (km/h).
If only about 3 quarters of top speed is
utilized, the fuel consumption will be
reduced by about half.
WWaarrnniinngg
DDrriivviinngg aatt hhiigghh ssppeeeeddss ddeeccrreeaasseess
rrooaadd ssaaffeettyy..
SSuuggggeessttiioonn 44
DDeeccrreeaassee iiddlliinngg
It is worth switching off
1)
the engine in
traffic jams, at railroad crossings and at
traffic lights with a long red light. The sav-
ings in fuel after 30-40 seconds with the
engine switched off is higher than the fuel
used to switch the engine on again.
SSuuggggeessttiioonn 55
PPeerriiooddiicc rreevviissiioonnss
Your fuel savings are guaranteed even
before going on a trip with the periodic
revisions by your Technical Service Centre.
The maintenance of the engine is not only
a safety and maintenance issue but also a
fuel consumption issue.
Poor fine tuning of the engine may
increase fuel consumption by up to 10%.
Check the oil level every time you fill up.
The oil consumption depends largely on
the engine load. Depending on the dri-
ving style, the oil consumption can be up
to 1.0 l/1000 km.
Another suggestion: You can also lower
oil consumption by using synthetic oils.
1)
Statutory regulations must be respected.
km/h
max
l/100km
B45-355P
YOUR VEHICLE AND THE ENVIRONMENT –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
3.19
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
SSuuggggeessttiioonn 66
AAvvooiidd sshhoorrtt ddrriivveess
The engine and the catalytic converter
must reach its optimum functioning tem-
perature in order to effectively reduce
consumption and toxic gas emissions.
The fuel consumption of a cold engine of
a normal vehicle right after the start is
about 30-40 liters per 100 km. After
about one kilometer the consumption
decreases to 20 liters. After about
ffoouurr
kilometers the engine has warmed up and
the consumption is normal. For this rea-
son, it is important to avoid short drives
and heating the vehicle’s engine when
the vehicle is not moving. Drive on
quickly!
The ambient temperature also counts. The
illustration shows the difference in con-
sumption (l/100km) for the same dis-
tance (km) at +20°C and –10°C. Your vehi-
cle’s consumption is higher in the
summer than in the winter.
SSuuggggeessttiioonn 77
CChheecckk tthhee ttyyrree pprreessssuurree
Make sure that the tyres have always ade-
quate pressure. Even half a bar less
increases the level of fuel consumption by
5 percent. If the pressure is not correct,
the tyres wear out faster due to an exces-
sive deformation and overheating which,
in turn, will decrease the driving perfor-
mance.
Always check the tyre pressure when the
tyre is cold.
In addition, do not drive year round with
winter tyres. They make more noise and
increase fuel consumption by 10 percent.
Change to summer tyres on time.
SSuuggggeessttiioonn 88
AAvvooiidd uunnnneecceessssaarryy wweeiigghhtt
Apart from driving habits and periodic
revisions of your vehicle, there are other
ways to reduce fuel consumption:
AAvvooiidd uunnnneecceessssaarryy wweeiigghhtt
Every kilogram increases fuel consump-
tion. For this reason, it is worth checking
your boot to avoid unnecessary weight.
Frequently, the roof rack will stay on the
roof even though it is no longer needed.
Due to greater air resistance, an unloaded
roof rack at a speed of 100-120 km/h
increases the consumption by approx.
12%.
5
+20°C
–10°C
15 25
km
30
l/100km
B45-356P
3.20
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– YOUR VEHICLE AND THE ENVIRONMENT
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
SSuuggggeessttiioonn 99
SSaavvee eelleeccttrriicciittyy
The alternator generates electricity while
driving. The more electricity is used, the
higher the fuel consumption.
The heated rear window, extra lights, the
heater fan and air conditioning* use a
large amount of energy. The heated rear
window creates a consumption of approx.
one liter for every 10 hours.
For this reason, disconnect electrical con-
sumers as soon as they are no longer
needed. The alternator generates electric-
ity when the engine is running.
SSuuggggeessttiioonn 1100
WWrriitttteenn cchheecckk--uupp
If you wish to reduce fuel consumption
keep a trip book. It is not much work and
is worth while since it allows you to detect
possible consumption variations (positive
or negative) on time and intervene, if nec-
essary. If you detect an increase in con-
sumption you should examine the driving
conditions since the last filling.
YOUR VEHICLE AND THE ENVIRONMENT –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
3.21
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
TTrraaiilleerr ttoowwiinngg
The vehicle is intended mainly for the
transportation of persons and luggage.
However, it can also be used to tow a
trailer if it is fitted with the appropriate
technical equipment and the maximum
payloads are not exceeded (see chapter
“Technical Data”).
Towing a trailer not only demands more
from the car, but from the driver too.
You should therefore strictly adhere to the
service and running-in instructions on the
following pages.
TTeecchhnniiccaall rreeqquuiirreemmeennttss
The vehicle is supplied with a factory-
fitted towing bracket and all that is tech-
nically and legally necessary for trailer
towing.
AA
= 4 Attachment points
BB
= 65 mm
CC
= 420 (empty vehicle) /
350 mm (vehicle with max. load)
DD
= 340 mm
EE
= 552 mm
FF
= 845 mm
GG
= 1014 mm
All measurements are expressed in mm.
G
A
B
C
D
E
F
LEO-028
3.22
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– YOUR VEHICLE AND THE ENVIRONMENT
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
OOppeerraattiioonnss iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss
The removable ball coupling of the tow-
ing bracket* may be stored in the tool box
located inside the spare wheel recess.
Additional mirrors are required if the
traffic behind the trailer is not visible with
the exterior mirrors fitted as standard.
Both exterior mirrors must be attached to
brackets in such a way that a sufficient
field of vision to the rear is guaranteed at
all times.
The permitted trailer weight must not
be exceeded under any circumstances.
See chapter “Technical Data”.
When using a trailer on mountain
routes you must bear in mind that the tow
loads given in the “Technical data” chap-
ter are only applicable for slopes of 10%
to 12%. If you do not use the full tow load
you may drive up steeper slopes.
The given trailer weights are only applic-
able for altitudes up to 1000 m above sea
level. As the engine output drops due to
the decreasing air density, the climbing
ability must also be reduced by 10% for
each further 1000 m.
Where possible make full use of the
maximum permissible drawbar weight on
the ball of the towing bracket but do not
exceed it. See chapter “Technical Data”.
While observing the permissible trailer
and drawbar weight, distribute the load in
the trailer so that heavy objects are as
near as possible to the axle. The objects
must also be secured so that they cannot
slip about.
YOUR VEHICLE AND THE ENVIRONMENT –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
3.23
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
The tyre pressures on the towing vehi-
cle must be adjusted for full load condi-
tions, and also check the pressures on the
trailer.
The headlight settings, should be
checked with trailer attached before mov-
ing off and adjusted as necessary.
On vehicles with headlight beam control it
is only necessary to turn the knurled disc
on the dash board in the appropriate
direction.
DDrriivviinngg ttiippss
To obtain the best possible handling of
vehicle and trailer, the following should
be noted:
Try to avoid driving with an unladen
vehicle and a loaded trailer. If this cannot
be avoided, only drive slowly to allow for
the unfavourable weight distribution.
As driving stability of vehicle and trailer
decreases when the speed increases do
not drive at the maximum permissible top
speed in unfavourable road, weather or
wind conditions – particularly when going
downhill.
In any case the speed must be reduced as
soon as the trailer shows the slightest
sign of snaking. On no account try to stop
the snaking by accelerating.
FFoorr ssaaffeettyy rreeaassoonnss oonnee sshhoouulldd nnoott
ddrriivvee ffaasstteerr tthhaann 8800 kkmm//hh ((5500 mmpphh))..
TThhiiss aallssoo aapppplliieess iinn ccoouunnttrriieess wwhheerree
hhiigghheerr ssppeeeeddss aarree ppeerrmmiitttteedd..
Always brake in good time. If the trailer
has an overrun brake, apply the brakes
gently at first then firmly. This will avoid
the jerking caused by the trailer wheels
locking.
Change down before going down a steep
hill so that the engine can act as a brake.
When a long climb in a low gear with
extremely high engine revs must be nego-
tiated at exceptionally high ambient tem-
peratures the coolant temperature gauge
must be observed. When the gauge nee-
dle moves to the right end of the scale,
the road speed must be reduced immedi-
ately.
The cooling effect of the radiator fan
cannot be increased by changing down,
because the speed of the fan is not
dependent on the engine speed. One
should therefore not change down even
when towing a trailer as long as the
engine can cope without the vehicle
speed dropping too much.
3.24
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– YOUR VEHICLE AND THE ENVIRONMENT
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
DDrriivviinngg aabbrrooaadd
GGeenneerraall nnootteess
DDuurriinngg tthhee rruunnnniinngg iinn ppeerriioodd yyoouu
sshhoouulldd aavvooiidd ttoowwiinngg aa ttrraaiilleerr iiff ppoossssii--
bbllee..
IItt iiss aaddvviissaabbllee ttoo hhaavvee tthhee vveehhiiccllee
sseerrvviicceedd bbeettwweeeenn tthhee IInnssppeeccttiioonn
iinntteerrvvaallss iiff iitt iiss uusseedd ffrreeqquueennttllyy ffoorr
ttoowwiinngg aa ttrraaiilleerr..
The trailer and drawbar load figures on
the data plate of the towing bracket are
for test certification only. The correct fig-
ures for the vehicle, which may be lower
than the above figures, are given in the
vehicle documents and in this manual.
When using the towing device the car’s
empty weight is reduced, and as a result
its effective load is decreased.
Observe all statutory requirements
regarding the use of a trailer.
If the vehicle is to be taken abroad, the
following must also be borne in mind:
If the vehicle has a petrol engine and
catalytic converter, one must ensure that
unleaded petrol will be available during
the journey see page 3.4. The automo-
bile clubs offer information about the
unleaded filling station network.
In some countries it is possible that a
vehicle model is sold under conditions
where some spare parts are not available
or that the Technical Services may only
carry out limited repairs.
SEAT importers and distributors will
gladly provide information about the tech-
nical preparation of your vehicle in addi-
tion to necessary maintenance and repair
possibilities.
The addresses are given in the SEAT
International Assistance Guide which
comes with the car documentation.
YOUR VEHICLE AND THE ENVIRONMENT ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
3.25
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
HHeeaaddlliigghhtt ccoovveerriinngg
When the vehicle is used in a country
which drives on the opposite side of the
road to the home country, the asymmetric
dipped headlights will dazzle oncoming
traffic.
To prevent this, the areas of the headlight
lenses shown in the illustration must be
covered up with an opaque adhesive
strip.
When using a sharp object (for example a
razor blade) to cut the tape, do not do this
directly on the headlights as you may
scratch them.
WWaarrnniinngg
WWhheenn yyoouu ddrriivvee oonn tthhee ooppppoossiittee
ssiiddee ooff tthhee rrooaadd ttoo yyoouurr oowwnn ccoouunn--
ttrryy,, aanndd wwiitthh yyoouurr hheeaaddlliigghhttss
mmaasskkeedd,, bbeeaarr iinn mmiinndd tthhaatt vviissiibbiill--
iittyy iiss rreedduucceedd,, aanndd yyoouu wwiillll hhaavvee ttoo
aaddaapptt yyoouurr ddrriivviinngg aanndd ssppeeeedd
aaccccoorrddiinnggllyy ffoorr ssaaffeettyy rreeaassoonnss..
3.26
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– YOUR VEHICLE AND THE ENVIRONMENT
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
OOnn tthhee rriigghhtt hheeaaddllaammpp,, iiff yyoouu cchhaannggee
ffrroomm ddrriivviinngg oonn tthhee rriigghhtt hhaanndd ssiiddee ttoo
ddrriivviinngg oonn tthhee lleefftt hhaanndd ssiiddee ooff tthhee
rrooaadd..
OOnn tthhee lleefftt hheeaaddllaammpp,, iiff yyoouu cchhaannggee
ffrroomm ddrriivviinngg oonn tthhee rriigghhtt hhaanndd ssiiddee ttoo
ddrriivviinngg oonn tthhee lleefftt hhaanndd ssiiddee ooff tthhee
rrooaadd..
5 cm
11 cm
TO8-032
10,5 cm
7 cm
5 cm
TO8-031
YOUR VEHICLE AND THE ENVIRONMENT –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
3.27
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
OOnn tthhee rriigghhtt hheeaaddllaammpp,, iiff yyoouu cchhaannggee
ffrroomm ddrriivviinngg oonn tthhee lleefftt hhaanndd ssiiddee ttoo
ddrriivviinngg oonn tthhee rriigghhtt hhaanndd ssiiddee ooff tthhee
rrooaadd..
OOnn tthhee lleefftt hheeaaddllaammpp,, iiff yyoouu cchhaannggee
ffrroomm ddrriivviinngg oonn tthhee lleefftt hhaanndd ssiiddee ttoo
ddrriivviinngg oonn tthhee rriigghhtt hhaanndd ssiiddee ooff tthhee
rrooaadd..
5 cm
7,5 cm
11 cm
TO8-034
7 cm
5 cm
3,5 cm
TO8-033
3.28
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– CARE AND MAINTENANCE
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
CCaarree ooff tthhee vveehhiiccllee
RReegguullaarr aanndd eexxppeerrtt ccaarree hheellppss ttoo
mmaaiinnttaaiinn tthhee vvaalluuee ooff tthhee vveehhiiccllee..
WWaarrnniinngg
IIff mmiissuusseedd,, ccaarr ccaarree mmaatteerriiaallss
ccaann bbee hhaarrmmffuull ttoo hheeaalltthh..
CCaarr ccaarree mmaatteerriiaallss mmuusstt aallwwaayyss
bbee ssttoorreedd iinn aa ssaaffee ppllaaccee wwhheerree
tthheeyy aarree oouutt ooff rreeaacchh ooff cchhiillddrreenn..
WWhheenn bbuuyyiinngg ccaarr ccaarree mmaatteerriiaallss
oonnee sshhoouulldd sseelleecctt pprroodduuccttss wwhhiicchh
ddoo nnoott ddaammaaggee tthhee eennvviirroonnmmeenntt..
EEmmppttyy ccoonnttaaiinneerrss wwhhiicchh tthheessee mmaatteerrii--
aallss wweerree iinn ddoo nnoott bbeelloonngg wwiitthh hhoouussee--
hhoolldd wwaassttee..
WWaasshhiinngg
WWaarrnniinngg
DDaammppnneessss aanndd iiccee iinn tthhee bbrraakkee
ssyysstteemm ccaann hhaavvee aa nneeggaattiivvee eeffffeecctt
oonn tthhee bbrraakkiinngg ppoowweerr..
The best protection against environmen-
tal influences is frequent washing and
use of the right waxing product.
How often this treatment is required
depends, amongst other things on how
much the vehicle is used, how it is parked
(garage, in open under trees etc.), the
seasons, weather conditions and environ-
mental influences.
TThhee lloonnggeerr bbiirrdd ddrrooppppiinnggss,, iinnsseeccttss,,
ttrreeee rreessiinn,, rrooaadd aanndd iinndduussttrriiaall ggrriimmee,,
ttaarr ssppoottss,, ssoooott,, rrooaadd ssaalltt aanndd ootthheerr
aaggggrreessssiivvee mmaatteerriiaallss rreemmaaiinn oonn tthhee
vveehhiiccllee ppaaiinntt tthhee mmoorree llaassttiinngg tthheeiirr
ddeessttrruuccttiivvee eeffffeecctt wwiillll bbee.. HHiigghh tteemm--
ppeerraattuurreess ee..gg.. ffrroomm ssttrroonngg ssuunnlliigghhtt
iinntteennssiiffiieess tthhee ccoorrrroossiivvee eeffffeecctt..
In certain circumstances weekly washing
can be necessary, in other conditions
monthly washing with appropriate waxing
may be fully adequate.
After the period when salt is put on the
roads the underside of the vehicle should
always be washed thoroughly.
AAuuttoommaattiicc ccaarr wwaasshheess
The vehicle paint is so durable that the
vehicle can normally be washed without
problems in an automatic car wash.
However the influence on the Paint
depends on the design of the car wash,
the filtering of the wash water, the type of
wash and care material, etc.
CARE AND MAINTENANCE –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
3.29
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
NNootteess
Before going through the car wash,
apart from the usual precautions (closing
windows and sliding roof).
You do not need to remove the Original
roof aerial.
IIff tthheerree aarree ssppeecciiaall ffiittttiinnggss oonn tthhee vveehhii--
ccllee ee..gg.. ssppooiilleerrss,, rrooooff rraacckk,, ttwwoo--wwaayy
rraaddiioo aaeerriiaall iitt iiss bbeesstt ttoo ssppeeaakk ttoo tthhee ccaarr
wwaasshh ooppeerraattoorr..
WWaasshhiinngg tthhee vveehhiiccllee bbyy hhaanndd
IInn tthhee iinntteerreessttss ooff eennvviirroonnmmeennttaall
pprrootteeccttiioonn tthhee vveehhiiccllee sshhoouulldd
oonnllyy bbee wwaasshheedd iinn ssppeecciiaallllyy pprroovviiddeedd
wwaasshh bbaayyss.. IInn ssoommee ddiissttrriiccttss,, wwaasshh--
iinngg ccaarrss eellsseewwhheerree mmaayy eevveenn bbee ffoorr--
bbiiddddeenn..
First soften the dirt with plenty of water
and rinse off as well as possible. Then
clean the car
wwiitthh aa ssoofftt ssppoonnggee,, gglloovvee
oorr bbrruusshh
starting on the roof and going
from top to bottom
uussiinngg oonnllyy sslliigghhtt
pprreessssuurree eessppeecciiaallllyy wwhheenn cclleeaanniinngg tthhee
hheeaaddlliigghhtt aarreeaa..
Paint shampoo, prefer-
ably with a neutral pH, should only be
used for very persistent dirt. Rinse the
sponge or glove out thoroughly at short
intervals.
Wheels and sill panels should be cleaned
last, using a different sponge if possible.
After cleaning the vehicle, rinse thor-
oughly with water and leather it off.
NNoottee
The vehicle should not be washed in
strong sunshine.
If the vehicle is rinsed with a hose, do
not direct the jet of water at the lock cylin-
ders and the door/boot lid/tailgate shut
lines – they can freeze up in the winter.
WWaasshhiinngg vveehhiiccllee wwiitthh hhiigghh
pprreessssuurree cclleeaanneerr
The operating instructions for the high
pressure cleaner must be followed closely
particularly with regard to pressure and
working distance.
Do not use a concentrated jet.
The water temperature must not be
above 60°C.
WWaarrnniinngg
TTyyrreess mmuusstt nneevveerr bbee cclleeaanneedd wwiitthh
aa ccoonncceennttrraatteedd jjeett!! EEvveenn aatt aa rreellaa--
ttiivveellyy llaarrggee wwoorrkkiinngg ddiissttaannccee aanndd aa
vveerryy sshhoorrtt sspprraayyiinngg ttiimmee,, ddaammaaggee
ccaann ooccccuurr..
CCoonnsseerrvvaattiioonn
Regular application of protection prod-
ucts protects the vehicle paintwork to a
large extent against the environmental
influences listed under “Washing” on the
previous page and even against light
mechanical damage.
At the latest when water on the clean
paint does not form small drops and roll
off, the vehicle should be protected by
applying a coat of good hard wax. Even
when a wax solution is used regularly in
the washing water it is advisable to pro-
tect the paint with a coat of hard wax at
least twice a year.
3.30
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– CARE AND MAINTENANCE
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
PPoolliisshhiinngg
Should only be done if paint has lost its
shine and gloss cannot be brought back
with wax. If the polish used does not con-
tain preservative compounds, the paint
must be waxed afterwards.
NNoottee
MMaatttt ppaaiinntteedd aanndd ppllaassttiicc ppaarrttss sshhoouulldd
nnoott bbee ttrreeaatteedd wwiitthh ppoolliisshh oorr hhaarrdd wwaaxx..
PPaaiinntt ddaammaaggee
Small marks in the paint such as scratches
or stone damage should be touched up
immediately with paint before the metal
starts to rust.
However, should rust be found at any time
it must be removed thoroughly and then
the area treated first with an anti-corro-
sion primer and then the correct paint
applied.
The number of the original vehicle paint is
given on the data sticker which is inside
the boot in the spare wheel housing.
WWiinnddoowwss
Remove snow and ice from windows and
mirrors with a plastic scraper only. To
avoid scratches due to dirt on the glass,
the scraper should only be pushed in one
direction and not moved to and fro.
Traces of rubber, oil, wax
1)
, grease or sili-
cone can be removed with a window
cleaning solution or a silicone remover.
1)
This wax residue can only be removed with a
special cleaner.
The windows should also be cleaned on
the inside at regular intervals.
Do not dry the windows with the leather
used for the paintwork because traces of
paint cleaner will cause streaks to appear
on the glass, which will hinder vision.
To avoid damaging the heating element
wires in the rear window do not put stick-
ers over the wires on the inside.
DDoooorr,, bboooott aanndd wwiinnddooww sseeaallss
The weatherstrips will remain flexible and
last longer if they are rubbed lightly with a
rubber protective compound from time to
time. This will also stop the weatherstrips
from freezing on in winter.
DDoooorr lloocckk ccyylliinnddeerr
You should only use an appropriate spray,
which has lubricating and anti-corrosive
qualities, to de-ice the lock cylinder.
PPllaassttiicc ppaarrttss aanndd lleeaatthheerreettttee
Exterior plastic parts are cleaned with nor-
mal washing and interior parts with a
damp cloth. If this is not sufficient,
tthheessee
ppaarrttss aanndd lleeaatthheerreettttee mmaayy oonnllyy bbee
cclleeaanneedd wwiitthh ssppeecciiaall ppllaassttiicc cclleeaanneerrss
tthhaatt aarree ffrreeee ffrroomm aallccoohhooll aanndd ootthheerr ssooll--
vveennttss..
NNoottee
The use of liquid air conditioners directly
over the air vents of the vehicle may dam-
age the plastic parts if the liquid is acci-
dentally spilled over them.
CARE AND MAINTENANCE –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
3.31
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
UUpphhoollsstteerryy ccllootthh aanndd tteexxttiillee ttrriimm
Upholstery cloth and textile trim on door
panels, parcel shelves, luggage compart-
ment covers, headlining etc. must be
cleaned with special cleaners or dry foam
and a soft brush.
NNaattuurraall lleeaatthheerr
Leather should, depending on usage, be
treated from time to time in accordance
with the following instructions. It must be
noted that on no account may
ssoollvveennttss,,
fflloooorr wwaaxx,, sshhooee ppoolliisshh,, ssppoott rreemmoovveerrss
aanndd ssiimmiillaarr pprroodduuccttss bbee uusseedd ffoorr tthhiiss
ppuurrppoossee..
To clean leather a cotton or woollen cloth
lightly moistened with water should be
used for the dirty surfaces.
Dirtier areas may be cleaned with a mild
soap solution (2 dessert spoonfuls of
neutral soap to 1 litre of water). Make
sure that the
lleeaatthheerr iiss nnoott mmaaddee ttoooo
wweett
and that no water seeps through the
seams. After cleaning, wipe dry with a
soft cloth.
Furthermore we recommend that, with
normal usage, the leather is treated at
half yearly intervals with a special leather
care agent. Apply one coat and clean off
with a soft cloth once it has taken effect.
CClleeaanniinngg sseeaatt bbeellttss
KKeeeepp bbeellttss cclleeaann.. TThheeyy mmaayy nnoott rreettrraacctt
pprrooppeerrllyy iiff vveerryy ddiirrttyy..
Dirty belts can be cleaned by washing
with a mild soap solution without taking
the belts out of the vehicle.
NNoottee
Inertia reel belts should be completely dry
before they are allowed to roll up.
WWaarrnniinngg
TThhee sseeaatt bbeellttss mmuusstt nnoott bbee
rreemmoovveedd ffoorr cclleeaanniinngg..
DDoo nnoott hhaavvee tthhee bbeellttss cclleeaanneedd
cchheemmiiccaallllyy bbeeccaauussee tthhee cclleeaanniinngg
ccoommppoouunnddss ddaammaaggee tthhee wweebbbbiinngg
mmaatteerriiaall.. EEnnssuurree tthhaatt tthhee bbeellttss ddoo
nnoott ccoommee iinnttoo ccoonnttaacctt wwiitthh ccoorrrroo--
ssiivvee fflluuiiddss..
YYoouu sshhoouulldd cchheecckk tthhee ccoonnddiittiioonn
ooff yyoouurr sseeaatt bbeellttss rreegguullaarrllyy.. IIff yyoouu
ffiinndd aannyy ddaammaaggee ttoo tthhee bbeelltt wweebb--
bbiinngg,, bbeelltt ccoonnnneeccttiioonnss,, tthhee bbeelltt
rreettrraaccttoorr oorr tthhee lloocckkiinngg ppaarrttss,, tthhee
bbeelltt iinn qquueessttiioonn mmuusstt bbee rreeppllaacceedd
bbyy aa TTeecchhnniiccaall SSeerrvviiccee CCeennttrree..
3.32
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– CARE AND MAINTENANCE
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
SStteeeell wwhheeeellss
The wheels and the wheel trims should be
cleaned thoroughly at regular intervals
when the vehicle is being washed. This
will prevent brake dust, dirt and road salt
from accumulating on the wheel.
Persistent ingrained brake dust can be
removed with an industrial grime remover.
Paint damage should be repaired before
rust can form.
AAllllooyy wwhheeeellss**
In order to maintain alloy wheel trims in
perfect condition for a long period, regu-
lar care is necessary. Above all, road salt
and brake pad dust must be washed off
thoroughly at least every two weeks, oth-
erwise the surface of the alloy will be
damaged. After being washed, the wheels
should be treated with an acid-free
cleaner for alloy wheels. About every
three months it is necessary to give
wheels a good rubbing with hard wax.
Paint polish or other abrasive solutions
must not be used. If the protective paint
coat has been damaged, e.g. by stone
impact, the damaged spots should be
dealt with as soon as possible.
WWaarrnniinngg
PPlleeaassee nnoottee wwhheenn cclleeaanniinngg tthhee
wwhheeeellss tthhaatt ddaammppnneessss,, iiccee aanndd
ggrriitt ccaann hhaavvee aa nneeggaattiivvee eeffffeecctt oonn
tthhee bbrraakkiinngg ppoowweerr..
CClleeaanniinngg aanndd aannttii--ccoorrrroossiioonn
ttrreeaattmmeenntt ooff eennggiinnee ccoommppaarrttmmeenntt
WWaarrnniinngg
BBeeffoorree wwoorrkkiinngg iinn tthhee eennggiinnee
ccoommppaarrttmmeenntt nnoottee iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss iinn
tthhee ""EEnnggiinnee ccoommppaarrttmmeenntt"" cchhaapp--
tteerr..
FFoorr ssaaffeettyy rreeaassoonnss ppuullll oouutt iiggnnii--
ttiioonn kkeeyy bbeeffoorree rreeaacchhiinngg iinnttoo tthhee
wwaatteerr bbooxx.. OOtthheerrwwiissee iiff tthhee wwiinndd--
ssccrreeeenn wwiippeerrss aarree sswwiittcchheedd oonn
uunniinntteennttiioonnaallllyy tthhee mmoovveemmeenntt ooff
tthhee wwiippeerr lliinnkk ccoouulldd ccaauussee iinnjjuurryy..
The leaves, blossoms etc. which drop into
the water box (underneath the engine
bonnet in front of the windscreen) should
be cleaned out occasionally. This will pre-
vent the water drain holes from becoming
blocked and on vehicles without a dust
and pollen filter – foreign bodies entering
the vehicle interior via the heating and
ventilation system.
The engine compartment and the outside
surface of the power unit are given anti-
corrosion treatment at the factory.
In the winter when the vehicle is being
driven frequently on salted roads, good
anti-corrosion treatment is very impor-
tant. For this reason the entire engine
compartment and the plenum chamber
should be thoroughly cleaned before and
after the salting period and then pre-
served so that the salt cannot have a
damaging effect.
CARE AND MAINTENANCE –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
3.33
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
TThhee iiggnniittiioonn mmuusstt bbee sswwiittcchheedd ooffff
bbeeffoorree wwaasshhiinngg tthhee eennggiinnee..
DDoo nnoott ppooiinntt tthhee wwaatteerr jjeett ddiirrcceettllyy aatt
tthhee hheeaaddlliigghhttss ttoo aavvooiidd ddaammaaggee..
If the engine compartment is cleaned at
any time with grease removing solutions
1)
or if one has the engine washed, the anti-
corrosion compound is nearly always
removed as well. It is therefore essential
to ask for durable preservation of all sur-
faces, seams, joints and components in
the engine compartment to be carried
out. This applies also when corrosion pro-
tected parts are renewed.
BBeeccaauussee wwhheenn wwaasshhiinngg tthhee
eennggiinnee ppeettrrooll,, ggrreeaassee aanndd ooiill
ddeeppoossiittss aarree wwaasshheedd ooffff,, tthhee ddiirrttyy
wwaatteerr mmuusstt bbee cclleeaanneedd bbyy aann ooiill sseepp--
aarraattoorr.. FFoorr tthhiiss rreeaassoonn eennggiinnee wwaasshh--
iinngg sshhoouulldd oonnllyy bbee ccaarrrriieedd oouutt iinn aa
wwoorrkksshhoopp oorr ffiilllliinngg ssttaattiioonn..
1)
Only the prescribed cleaning products may be
used, never use Petrol or Diesel.
UUnnddeerrccooaattiinngg
The underside of the vehicle is coated
with a special compound to protect it from
corrosion and damage.
However, as this protective layer can always
become damaged when the vehicle is in
use, the protective coating on the under-
side of the body and on the running gear
should be examined at defined intervals -
preferably before and after the winter sea-
son- and any damage repaired.
WWaarrnniinngg
NNeevveerr uussee aaddddiittiioonnaall uunnddeerr fflloooorr
pprrootteeccttiioonn oorr aannttii--ccoorrrroossiioonn aaggeennttss
ffoorr tthhee eexxhhaauusstt ssiilleenncceerr,, eexxhhaauusstt
ppiippee,, ccaattaallyyssttss oorr hheeaatt sshhiieellddss..
TThheessee ssuubbssttaanncceess ccoouulldd iiggnniittee
wwhhiillsstt tthhee vveehhiiccllee iiss iinn mmoottiioonn..
3.34
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– CARE AND MAINTENANCE
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
NNoottee ffoorr vveehhiicclleess wwiitthh aa ccaattaallyyttiicc
ccoonnvveerrtteerr
Due to the high temperatures which occur
in the afterburning process, additional
heat shields are fitted over the catalytic
converter. Underbody sealant must not be
applied to these shields, the catalytic
converter or the exhaust pipes. Removal
of the heat shields is also not permissi-
ble.
CCaavviittyy pprreesseerrvvaattiioonn
All cavities on the vehicle which could be
susceptible to corrosion are given perma-
nent protection at the factory.
This coating does not need checking or
any subsequent treatment. Should a
small amount of wax run out of the cavi-
ties at high ambient temperatures it can
be removed with a plastic scraper and
some white spirit.
IIff tthhee wwaaxx wwhhiicchh hhaass rruunn oouutt iiss
rreemmoovveedd wwiitthh cclleeaann ppeettrrooll,, hheeeedd
tthhee eennvviirroonnmmeennttaall pprrootteeccttiioonn rreegguullaa--
ttiioonnss..
CHECKING AND REFILLING –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
3.35
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
EEnnggiinnee bboonnnneett
UUnnlloocckkiinngg
Pull the lever on the left side panel, under
the instrument panel. The bonnet springs
up out of its lock.
At the same time, a release lever will
appear in the radiator grille. See illustra-
tion on the right.
NNoottee
Before opening the bonnet ensure that
the wiper arms are not lifted off the wind-
screen. Otherwise, damage can occur to
the paintwork.
OOppeenniinngg
Lift bonnet slightly and pull the release
grip in the direction of the arrow (see
illustration to the right) to release the
catch.
LLeett ggoo ooff tthhee rreelleeaassee ggrriipp ssoo iitt
ccaann rreettuurrnn ttoo iittss oorriiggiinnaall ppoossiittiioonn..
WWaarrnniinngg
OOnnccee tthhee bboonnnneett iiss ooppeenn ddoo nnoott
ttoouucchh tthhee rreelleeaassee ggrriipp ((llooccaatteedd
nneexxtt ttoo tthhee rraaddiiaattoorr ggrriillllee)) nnoorr ootthheerr
eelleemmeennttss ooff tthhee lloocckk.. OOtthheerrwwiissee
wwhheenn cclloossiinngg ddaammaaggee ccoouulldd ooccccuurr
ttoo tthhee lloocckkiinngg ssyysstteemm aanndd tthhee bboonn--
nneett mmaayy ooppeenn wwhhiillee ddrriivviinngg..
DDaannggeerr ooff aacccciiddeenntt!!
Lift bonnet to the stop. The bonnet is held
in position by a gas filled rod.
CClloossiinngg
Hold the bonnet on the side where the
gas filled rod is fitted. Press the bonnet
down until the gas filled rod gives way
and then engages.
DDoo nnoott pprreessss ddoowwnn iiff
iitt ddooeess nnoott cclloossee pprrooppeerrllyy.. OOppeenn
aaggaaiinn aanndd pprreessss aass bbeeffoorree..
WWaarrnniinngg
FFoorr ssaaffeettyy rreeaassoonnss,, tthhee bboonnnneett
mmuusstt aallwwaayyss bbee pprrooppeerrllyy cclloosseedd
wwhheenn tthhee vveehhiiccllee iiss mmoovviinngg..
AAllwwaayyss cchheecckk wwhheetthheerr tthhee lloocckk iiss
eennggaaggeedd bbyy ppuulllliinngg uupp.. FFuurrtthheerr--
mmoorree,, tthhee bboonnnneett mmuusstt bbee fflluusshh
wwiitthh tthhee aaddjjaacceenntt bbooddyy ppaanneellss..
IIff yyoouu sshhoouulldd nnoottiiccee tthhaatt tthhee lloocckk
iiss nnoott eennggaaggeedd,, ssttoopp tthhee vveehhiiccllee
iimmmmeeddiiaatteellyy aanndd cclloossee tthhee bboonnnneett..
B8L-035 LEO-029
3.36
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– CHECKING AND REFILLING
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
EEnnggiinnee ccoommppaarrttmmeenntt
WWaarrnniinngg
PPaarrttiiccuullaarr ccaarree sshhoouulldd bbee ttaakkeenn
wwhheenn wwoorrkkiinngg iinn tthhee eennggiinnee ccoomm--
ppaarrttmmeenntt!!
SSwwiittcchh ooffff eennggiinnee,, rreemmoovvee iiggnnii--
ttiioonn kkeeyy..
PPuullll hhaannddbbrraakkee oonn ffiirrmmllyy..
MMoovvee ggeeaarr lleevveerr iinnttoo nneeuuttrraall oorr,,
iinn aauuttoommaattiicc ggeeaarrbbooxxeess,, iinnPP
ppoossiittiioonn..
AAllllooww eennggiinnee ttoo ccooooll ooffff..
AAss lloonngg aass tthhee eennggiinnee iiss aatt ooppeerr--
aattiinngg tteemmppeerraattuurree::
DDoo nnoott ppuutt yyoouurr hhaanndd iinnttoo tthhee
rraaddiiaattoorr ffaann,, iitt ccoouulldd sswwiittcchh oonn
ssuuddddeennllyy..
DDoo nnoott ooppeenn tthhee rraaddiiaattoorr ccaapp
bbeeccaauussee tthhee ccoooolliinngg ssyysstteemm iiss
uunnddeerr pprreessssuurree..
NNeevveerr ssppiillll aannyy lliiqquuiiddss oovveerr tthhee
hhoott eennggiinnee.. TThheessee lliiqquuiiddss ccoouulldd
iiggnniittee..
AAvvooiidd ccaauussiinngg sshhoorrtt cciirrccuuiittss iinn
tthhee eelleeccttrriiccaall ssyysstteemm ppaarrttiiccuullaarrllyy
aatt tthhee bbaatttteerryy..
IIff tteessttss hhaavvee ttoo bbee ccaarrrriieedd oouutt
wwiitthh tthhee eennggiinnee rruunnnniinngg,, tthheerree iiss
aann aaddddiittiioonnaall ddaannggeerr pprreesseenntt ffrroomm
rroottaattiinngg ppaarrttss ee..gg.. VV--bbeellttss,, ggeenn--
eerraattoorr,, rraaddiiaattoorr ffaann eettcc.. aanndd ffrroomm
tthhee hhiigghh vvoollttaaggee iiggnniittiioonn ssyysstteemm..
IIff wwoorrkk oonn tthhee ffuueell oorr eelleeccttrriiccaall
ssyysstteemm iiss nneecceessssaarryy::
DDiissccoonnnneecctt tthhee bbaatttteerryy ffrroomm tthhee
vveehhiiccllee eelleeccttrriiccss
DDoo nnoott ssmmookkee
NNeevveerr wwoorrkk nneeaarr nnaakkeedd ffllaammeess
AAllwwaayyss kkeeeepp aa ffiirree eexxttiinngguuiisshheerr
iinn tthhee vviicciinniittyy..
AAtttteennttiioonn mmuusstt bbee ppaaiidd ttoo tthhee
wwaarrnniinnggss ggiivveenn iinn tthhiiss MMaannuuaall aanndd
ttoo tthhee ggeenneerraallllyy aapppplliiccaabbllee ssaaffeettyy
rreegguullaattiioonnss..
WWhheenn ttooppppiinngg uupp fflluuiiddss ddoo nnoott ccoonn--
ffuussee tthheemm wwiitthh eeaacchh ootthheerr uunnddeerr aannyy
cciirrccuummssttaanncceess,, ootthheerrwwiissee sseerriioouuss
ffuunnccttiioonnaall ddeeffeeccttss mmaayy ooccccuurr..
TThhee ggrroouunndd uunnddeerrnneeaatthh tthhee vveehhii--
ccllee sshhoouulldd bbee cchheecckkeedd rreegguullaarrllyy..
IIff ssppoottss ccaauusseedd bbyy ooiill oorr ootthheerr fflluuiiddss
ccaann bbee sseeeenn,, tthhee vveehhiiccllee sshhoouulldd bbee
ttaakkeenn ttoo aa TTeecchhnniiccaall SSeerrvviiccee CCeennttrree
ffoorr cchheecckkiinngg..
CHECKING AND REFILLING –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
3.37
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
8811 kkWW ddiieesseell eennggiinneess
Page
1 – Windscreen washer container.....3.51
2 – Coolant expansion tank..............3.42
3 – Engine oil dipstick .....................3.40
4 – Engine oil filler opening .............3.40
5 – Brake fluid reservoir...................3.45
6 – Vehicle battery...........................3.46
The layout of the components may vary
depending on the engine.
WWaarrnniinngg
PPlleeaassee ttaakkee nnoottiiccee ooff tthhee wwaarrnniinngg
nnootteess oonn tthhee pprreevviioouuss ppaaggee..
max
1
2
3
4
5
6
TO8-038
3.38
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– CHECKING AND REFILLING
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
EEnnggiinnee ooiill
SSppeecciiffiiccaattiioonnss
The engine comes with a special, high
quality, multi grade oil that can be used in
all seasons of the year except for those
regions affected by extreme cold.
As the use of high quality oil is essential
for the correct operation of the engine
and its long useful life, when topping up
or replacement is necessary use only
those oils that conform to the require-
ments of the VW standards.
If it is not possible to find oil conforming
to the VW standards then oil conforming
to the ACEA or API standards with an
appropriate viscosity at atmospheric tem-
perature should be used instead. The use
of this type of oil may have some reper-
cussions on the performance of the
engine for example, long starting time,
increased consumption and a higher
emission level.
If a top up is required then different oils
may be mixed as long as they all conform
to the VW standards.
The specifications (VW standards) set out
in the following page should appear on
the container of the service oil; the con-
tainer will display together the different
standards for petrol and diesel engines,
the oil can be used for both types of
engines.
OOiill pprrooppeerrttiieess
VViissccoossiittyy
The viscosity class is selected according
to the diagram above. If atmospheric tem-
perature falls outside of the described
limits for only a short period then an oil
change is not necessary.
B1H-149
CHECKING AND REFILLING ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
3.39
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
MMoonnoo--ggrraaddee ooiill
Mono-grade oils cannot be used through-
out the whole year due to their limited
range of viscosity
2)
.
These oils are only useful in a climate that
is constantly very cold or very warm.
EEnnggiinnee ooiill aaddddiittiivveess
No type of additive should be mixed with
the engine oil. The deterioration caused
by these additives is not covered by the
guarantee.
NNoottee
BBeeffoorree aa lloonngg ttrriipp,, wwee rreeccoommmmeenndd
ffiinnddiinngg aann eennggiinnee ooiill tthhaatt ccoonnffoorrmmss ttoo
tthhee ccoorrrreessppoonnddiinngg VVWW ssppeecciiffiiccaattiioonnss
aanndd kkeeeeppiinngg iitt iinn tthhee vveehhiiccllee.. IInn tthhiiss
wwaayy tthhee rreeqquuiirreedd ooiill wwiillll bbee aavvaaiillaabbllee
iiff nneeeeddeedd..
1)
Diesel engines that have
ffuueell iinnjjeeccttiioonn bbaasseedd
oonn aa ffuueell iinnjjeeccttoorr ppuummpp
should use
oonnllyy
oil
specification
VVWW 550055 0011.. AAvvooiidd tthhee uussee ooff
aannyy ootthheerr ooiill ttyyppee tthhaann VVWW 550055 0011 ffoorr tthhiiss
eennggiinnee.. WWaarrnniinngg!! PPoossssiibbllee eennggiinnee ddaamm--
aaggee!!
2)
Viscosity: Oil density
DDeennoommiinnaattiioonn SSppeecciiffiiccaattiioonn CCoommmmeennttss
A – synthetic oil VW 502 00 VW 500 00 Dated after 1-97
B – mineral oil VW 501 01 Dated after 1-97
A/B – multi-grade oil ACEA A2 or A3 or even Dated after 1-97
API SH/SJ
PPeettrrooll eennggiinnee
DDeennoommiinnaattiioonn SSppeecciiffiiccaattiioonn CCoommmmeennttss
A – synthetic oil VW 505 01
1)
Dated after 1-97
B – mineral oil VW 505 00 Dated after 1-97
A/B – multi-grade oil ACEA B2 or B3 or even Dated after 1-97
API CD/CF
DDiieesseell eennggiinnee
3.40
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– CHECKING AND REFILLING
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
CChheecckkiinngg ooiill lleevveell
Every engine uses a certain amount of oil.
The oil consumption can be up to 1.0
litres per 1000 km. The engine oil level
must therefore be checked at regular
intervals, preferably when filling the tank
and before a long journey.
The location of the dipstick
AA
can be
determined from the illustrations on page
3.37.
The vehicle must be on a level surface
when checking the oil level. After stop-
ping engine wait a few minutes for the oil
to drain back to the sump.
Then pull the dipstick out, wipe it with a
clean cloth and insert again.
Then pull dipstick out again and check the
oil level:
a– Oil
mmuusstt
be topped up.
Afterwards it suffices when the oil level
is somewhere in area (
bb
).
b– Oil
ccaann
be topped up.
It can then happen that the oil level is
in area (
cc
).
c– Oil
mmuusstt nnoott
be topped up.
When the engine is working hard such as
in sustained high-speed motorway cruis-
ing in summer, when towing a trailer or
when climbing mountain passes, the oil
level should be kept at area (
cc
)
nnoott
aabboovvee..
TTooppppiinngg uupp eennggiinnee ooiill
Unscrew the cap from oil filler opening
BB
and pour oil in 0.5 litres at a time. Then
check level with the dipstick.
OOnn nnoo aaccccoouunntt sshhoouulldd tthhee ooiill lleevveell bbee
aabboovvee aarreeaa cc.. OOtthheerrwwiissee ooiill ccaann bbee
ddrraawwnn iinnttoo tthhee eennggiinnee vviiaa tthhee ccrraannkk--
ccaassee bbrreeaatthheerr aanndd eessccaappee iinnttoo tthhee
aattmmoosspphheerree vviiaa tthhee eexxhhaauusstt ssyysstteemm..
OOnn vveehhiicclleess ffiitttteedd wwiitthh aa ccaattaallyyttiicc ccoonn--
vveerrtteerr,, tthhee ooiill ccoouulldd bbuurrnn iinnssiiddee tthhee
ccoonnvveerrtteerr ccaauussiinngg iitt ttoo bbeeccoommee ddaamm--
aaggeedd..
WWaarrnniinngg
WWhheenn ttooppppiinngg uupp tthhee ooiill,, ddoo nnoott
ssppiillll iitt oonnttoo hhoott eennggiinnee ccoommppoo--
nneennttss ddaannggeerr ooff ffiirree..
Carefully close the filler cap and push the
oil dipstick in as far as possible, this will
prevent oil spill when the engine is run-
ning.
A
B
c
b
a
TO8-038A
CHECKING AND REFILLING –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
3.41
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
CChhaannggiinngg eennggiinnee ooiill
TThhee eennggiinnee ooiill mmuusstt bbee cchhaannggeedd aatt
tthhee iinntteerrvvaallss ggiivveenn iinn tthhee IInnssppeeccttiioonn
aanndd MMaaiinntteennaannccee PPllaann.. WWee tthheerreeffoorree
rreeccoommmmeenndd tthhaatt tthhee ooiill cchhaannggee bbee
ddoonnee bbyy aa TTeecchhnniiccaall SSeerrvviiccee CCeennttrree..
WWaarrnniinngg
IIff yyoouu wwaanntt ttoo cchhaannggee tthhee eennggiinnee
ooiill yyoouurrsseellff,, yyoouu mmuusstt nnoottee tthhee ffooll--
lloowwiinngg ppooiinnttss::
AAllllooww tthhee eennggiinnee ttoo ccooooll ddoowwnn
ffiirrsstt ttoo aavvooiidd tthhee ddaannggeerr ooff bbeeiinngg
ssccaallddeedd bbyy hhoott eennggiinnee ooiill..
UUssee aann aapppprroopprriiaattee ccoonnttaaiinneerr ttoo
ddrraaiinn ooffff tthhee ooiill.. IItt sshhoouulldd bbee bbiigg
eennoouugghh ttoo hhoolldd tthhee qquuaannttiittyy ooff ooiill
iinn yyoouurr eennggiinnee..
WWeeaarr pprrootteeccttiivvee ggllaasssseess ffoorr yyoouurr
eeyyeess..
WWhheenn rreemmoovviinngg tthhee ooiill ddrraaiinn
pplluugg wwiitthh yyoouurr ffiinnggeerrss,, kkeeeepp yyoouurr
aarrmm hhoorriizzoonnttaall ssoo tthhaatt tthhee ooiill
bbeeiinngg ddrraaiinneedd ccaannnnoott rruunn ddoowwnn
yyoouurr aarrmm..
IIff yyoouurr hhaannddss ccoommee iinnttoo ccoonnttaacctt
wwiitthh eennggiinnee ooiill yyoouu mmuusstt wwaasshh
tthheemm tthhoorroouugghhllyy aafftteerrwwaarrddss..
OOlldd ooiill mmuusstt bbee ssttoorreedd oouutt ooff
rreeaacchh ooff cchhiillddrreenn uunnttiill iitt iiss ddiiss--
ppoosseedd ooff iinn tthhee ccoorrrreecctt mmaannnneerr..
OOnn nnoo aaccccoouunntt sshhoouulldd ooiill bbee
ppoouurreedd ddoowwnn ddrraaiinnss oorr iinnttoo tthhee
eeaarrtthh..
BBeeccaauussee ooff tthhee ddiissppoossaall pprroobblleemmss,,
tthhee nneecceessssaarryy ssppeecciiaall ttoooollss aanndd ssppee--
cciiaalliisseedd kknnoowwlleeddggee rreeqquuiirreedd,, tthhee
eennggiinnee ooiill aanndd ffiilltteerr cchhaannggiinngg sshhoouulldd
pprreeffeerraabbllyy bbee ddoonnee bbyy aa TTeecchhnniiccaall
SSeerrvviiccee CCeennttrree..
EEnnggiinnee ooiill aaddddiittiivveess
NNoo aaddddiittiivveess sshhoouulldd bbee mmiixxeedd wwiitthh
tthhee eennggiinnee ooiill..
3.42
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– CHECKING AND REFILLING
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
CCoooolliinngg ssyysstteemm
The cooling system is filled at the factory
with a permanent coolant which is not
changed.
The coolant consists of water and a 40%
concentration of our coolant additive
GG1122++
(glycol-based anti-freeze with anti-
corrosion additives). This mixture not only
gives the necessary frost protection down
to –25 °C but also protects the alloy parts
in the cooling system against corrosion.
In addition it prevents scaling and signifi-
cantly raises the boiling point of the
coolant.
The concentration of the coolant therefore
must not be reduced in the summer or in
warm countries, by topping up with plain
water.
TThhee ccoooollaanntt aaddddiittiivvee pprrooppoorrttiioonn
mmuusstt bbee aatt lleeaasstt 4400%%..
If greater protection against frost is
required, the proportion of
GG1122++
additive
can be increased, but
oonnllyy uupp ttoo 6600%%
(frost protection to approx. –40 °C), oth-
erwise the anti-freeze protection is
reduced and furthermore the cooling
effect is impaired.
Vehicles for export to cold countries (e.g.
Sweden, Norway, Finland) usually have
frost protection down to –35 °C (50%
GG1122++
) approximately.
OOtthheerr aaddddiittiivveess ccaann bbee vveerryy ddeettrriimmeenn--
ttaall ttoo tthhee aannttii--ccoorrrroossiioonn eeffffeecctt iinn ppaarr--
ttiiccuullaarr..
TThhee ssuubbsseeqquueenntt ccoorrrroossiioonn ddaammaaggee
ccaann lleeaadd ttoo ccoooollaanntt lloossss rreessuullttiinngg iinn
mmaajjoorr eennggiinnee ddaammaaggee..
NNoottee
OOnnllyy oouurr GG1122++ ((ppuurrppllee ccoolloouurr)) sshhoouulldd
bbee uusseedd aass aann aannttiiffrreeeezzee aaddddiittiivvee..
OObbsseerrvvee tthhee nnoottiiccee oonn tthhee ccoonnttaaiinneerr..
TThhee ccoooolliinngg lliiqquuiidd mmaayy bbee ppuurrcchhaasseedd
iinn TTeecchhnniiccaall SSeerrvviicceess..
TThhee aannttiiffrreeeezzee aaddddiittiivvee GG1122++ ccaann bbee
mmiixxeedd wwiitthh ootthheerr aaddddiittiivveess ((GG1111 aanndd
GG1122))..
TThhee aaddddiittiivvee GG1122 ((rreedd ccoolloouurr))
sshhoouulldd nneevveerr bbee mmiixxeedd wwiitthh GG1111..
CHECKING AND REFILLING –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
3.43
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
CChheecckkiinngg ccoooollaanntt lleevveell
WWaarrnniinngg
NNeevveerr ooppeenn tthhee bboonnnneett iiff yyoouu ccaann
sseeee sstteeaamm oorr ccoooollaanntt lleeaavviinngg tthhee
eennggiinnee ccoommppaarrttmmeenntt RRiisskk ooff
ssccaallddiinngg!! WWaaiitt uunnttiill nnoo mmoorree sstteeaamm
oorr ccoooollaanntt ccaann bbee sseeeenn..
The level can only be checked properly
when the engine is not running.
The coolant level must be between the
mmaaxx
and
mmiinn
marks on the expansion
tank when engine is cold and can be
slightly above the
mmaaxx
mark when it is
warm.
CCoooollaanntt lloosssseess
Coolant loss normally indicates leaks in
the system. In this case the cooling sys-
tem should be checked by a Technical
Service Centre without delay. It is not suf-
ficient merely to add coolant.
In a sealed system losses can only occur if
the boiling point of the coolant is
exceeded as a result of overheating, and
coolant is forced out of the system.
TTooppppiinngg uupp ccoooollaanntt
Switch engine off and let it cool down.
Then cover expansion tank cap with a
cloth and turn cap carefully anti-clockwise
and remove.
WWaarrnniinngg
DDoo nnoott rreemmoovvee eexxppaannssiioonn ttaannkk ccaapp
wwhheenn eennggiinnee iiss hhoott ddaannggeerr ooff
ssccaallddiinngg::
SSyysstteemm iiss uunnddeerr pprreessssuurree..
No other coolant may be used if
GG1122++
is
not available. In this case only water can
be used and the correct mixture concen-
tration must be restored with the speci-
fied coolant additive (see previous page)
as soon as possible.
PPlleeaassee aallssoo rreeffeerr ttoo tthhee ffuurrtthheerr nnootteess
oonn tthhee nneexxtt ppaaggee..
B8L-072
3.44
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– CHECKING AND REFILLING
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
RRaaddiiaattoorr ffaann
If a lot of coolant has been lost, only add
cold coolant after the engine has cooled
down. This will prevent engine damage.
DDoo nnoott ffiillll aabboovvee tthhee mmaaxx mmaarrkk..
The excess coolant will be forced out
through the pressure relief valve in the
cap when engine becomes hot.
SSccrreeww ccaapp oonn aaggaaiinn ttiigghhttllyy..
WWaarrnniinngg
TThhee ccoooollaanntt aaddddiittiivvee aanndd tthhee
ccoooollaanntt aarree aa ddaannggeerr ttoo hheeaalltthh.. TThhee
aaddddiittiivvee mmuusstt tthheerreeffoorree oonnllyy bbee
ssttoorreedd iinn tthhee oorriiggiinnaall ccoonnttaaiinneerr
wweellll oouutt ooff rreeaacchh ooff cchhiillddrreenn.. IIff tthhee
ccoooollaanntt hhaass ttoo bbee ddrraaiinneedd aatt aannyy
ttiimmee iitt mmuusstt bbee ccaauugghhtt aanndd aallssoo
ssttoorreedd iinn aa ssaaffee ppllaaccee..
DDrraaiinneedd ccoooollaanntt sshhoouulldd nnoott nnoorr--
mmaallllyy bbee rreeuusseedd,, iitt mmuusstt bbee ddiiss--
ppoosseedd ooff,, bbeeaarriinngg iinn mmiinndd eennvviirroonn--
mmeennttaall pprrootteeccttiioonn rreegguullaattiioonnss..
The radiator fan is driven electrically and
controlled by a thermoswitch from the
coolant temperature (also from the
engine compartment temperature on
some models).
WWaarrnniinngg
AAfftteerr tthhee eennggiinnee hhaass bbeeeenn ssttooppppeedd
tthhee ffaann ccaann ccoonnttiinnuuee rruunnnniinngg ffoorr aa
wwhhiillee eevveenn wwiitthh tthhee eennggiinnee
sswwiittcchheedd ooffff ((uupp ttoo aabboouutt 1100 mmiinn--
uutteess)).. IItt ccaann aallssoo ssttaarrtt ttoo rruunn aaggaaiinn
ssuuddddeennllyy aafftteerr aa sshhoorrtt ttiimmee iiff
tthhee ccoooollaanntt tteemmppeerraattuurree iinnccrreeaa--
sseess dduuee ttoo hheeaatt bbuuiilldd uupp
wwhheenn tthhee eennggiinnee iiss hhoott aanndd tthhee
eennggiinnee ccoommppaarrttmmeenntt iiss hheeaatteedd
aaddddiittiioonnaallllyy bbyy ssttrroonngg ssuunnlliigghhtt..
SSppeecciiaall ccaarree mmuusstt tthheerreeffoorree bbee
ttaakkeenn wwhheenn wwoorrkkiinngg iinn tthhee eennggiinnee
ccoommppaarrttmmeenntt..
CHECKING AND REFILLING –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
3.45
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
BBrraakkee fflluuiidd
The brake fluid reservoir is on the left
hand side of the engine compartment.
On vehicles with ABS* the reservoir is in
the same place but its design is different.
NNoottee
On vehicles with right-hand drive the
reservoir is on the other side of the
engine compartment.
CChheecckkiinngg fflluuiidd lleevveell
The fluid level must always be between
the “
MMAAXX
” and “
MMIINN
” marks to ensure
perfect operation.
The level of fluid tends to sink slightly
when the vehicle is used due to the auto-
matic adjustment of brake linings. This is
quite normal.
If the level were to drop rapidly or below
the minimum mark
MMIINN
the brake system
may be leaking. The corresponding pilot
light lights up if the level is too low (see
“Warning lamps” chapter).
GGoo ttoo aa
TTeecchhnniiccaall SSeerrvviiccee CCeennttrree iimmmmeeddiiaatteellyy
aanndd hhaavvee tthhee bbrraakkee ssyysstteemm cchheecckkeedd..
RReenneewwiinngg tthhee bbrraakkee fflluuiidd
Brake fluid absorbs moisture. In the
course of time it takes in water from the
atmosphere. Too high a content of water
in the brake fluid system can cause corro-
sion damage. Furthermore the boiling
point of the brake fluid is reduced consid-
erably.
FFoorr tthhiiss rreeaassoonn tthhee bbrraakkee fflluuiidd
mmuusstt bbee rreenneewweedd eevveerryy ttwwoo yyeeaarrss..
WWaarrnniinngg
WWhheenn tthhee bbrraakkee fflluuiidd bbeeccoommeess ttoooo
oolldd,, vvaappoouurr bbuubbbblleess ccaann ffoorrmm iinn
tthhee bbrraakkee ssyysstteemm wwhheenn tthhee bbrraakkeess
aarree uusseedd vviiggoorroouussllyy.. TThhee eeffffiicciieennccyy
ooff tthhee bbrraakkeess aanndd tthhuuss tthhee vveehhiiccllee
ssaaffeettyy aarree sseerriioouussllyy rreedduucceedd..
Only our genuine brake fluid should be
used (specification according to US FM
VSS 116 DOT 4 Standard). The fluid must
be new.
WWaarrnniinngg
BBrraakkee fflluuiidd iiss ppooiissoonnoouuss!! IItt mmuusstt
tthheerreeffoorree oonnllyy bbee ssttoorreedd iinn tthhee
cclloosseedd oorriiggiinnaall ccoonnttaaiinneerr oouutt ooff
rreeaacchh ooff cchhiillddrreenn..
RReemmeemmbbeerr aallssoo tthhaatt bbrraakkee fflluuiidd wwiillll
aattttaacckk tthhee ppaaiinnttwwoorrkk..
BBeeccaauussee ooff tthhee ddiissppoossaall pprroobb--
lleemmss,, tthhee ssppeecciiaall ttoooollss nneecceessssaarryy
aanndd tthhee ssppeecciiaalliisstt kknnoowwlleeddggee
rreeqquuiirreedd,, bbrraakkee fflluuiidd sshhoouulldd pprreeffeerr--
aabbllyy bbee cchhaannggeedd aatt aa TTeecchhnniiccaall
SSeerrvviiccee CCeennttrree..
It is advisable to have the fluid change
done during an Inspection Service.
B8L-073
3.46
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– CHECKING AND REFILLING
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
BBaatttteerryy
WWaarrnniinngg nnootteess
WWeeaarr eeyyee pprrootteeccttiioonn.. DDoo nnoott
aallllooww ppaarrttiicclleess ccoonnttaaiinniinngg
aacciidd oorr lleeaadd ttoo ccoommee iinnttoo
ccoonnttaacctt wwiitthh tthhee eeyyeess,, sskkiinn
oorr ccllootthheess..
BBaatttteerryy aacciidd iiss hhiigghhllyy ccaauuss--
ttiicc.. AAllwwaayyss wweeaarr pprrootteeccttiivvee
gglloovveess aanndd ggllaasssseess.. DDoo nnoott
ttiipp bbaatttteerryy aacciidd ccaann ssppiillll
oouutt ooff tthhee vveennttss.. SShhoouulldd aacciidd ccoommee
iinnttoo ccoonnttaacctt wwiitthh tthhee eeyyeess,, rriinnssee
ffoorr sseevveerraall mmiinnuutteess uussiinngg cclleeaann rruunn--
nniinngg wwaatteerr.. SSeeeekk mmeeddiiccaall aassssiiss--
ttaannccee iimmmmeeddiiaatteellyy.. SShhoouulldd aacciidd
ccoommee iinnttoo ccoonnttaacctt wwiitthh sskkiinn oorr
ccllootthheess,, nneeuuttrraalliissee iimmmmeeddiiaatteellyy
uussiinngg aann aallkkaalliinnee ssooaapp ssoolluuttiioonn
aanndd rriinnssee tthhrroouugghhllyy.. SShhoouulldd aacciidd
iinnaaddvveerrtteennttllyy bbee ddrruunnkk,, sseeeekk mmeedd--
iiccaall aatttteennttiioonn iimmmmeeddiiaatteellyy..
KKeeeepp wweellll cclleeaarr ooff nnaakkeedd
ffllaammee aanndd ssppaarrkkss.. DDoo nnoott
ssmmookkee.. AAvvooiidd ggeenneerraattiinngg
ssppaarrkkss wwhheenn hhaannddlliinngg
ccaabblleess aanndd eelleeccttrriiccaall ccoommppoonneennttss..
AAvvooiidd sshhoorrtt cciirrccuuiittss.. NNeevveerr sshhoorrtt
bbaatttteerryy tteerrmmiinnaallss ddaannggeerr ooff
iinnjjuurryy ffrroomm hhiigghh eenneerrggyy ssppaarrkkss..
WWhheenn bbaatttteerryy iiss bbeeiinngg
cchhaarrggeedd,, aa hhiigghhllyy eexxpplloossiivvee
mmiixxttuurree ooff ggaasssseess iiss pprroo--
dduucceedd..
KKeeeepp aacciidd aanndd bbaatttteerryy oouutt ooff
tthhee rreeaacchh ooff cchhiillddrreenn..
DDiissccoonnnneecctt ppoossiittiivvee tteerrmmiinnaall ooff
bbaatttteerryy bbeeffoorree ddooiinngg aannyy wwoorrkk oonn
tthhee eelleeccttrriiccaall ssyysstteemm.. WWhheenn
cchhaannggiinngg bbuullbbss iitt iiss ssuuffffiicciieenntt ttoo
sswwiittcchh ooffff llaammpp..
WWhheenn ddiissccoonnnneeccttiinngg tthhee bbaatttteerryy
ffrroomm tthhee vveehhiiccllee eelleeccttrriiccaall ssyysstteemm
ffiirrsstt ddiissccoonnnneecctt tthhee nneeggaattiivvee ccaabbllee
aanndd tthheenn tthhee ppoossiittiivvee ccaabbllee..
TThhee bbaatttteerryy mmuusstt nnoott bbee ddiissccoonn--
nneecctteedd wwiitthh tthhee eennggiinnee rruunnnniinngg,, aass
tthhiiss wwiillll ddaammaaggee tthhee eelleeccttrriiccaall ssyyss--
tteemm ((eelleeccttrroonniicc ccoommppoonneennttss))..
WWhheenn rreeccoonnnneeccttiinngg tthhee bbaatttteerryy,,
ffiirrsstt ccoonnnneecctt tthhee ppoossiittiivvee ccaabbllee,,
tthheenn tthhee nneeggaattiivvee.. OOnn nnoo aaccoouunntt
mmaayy tthhee ccaabbllee bbee iinntteerrcchhaannggeedd..
RRiisskk ooff ccaabblleess bbuurrnniinngg!!
DDoo nnoott ddiissccoonnnneecctt tthhee vveehhiiccllee bbaatttteerryy
wwhheenn tthhee iiggnniittiioonn iiss oonn oorr wwhheenn tthhee
eennggiinnee iiss rruunnnniinngg,, aass tthhee eelleeccttrriiccaall
ssyysstteemm ((eelleeccttrroonniicc ccoommppoonneennttss))
ccoouulldd ootthheerrwwiissee bbee ddaammaaggeedd..
IInn oorrddeerr ttoo pprrootteecctt tthhee ccaassiinngg ffrroomm UUVV
rraaddiiaattiioonn,, ddoo nnoott eexxppoossee vveehhiiccllee bbaatt--
tteerryy ttoo ddiirreecctt ssuunnlliigghhtt..
CHECKING AND REFILLING –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
3.47
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
LLooccaattiioonn
The battery is in the engine compartment.
Start with the help of another battery. See
"Emergency starting" chapter.
CChheecckkiinngg aacciidd lleevveell
Take the following warnings of the
"Engine compartment" chapter into
account before starting any type of work
on the engine or the engine compart-
ment.
The acid/electrolyte level should be
checked regularly in the following cases:
– high mileage
– in countries with a warm climate
old battery
The battery is otherwise service-free.
The acid level should always be around
the
mmaaxx..
mark on the longside of the bat-
tery. It should never be filled above the
mmaaxx..
mark nor be allowed to drop below
the
mmiinn..
mark.
It is recommended that the acid level be
checked and corrected by a Technical
Service Centre.
BBaatttteerryy wwiitthh aa mmaaggiicc eeyyee**
A round viewing window is located on the
upper side of the battery (see arrow). This
magic eye will change its color according
to the charge condition or the acid level of
the battery.
Air bubbles can distort the true color. You
should, therefore, tap carefully on the
magic eye.
If the display in the viewing window has
no color or is light yellow, the acid level in
the battery is too low. Distilled water must
be added. We recommend that the battery
be replaced if it is older than 5 years.
It is recommended that the acid level be
checked and corrected by a Technical
Service Centre.
The colour displays of green and black are
only of use to the Technical Service Centre
since it facilitates the diagnosis of the
battery.
12V 330A 61Ah DIN
ETN 561 019 054
540A EN/SAE
6EO 915 105
Betriebsanleitung beachten!
See ow
ners m
anual!
DANGER/POISON
B6E-030D
3.48
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– CHECKING AND REFILLING
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
CChhaarrggiinngg tthhee bbaatttteerryy
Before charging, switch off the engine
and all electrical consumers.
When charging with a low current (e.g.
with a small charger) the battery cables
need not normally be taken off. The
instructions from the battery charger man-
ufacturer must, however, be noted.
In order to connect the positive cable, the
cover of the fuse holder on the battery
must first be moved to the side. See page
3.50.
Before
qquuiicckk cchhaarrggiinngg
, that is charging
with a high current, both battery cables
must be disconnected.
PPlleeaassee nnoottee tthhee ffoolllloowwiinngg ppooiinnttss::
WWaarrnniinngg
KKeeeepp cchhiillddrreenn aawwaayy ffrroomm tthhee bbaatt--
tteerryy,, tthhee bbaatttteerryy aacciidd aanndd tthhee
cchhaarrggeerr..
OOnnllyy cchhaarrggee tthhee bbaatttteerryy iinn aa wweellll
vveennttiillaatteedd rroooomm.. DDoo nnoott ssmmookkee
aanndd aallllooww nnoo nnaakkeedd ffllaammeess oorr eelleecc--
ttrriicc ssppaarrkkss nneeaarr tthhee bbaatttteerryy,, aass aa
hhiigghhllyy eexxpplloossiivvee ggaass iiss pprroodduucceedd
wwhhiillsstt tthhee bbaatttteerryy iiss bbeeiinngg
cchhaarrggeedd..
PPrrootteecctt yyoouurr eeyyeess aanndd ffaaccee.. DDoo
nnoott bbeenndd oovveerr tthhee bbaatttteerryy..
SShhoouulldd aacciidd ccoommee iinnttoo ccoonnttaacctt
wwiitthh tthhee eeyyeess oorr sskkiinn,, rriinnssee ffoorr sseevv--
eerraall mmiinnuutteess uussiinngg cclleeaarr wwaatteerr..
YYoouu sshhoouulldd tthheenn sseeeekk mmeeddiiccaall
aassssiissttaannccee iimmmmeeddiiaatteellyy..
FFaasstt cchhaarrggiinngg aa bbaatttteerryy iiss ddaann--
ggeerroouuss aanndd sshhoouulldd oonnllyy bbee ddoonnee aatt
aa TTeecchhnniiccaall SSeerrvviiccee CCeennttrree,, aass ssppee--
cciiaall eeqquuiippmmeenntt aanndd sskkiillllss aarree
nneeeeddeedd..
NNeevveerr cchhaarrggee aa ffrroozzeenn bbaatttteerryy..
RRiisskk ooff eexxpplloossiioonn!! AA ffrroozzeenn bbaatttteerryy
mmuusstt bbee tthhaawweedd bbeeffoorree cchhaarrggiinngg..
WWee rreeccoommmmeenndd tthhaatt bbaatttteerriieess sshhoouulldd
nnoo lloonnggeerr bbee uusseedd aafftteerr tthhaawwiinngg,, aass
tthhee bbaatttteerryy hhoouussiinngg ccoouulldd hhaavvee sspplliitt
iinnssiiddee bbeeccaauussee ooff iiccee ffoorrmmaattiioonn,, aanndd
tthhee aacciidd mmaayy lleeaakk oouutt..
When charging the battery do not
remove caps.
The main cables of the charger should
not be connected until the clips of the
charger have been properly secured to the
battery terminals:
red........................................= positive
black, brown or blue..............= negative
After charging the battery, first switch
off the charger and disconnect the main
cables. Then disconnect the clips of the
charger from the battery.
CHECKING AND REFILLING –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
3.49
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
WWhhaatt hhaappppeennss wwhheenn tthhee bbaatttteerryy iiss
ddiissccoonnnneecctteedd aanndd tthheenn
rreeccoonnnneecctteedd ......
After
rreeccoonnnneeccttiinngg
the battery to the
onboard electronics, you should reset the
digital clock.
The automatic opening and closing func-
tion of the electric windows should also
be reactivated.
RReemmoovviinngg tthhee bbaatttteerryy
Before removing the battery turn off the
ignition and all electrical consumers.
Press both spring clips in the direction
of the arrow
11
and fold the cover of the
fuse holder to the side (arrow
22
).
PPlleeaassee aallssoo rreeffeerr ttoo tthhee ffuurrtthheerr nnootteess
oonn tthhee nneexxtt ppaaggee..
1
1
2
B1J-081D
3.50
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– CHECKING AND REFILLING
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
Then remove the negative cable
AA
(nor-
mally black, brown or blue).
Then slightly loosen the nut
BB
on the
positive terminal.
First unclip the front retainer (arrow
11
)
and then the rear retainer (arrow
22
) from
the battery. To do this you must press the
retainers away from the battery.
The fuse holder with the positive cable
can now be removed upwards from the
battery and placed to the side.
Then unscrew the battery bracket
CC
and
remove the battery.
RReenneewwiinngg tthhee bbaatttteerryy
Our batteries have been developed to suit
their fitting location. If the battery has to
be renewed, the new battery must have
the same voltage (12 Volts), shape and
safety features such as central degassing
and the plugs must be sealed with an
O-ring.
New output and capacity should be the
same as the old battery. Technical Service
Centres have a range of suitable batteries.
BBeeccaauussee ooff tthhee pprroobblleemm ooff ddiiss--
ppoossiinngg ooff tthhee oolldd bbaatttteerryy,, tthhee
rreenneewwaall sshhoouulldd pprreeffeerraabbllyy ddoonnee aatt aa
TTeecchhnniiccaall SSeerrvviiccee CCeennttrree.. BBaatttteerriieess
ccoonnttaaiinn,, aammoonnggsstt ootthheerr tthhiinnggss,, ssuull--
pphhuurriicc aacciidd aanndd lleeaadd aanndd mmuusstt oonn nnoo
aaccccoouunntt bbee ppuutt wwiitthh nnoorrmmaall hhoouussee--
hhoolldd wwaassttee..
IInnssttaalllliinngg tthhee bbaatttteerryy
Switch off the ignition and all electrical
consumers before installing the battery.
Place the battery in the designated
installation location. Please ensure that
the bracket lug
CC
lines up again with the
same depth of the clamping strip. Then
secure the battery.
Place the fuse holder together with the
positive cable on the battery so that the
retainers on the sides of the battery
engage.
Then tighten the nut
BB
on the positive
terminal.
Then connect the negative cable
AA
to
the battery.
Fold the cover of the fuse holder back
and allow both of the spring clips to
engage.
B1J-082D
CHECKING AND REFILLING –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
3.51
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
WWiinnddssccrreeeenn wwaasshheerr
The fluid container is on the right of the
engine compartment. The container holds
about 3 litres: on vehicles with a head-
light washer system* it holds about
5.5 litres.
FFiilllliinngg tthhee ccoonnttaaiinneerr
You need to add a window cleaning solu-
tion with a wax remover to the water.
There are several
aapppprroopprriiaattee pprroodduuccttss,,
ccoonnttaaiinniinngg iissoopprrooppiilliicc aallccoohhooll oorr
mmeetthhyyllaatteedd ssppiirriittss
with wax dissolving
properties (with anti-freeze additive in
winter) on the market, because plain
water is not usually sufficient to clean the
glass and headlight lenses quickly and
thoroughly. The mixing ratios on the win-
dow cleaner packaging must be adhered
to.
Even when
hheeaatteedd wwiinnddssccrreeeenn wwaasshheerr
jjeettss
* are fitted, a window cleaning solu-
tion containing anti-freeze should be
added to the water in the winter.
NNoottee
To avoid a possible error by the fluid level
sensor,
tthhee pprrooppoorrttiioonn ooff aallccoohhooll aanndd
wwaatteerr sshhoouulldd bbee 3355%% aallccoohhooll aanndd
6655%% wwaatteerr aapppprrooxxiimmaatteellyy..
FFoorr aaddddiittiioonnaall aassssiissttaannccee ggoo ttoo aa
TTeecchhnniiccaall SSeerrvviiccee CCeennttrree..
UUnnddeerr nnoo cciirrccuummssttaanncceess sshhoouulldd yyoouu
aadddd ccoooollaanntt aannttii--ffrreeeezzee oorr ootthheerr aaddddii--
ttiivveess..
AAddjjuussttiinngg wwaasshheerr jjeettss
The jet for the rear window washer is in
the wiper shaft. The water jet should hit
the glass in the centre of the wiped area.
The jets for the headlight washer system*
can only be adjusted with a special tool.
When adjustment is necessary, contact a
Technical Service Centre.
B8L-075 TO8-039
3.52
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– SERVICING AND REPLACING
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
AAcccceessssoorriieess,, mmooddiiffiiccaattiioonnss aanndd rreeppllaacceemmeenntt ooff ppaarrttss
YYoouurr vveehhiiccllee iiss bbuuiilltt iinn aaccccoorrddaannccee
wwiitthh tthhee mmoosstt mmooddeerrnn pprriinncciipplleess ooff
ssaaffeettyy tteecchhnnoollooggyy aanndd ooffffeerrss tthheerree--
ffoorree aa hhiigghh ddeeggrreeee ooff aaccttiivvee aanndd
ppaassssiivvee ssaaffeettyy.. TToo eennssuurree tthhaatt tthhiiss
rreemmaaiinnss ssoo tthhee vveehhiiccllee aass ssuupppplliieedd bbyy
tthhee ffaaccttoorryy mmaayy nnoott bbee mmooddiiffiieedd wwiitthh--
oouutt ccaarreeffuull tthhoouugghhtt.. TThhee ffoolllloowwiinngg
ppooiinnttss mmuusstt bbee nnootteedd iiff tthhee vveehhiiccllee iiss
ttoo bbee ssuubbsseeqquueennttllyy ffiitttteedd wwiitthh aacccceess--
ssoorriieess,, tteecchhnniiccaallllyy mmooddiiffiieedd oorr hhaavvee
ppaarrttss rreenneewweedd llaatteerr oonn::
Always consult a Technical Service
Centre
bbeeffoorree
purchasing accessories and
bbeeffoorree
any modifications are carried out.
Approved accessories and original SEAT
spare parts may be obtained through the
Technical Services who will also, natu-
rally, carry out the corresponding assem-
bly in the required conditions.
Appliances which have been retro–fit-
ted and have a direct influence on the dri-
ver’s control of the vehicle e.g. cruise con-
trol system or electronically controlled
shock absorber systems must have the
ee
1)
symbol and be authorised for that vehi-
cle.
Additionally connected electric con-
sumers e.g. refrigerators, horns, fans etc.
which are not directly linked to the control
of the vehicle must carry the
CCEE
symbol
2)
.
1)
ee
– European Community authorisation sym-
bol.
2)
CCEE
– Manufacturer conformity declaration in
the European Community.
WWaarrnniinngg
WWee iinnffoorrmm yyoouu tthhaatt eexxpprreessssllyy
aapppprroovveedd SSEEAATT
33))
aacccceessssoorriieess aanndd
GGeennuuiinnee SSEEAATT ppaarrttss aarree aavvaaiillaabbllee
ffoorr yyoouurr vveehhiiccllee.. TThhee rreelliiaabbiilliittyy,,
ssaaffeettyy aanndd ssuuiittaabbiilliittyy ooff tthhoossee ppaarrttss
aanndd aacccceessssoorriieess hhaavvee bbeeeenn eessppee--
cciiaallllyy aaddaapptteedd ffoorr yyoouurr vveehhiiccllee..
DDeessppiittee ccoonnttiinnuuoouuss mmaarrkkeett
oobbsseerrvvaattiioonn wwee ccaannnnoott aasssseessss oorr
aacccceepptt rreessppoonnssiibbiilliittyy ffoorr ootthheerr
pprroodduuccttss,, eevveenn iinn ccaasseess wwhheerree aann
ooffffiicciiaallllyy rreeccooggnniisseedd ppeerrmmiitt hhaass
bbeeeenn iissssuueedd..
AAcccceessssoorriieess ssuucchh aass tteelleepphhoonnee
rreettaaiinneerrss oorr ddrriinnkkss hhoollddeerrss mmuusstt
nneevveerr bbee aattttaacchheedd ttoo tthhee AAiirr BBaagg
ccoovveerrss oorr wwiitthhiinn tthheeiirr aarreeaa ooff eeffffeecc--
ttiivveenneessss.. TThheeyy ccoouulldd ccaauussee iinnjjuurryy
iiff tthhee AAiirr BBaagg iiss aaccttiivvaatteedd dduurriinngg
aann aacccciiddeenntt!!
If technical modifications are to be
made, our guidelines must be observed.
This is to ensure that no damage occurs to
the vehicle, the traffic and operating
safety is retained and that the modifica-
tions are permissible.
3)
Not available in all countries.
SERVICING AND REPLACING –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
3.53
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
SSppaarrkk pplluuggss
The spark plugs are renewed during the
SEAT Inspection Service.
If the spark plugs have to be renewed
between the Inspection Services, the fol-
lowing should be noted:
Spark plugs and ignition system are
matched to the engine and as such con-
tribute to reducing the levels of exhaust
pollutants. To avoid faulty operation,
engine damage and even the withdrawal
of the type approval due to excessive
emissions values or non-suppressed
spark plugs, only the Genuine spark plugs
for the engine concerned should be used.
Important, among other things, are the
number of electrodes, the heat value and
if necessary the radio suppression.
The plugs may be, for technical rea-
sons, modified at short notice.
3.54
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– SERVICING AND REPLACING
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
DDuusstt aanndd ppoolllleenn ffiilltteerr**
The dust and pollen filter for the heating
and ventilation system can be found
under the cover on the right in the plenum
chamber.
TThhee ffiilltteerr sshhoouulldd bbee cchhaannggeedd
iinn aaccccoorrddaannccee wwiitthh tthhee ddeettaaiillss ggiivveenn
iinn tthhee IInnssppeeccttiioonn aanndd SSeerrvviiccee sscchheedd--
uullee.. IIff tthhee aaiirr tthhrroouugghhppuutt rreedduucceess ccoonn--
ssiiddeerraabbllyy,, tthhee ffiilltteerr sshhoouulldd bbee
cchhaannggeedd eeaarrlliieerr::
RReemmoovviinngg ffiilltteerr
Pull up the rubber seal
AA
of the plenum
chamber to the middle.
CCaarreeffuullllyy
unscrew all screws
BB
com-
pletely and pull the cover off to the front.
Because of their shape they will remain
suspended in the cover. Pull the cover
outwards.
Push back spring clips
CC
in the direc-
tion of the arrow and remove the filter
insert.
A
B
TO8-040
C
B1J-034
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
SERVICING AND REPLACING –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
3.55
IInnssttaalllliinngg ffiilltteerr
For greater clarity, the illustration shows
the dust and pollen filter already disman-
tled.
Push the filter into the recesses of the fil-
ter unit with the lugs
DD
first.
Then press the filter down at the front
until the spring clips
CC
engage on the lugs
EE
.
Screw the cover on tightly and press the
rubber seal
AA
onto the plenum chamber.
D D
D
E
E
B11-060D
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
3.56
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– IF AND WHEN
FFiirrsstt aaiidd kkiitt,, wwaarrnniinngg ttrriiaannggllee
In some countries a luminous hazard
warning triangle must be carried in the
vehicle to be used in an emergency, as
well as a first aid kit and spare bulbs.
The first aid kit can be stored in the spare
wheel recess. The warning triangle can be
placed at the rear of the boot using rubber
bands.
NNoottee
The first aid kit and warning triangle are
nnoott
delivered with the vehicle as standard
fittings.
RReeccoommmmeennddaattiioonnss
TThhee ffiirrsstt aaiidd kkiitt aanndd wwaarrnniinngg ttrriiaann--
ggllee mmuusstt ffuullffiill lleeggaall rreeqquuiirreemmeennttss..
YYoouu sshhoouulldd bbeeaarr iinn mmiinndd tthhee uussee--bbyy
ddaatteess ooff tthhee ccoonntteennttss ooff tthhee ffiirrsstt aaiidd
kkiitt..
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
IF AND WHEN –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
3.57
OOnn bbooaarrdd ttoooollss,, ssppaarree wwhheeeell
TTooooll hhoouussiinngg
The tools and the spare wheel are stored
in the housing under the boot floor cover-
ing.
In order to have both hands free to lift out
the spare wheel and the on board tools,
the floor mat can be hooked to the lower
part of the rear shelf.
The tools are located in a polystyrene
retainer, inside the spare wheel recess
secured with a rubber strap.
WWaarrnniinngg
EEnnssuurree tthhaatt tthhee vveehhiiccllee ttoooollss aanndd
ssppaarree wwhheeeell aarree ssttoowweedd sseeccuurreellyy
ttoo aavvooiidd iinnjjuurriieess ffoorr tthhee ppaasssseennggeerr
iinn ccaassee ooff aa ccoolllliissiioonn oorr ssuuddddeenn
bbrraakkiinngg..
LEO-030
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
3.58
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– IF AND WHEN
VVeehhiiccllee ttoooollss // jjaacckk
WWaarrnniinngg
TThhee jjaacckk ssuupppplliieedd bbyy tthhee ffaaccttoorryy
iiss oonnllyy ddeessiiggnneedd ffoorr yyoouurr vveehhiiccllee
mmooddeell.. OOnn nnoo aaccccoouunntt sshhoouulldd
hheeaavviieerr vveehhiicclleess oorr ootthheerr llooaaddss bbee
lliifftteedd!!
WWiitthh tthhee vveehhiiccllee lliifftteedd,, nneevveerr
ssttaarrtt tthhee eennggiinnee ddaannggeerr ooff aaccccii--
ddeenntt..
IIff wwoorrkk hhaass ttoo bbee ddoonnee uunnddeerr--
nneeaatthh tthhee vveehhiiccllee,, eennssuurree tthhaatt iitt iiss
ssuuppppoorrtteedd oonn ssuuiittaabbllee ssttaannddss..
VVeehhiicclleess mmaayy aallssoo hhaavvee::
1 – Screwdriver with box spanner in han-
dle for the wheel bolts. The screw-
driver blade is reversible.
2 – Open jaw spanner 10 x 13
3 – Jack
Before the jack is placed back into the
tool box, the claw must be fully
wound back. The crank is then ten-
sioned against the side of the jack.
4 – Wire hook* for wheel trims
5 – Wheel bolt spanner
6 – Front towing ring
NNoottee
Never use the box spanner in the handle
of the screwdriver to loosen or tighten
wheel bolts.
3
2
1
4 5
6
IB9-086
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
IF AND WHEN –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
3.59
SSppaarree wwhheeeell//RReedduucceedd SSppaaccee SSppaarree
WWhheeeell** ((FFoouurr--wwhheeeell ddrriivvee vveehhiicclleess))
The wheel is located in the well under the
floor covering in the boot, secured with a
plastic nut.
If the wheel has been replaced, secure it
with the plastic nut.
Four-wheel drive vehicles are equipped
with a reduced space spare wheel
1)
which
not only takes up less space than the nor-
mal spare wheel in the boot, but also
weighs substantially less.
RReemmoovviinngg tthhee ssppaarree wwhheeeell
Attach the floor mat to the lower part of
the boot cover.
Loosen the retaining strap and remove
the polystyrene retainer.
Then turn the hand wheel in an anti-clock-
wise direction and remove it.
1)
In some countries and in the case of some
model versions, a normal spare wheel may be
provided instead. When using this wheel, fol-
low the instructions on pages 3.66 to 3.72.
SSeeccuurriinngg tthhee ssppaarree wwhheeeell
Place the defective wheel in the hous-
ing and secure with the nut.
Feed the retaining strap through the
holes in the rim – see illustration.
Turn the handwheel in a clockwise
direction until the wheel is properly
secured.
Place the polystyrene retainer in the
recess and secure it with the retaining
strap.
Remove the floor mat from the luggage
compartment cover and replace on the
floor of the luggage compartment.
WWaarrnniinngg
EEnnssuurree tthhaatt tthhee ssppaarree wwhheeeell,, ttooww--
iinngg ddeevviiccee** aanndd oonn bbooaarrdd ttoooollss aarree
pprrooppeerrllyy sseeccuurreedd,, ssoo tthhaatt tthheeyy ccaann--
nnoott iinnjjuurree vveehhiiccllee ooccccuuppaannttss iiff yyoouu
hhaavvee ttoo bbrraakkee ssuuddddeennllyy oorr hhaavvee aann
aacccciiddeenntt..
B1J-054D B1J-055D
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
3.60
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– IF AND WHEN
WWhheeeellss
GGeenneerraall nnootteess
New tyres do not give maximum grip
straight away and should therefore be run
in at moderate speeds and a careful style
of driving for about the first 100 km. This
will help to make the tyres last longer.
The tread depth of new tyres can vary
due to construction and design features,
and depending on version and manufac-
tures.
Check tyres for damage from time to
time (cuts, splits, cracks and lumps) and
remove any foreign bodies embedded in
the treads.
To avoid damage to tyres and wheels
drive over curbs and similar obstacles
very slowly and as nearly at right angles
as possible.
WWaarrnniinngg
DDaammaaggee ttoo wwhheeeellss aanndd ttyyrreess iiss nnoott
aallwwaayyss eeaassyy ttoo sseeee.. UUnnuussuuaall vviibbrraa--
ttiioonnss oorr aa ppuulllliinngg ttoo oonnee ssiiddee ccoouulldd
iinnddiiccaattee ttyyrree ddaammaaggee.. IIff yyoouu ssuuss--
ppeecctt ddaammaaggee ttoo aa ttyyrree,, yyoouu sshhoouulldd
iimmmmeeddiiaatteellyy rreedduuccee ssppeeeedd.. CChheecckk
aallll ttyyrreess vviissuuaallllyy ffoorr ddaammaaggee
((bbuullggeess,, tteeaarrss eettcc..)).. IIff nnoo eexxtteerrnnaall
ddaammaaggee ccaann bbee sseeeenn,, ddrriivvee ccaarree--
ffuullllyy ttoo tthhee nneeaarreesstt TTeecchhnniiccaall
SSeerrvviiccee CCeennttrree aanndd hhaavvee tthhee vveehhii--
ccllee cchheecckkeedd oovveerr..
Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.
Replace missing dust caps as soon as
possible.
Mark wheels before taking them off so
that they rotate in the same direction
when put back on again.
When taken off, the tyres should be
stored in a cool, dry and preferably dark
place.
Tyres which are not on wheels should be
stored in a vertical position.
NNoottee ffoorr ttyyrreess wwhheerree tthhee ddiirreeccttiioonn ooff
rroottaattiioonn iiss ssttiippuullaatteedd
It is imperative that the designated direc-
tion of rotation for tyre treads (which can
be determined from the arrow on the side
of the tyre) be kept to. The best tyre per-
formance i.e. in aquaplaning, road adhe-
sion, noise and wear is then guaranteed.
TTyyrree lliiffee
Tyre life depends to a considerable extent
on the following factors:
IInnffllaattiioonn pprreessssuurree
The inflation pressures are to be found
inside the fuel lid.
The inflation pressure is very important
particularly at high speeds. Therefore, the
pressures should be checked at least once
a month and before every long journey.
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
IF AND WHEN –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
3.61
At this opportunity do not forget the spare
wheel:
The spare wheel with normal tyre
should always be inflated to the highest
pressure required on the vehicle.
Always check the pressures when the
tyres are cold. When warm, the pressure is
higher but do not reduce. If the load
changes a great deal the pressure must
be altered to suit.
On vehicles with wheel hub caps, valve
extensions are fitted. It is not necessary to
remove the valve extension piece in order
to test and correct the inflation pressure.
PPrreessssuurreess wwhhiicchh aarree ttoooo hhiigghh oorr ttoooo
llooww sshhoorrtteenn ttyyrree lliiffee qquuiittee aappaarrtt
ffrroomm tthhee ddeettrriimmeennttaall iinnfflluueennccee oonn
vveehhiiccllee hhaannddlliinngg..
WWaarrnniinngg
AAtt ccoonnttiinnuuoouuss hhiigghh ssppeeeeddss aa ttyyrree
iinn wwhhiicchh tthhee pprreessssuurree iiss ttoooo llooww
fflleexxeess mmoorree aanndd hheeaattss uupp eexxcceess--
ssiivveellyy.. TThhiiss ccaann ccaauussee ttrreeaadd sseeppaa--
rraattiioonn aanndd ttyyrree bbllooww oouutt..
AA pprreessssuurree wwhhiicchh iiss ttoooo llooww
iinnccrreeaasseess tthhee ffuueell ccoonnssuummppttiioonn
aanndd tthhiiss bbuurrddeennss tthhee eennvviirroonnmmeenntt
uunnnneecceessssaarriillyy..
MMooddee ooff ddrriivviinngg
Fast cornering, hard acceleration and vio-
lent braking also increase tyre wear.
BBaallaanncciinngg wwhheeeellss
The wheels on new vehicles are balanced.
However when the vehicle is running vari-
ous influences can cause the wheels to
become unbalanced and this causes
steering vibration.
As imbalance also increases steering,
suspension and tyre wear the wheels
should be balanced again. Furthermore a
wheel should always be rebalanced when
the tyre has been repaired or when a new
tyre has been fitted.
IInnccoorrrreecctt wwhheeeell aalliiggnnmmeenntt
Incorrect wheel alignment not only causes
excessive, usually uneven tyre wear, but
can also impair the car ’s safe handling. If
unusual tyre wear is noticed, contact a
Technical Service Centre.
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
3.62
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– IF AND WHEN
WWeeaarr iinnddiiccaattoorrss
At the bottom of the tread of the original
tyres there are 1.6 mm high “wear indica-
tors” running across the tread see fig.
There are 6-8 of these indicators accord-
ing to make evenly spaced around the
tyre circumference. Marks on the walls of
the tyre (for example the letters “TWI” or
triangles) show the locations of the wear
indicators.
WWaarrnniinngg
TThhee ttyyrreess mmuusstt bbee rreenneewweedd wwhheenn
tthheeyy aarree wwoorrnn ddoowwnn ttoo tthhee wweeaarr
iinnddiiccaattoorrss..
WWoorrnn ttyyrreess aarree ddeettrriimmeennttaall ttoo
rrooaaddhhoollddiinngg ppaarrttiiccuullaarrllyy aatt hhiigghh
ssppeeeeddss oonn wweett rrooaaddss.. FFuurrtthheerrmmoorree,,
tthhee vveehhiiccllee tteennddss ttoo aaqquuaappllaannee
ssoooonneerr..
NNoottee
When tread depth is down to 1.6 mm
measured in the tread groove next to the
wear indicator bar the official permissi-
ble minimum tread depth has been
reached (in export countries this figure
may differ).
RReenneewwiinngg wwhheeeellss//ttyyrreess
Wheels and tyres are important design
features. The wheels and tyres approved
by us should be used. They are specially
matched to the model concerned and con-
tribute largely to the excellent roadhold-
ing and safe driving characteristics.
TThhee TTeecchhnniiccaall SSeerrvviicceess hhoolldd uupp ttoo
ddaattee iinnffoorrmmaattiioonn rreeggaarrddiinngg tthhee ssttaann--
ddaarrdd ttyyrreess ffiitttteedd bbyy tthhee mmaannuuffaaccttuurreerr..
AAllssoo:: MMaannyy TTeecchhnniiccaall SSeerrvviicceess ppooss--
sseessss aa llaarrggee rraannggee ooff ttyyrreess aanndd rriimmss..
Fitting and repairing tyres requires
expert knowledge and special tools. This
work may only be carried out by specialist
personnel.
BBeeccaauussee ooff tthhee pprroobblleemm ooff
ddiissppoossiinngg ooff tthhee oolldd ttyyrreess,, tthhee
ssppeecciiaall ttoooollss nneecceessssaarryy aanndd tthhee
ssppeecciiaalliisstt kknnoowwlleeddggee rreeqquuiirreedd,, ttyyrree
cchhaannggiinngg sshhoouulldd pprreeffeerraabbllyy bbee ddoonnee
bbyy aa TTeecchhnniiccaall SSeerrvviiccee CCeennttrree..
For safety reasons the tyres should be
renewed in pairs and not singly. The tyres
with the deepest tread should always be
on the front wheels.
B1H-085
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
IF AND WHEN –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
3.63
You should only combine radial tyres of
the same construction, size (rolling cir-
cumference) and, as far as possible, the
same tread profile on all four wheels.
On four-wheel drive vehicles all tyres
must be of the same brand. Otherwise,
the viscosity would unnecessarily
increase the proportion of the rear drive
since the axes would be turning at differ-
ent speeds and this could cause damage.
If the spare wheel differs from the ver-
sion fitted on the vehicle (i.e. winter or
wide tyres) the spare tyre may only be
used briefly and with an appropriately
careful style of driving. It must be
replaced with the normal wheel as soon
as possible.
Never fit used tyres where their previ-
ous history is not known.
Knowing the tyre lettering and its mean-
ing makes the selection of the correct
tyres easier. Radial ply tyres have the fol-
lowing lettering on the sidewall:
TThhee mmaannuuffaaccttuurriinngg ddaattee
is also to be
seen on the tyre wall (possibly only on
inner side of wheel):
DOT ... 183 ... means that the tyre was
produced in the 18th calendar week of
2003.
WWaarrnniinngg
TTyyrreess wwhhiicchh aarree mmoorree tthhaann 66 yyeeaarrss
oolldd sshhoouulldd oonnllyy bbee uusseedd iinn aann
eemmeerrggeennccyy aanndd tthheenn wwiitthh aa ppaarrttiicc--
uullaarrllyy ccaarreeffuull ssttyyllee ooff ddrriivviinngg..
IIff yyoouu wwiisshh ttoo ffiitt yyoouurr ccaarr wwiitthh nnoonn--
ssttaannddaarrdd wwhheeeellss oorr ttyyrreess pplleeaassee nnoottee::
WWaarrnniinngg
FFoorr tteecchhnniiccaall rreeaassoonnss iitt iiss nnoott
nnoorrmmaallllyy ppoossssiibbllee ttoo uussee wwhheeeellss
ffrroomm ootthheerr vveehhiicclleess iinn cceerrttaaiinn cciirr--
ccuummssttaanncceess nnoott eevveenn wwhheeeellss ffrroomm
tthhee ssaammee vveehhiiccllee mmooddeell!!
UUssiinngg ttyyppeess ooff wwhheeeell aanndd//oorr
ttyyrreess wwhhiicchh hhaavvee nnoott bbeeeenn
aapppprroovveedd bbyy uuss ffoorr yyoouurr vveehhiiccllee
mmooddeell ccaann bbee ddeettrriimmeennttaall ttoo tthhee
ssaaffeettyy ooff tthhee vveehhiiccllee.. IItt ccaann aallssoo
aaffffeecctt tthhee vveehhiiccllee uunnddeerr tthhee
CCoonnssttrruuccttiioonn aanndd UUssee rreegguullaattiioonnss..
WWaarrnniinngg
PPlleeaassee ttaakkee nnoottiiccee ooff tthhee wwaarrnniinngg
nnootteess oonn tthhee nneexxtt ppaaggee..
e.g.
119955 // 6655 RR 1155 9911 TT
119955
= Tyre width in mm
6655
= Height/width ratio in %
RR
= Radial construction code
letter =
RR
adial
1155
= Wheel diameter in inches
9911
= Carrying capability code
TT
= Speed code letter
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
3.64
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– IF AND WHEN
WWhheeeellss aanndd wwhheeeell bboollttss aarree
mmaattcchheedd ttoo eeaacchh ootthheerr..
TThheerreeffoorree,, wwhheenneevveerr wwhheeeellss aarree
cchhaannggeedd ttoo aa ddiiffffeerreenntt vveerrssiioonn
((ee..gg.. aallllooyy wwhheeeellss oorr wwhheeeellss wwiitthh
wwiinntteerr ttyyrreess)),, tthhee ccoorrrreessppoonnddiinngg
wwhheeeell bboollttss wwiitthh tthhee ccoorrrreessppoonndd--
iinngg lleennggtthh aanndd ttaappeerr,, mmuusstt aallssoo bbee
uusseedd.. TThhee sseeccuurriittyy ooff tthhee wwhheeeellss
aanndd tthhee ffuunnccttiioonniinngg ooff tthhee bbrraakkee
ssyysstteemm ddeeppeenndd oonn tthhiiss!!
IIff wwhheeeell ttrriimm ddiissccss aarree ssuubbssee--
qquueennttllyy iinnssttaalllleedd iitt iiss eesssseennttiiaall ttoo
eennssuurree tthhaatt tthhee aaiirr ffllooww rreemmaaiinnss
aaddeeqquuaattee ttoo ccooooll tthhee bbrraakkeess..
Technical Service Centres have all the
necessary information about the possible
conversion of wheels, tyres and wheel
trims.
WWhheeeell bboollttss
TThhee wwhheeeell bboollttss mmuusstt bbee cclleeaann aanndd
eeaassyy ttoo ttuurrnn ddoo nnoott ggrreeaassee oorr ooiill
uunnddeerr aannyy cciirrccuummssttaanncceess!!
TThhiiss aapppplliieess nnoott oonnllyy ttoo cchhaannggiinngg aa
ddeeffeeccttiivvee wwhheeeell bbuutt aallssoo wwhheenn rree--
ppllaacciinngg ssuummmmeerr ttyyrreess wwiitthh wwiinntteerr
ttyyrreess aanndd vviiccee--vveerrssaa..
CChhaannggiinngg tthhee wwhheeeellss rroouunndd
If the front tyres are worn more than the
rear it is advisable to change the wheels
round as shown. All tyres will then have
approximately the same length of service
life.
With certain types of tread wear it can be
an advantage to change the wheels diag-
onally.
WWiinntteerr ttyyrreess
WWaarrnniinngg
IInn wwiinntteerr ccoonnddiittiioonnss,, wwiinntteerr ttyyrreess
wwiillll ssiiggnniiffiiccaannttllyy iimmpprroovvee hhaannddlliinngg
ooff tthhee vveehhiiccllee.. TThhiiss aallssoo aapppplliieess ttoo
vveerrssiioonnss wwiitthh ffoouurr-- wwhheeeell ddrriivvee**..
BBeeccaauussee ooff tthheeiirr mmaakkee uupp ((wwiiddtthh,,
rruubbbbeerr mmiixxttuurree,, ttrreeaadd ffoorrmmaattiioonn
eettcc..)),, ssuummmmeerr ttyyrreess pprroovviiddee lleessss
ttrraaccttiioonn oonn iiccee aanndd ssnnooww..
LEO-032
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
IF AND WHEN –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
3.65
When fitting winter tyres note the follow-
ing:
For better driving performance, fit win-
ter tyres on all four wheels.
Winter tyres are no longer fully effective
when the tread has worn down to a depth
of 4 mm.
The following speed limits are valid for
winter tyres:
Code letter Q max. 160 km/h
Code letter T max. 190 km/h
Code letter H max. 210 km/h
WWaarrnniinngg
TThhee hhiigghheesstt ppeerrmmiissssiibbllee ssppeeeedd ffoorr
yyoouurr wwiinntteerr ttyyrreess mmuusstt nnoott bbee
eexxcceeeeddeedd.. TThhiiss ccoouulldd ddaammaaggee tthhee
wwhheeeell aanndd lleeaadd ttoo aa sseerriioouuss aaccccii--
ddeenntt..
FFoorr tthhiiss rreeaassoonn,, iinn ssoommee ccoouunnttrriieess,,
vveehhiicclleess wwhhiicchh ccaann eexxcceeeedd tthhiiss ssppeeeedd
mmuusstt hhaavvee aann aapppprroopprriiaattee ssttiicckkeerr iinn
tthhee ddrriivveerrss ffiieelldd ooff vviieeww.. TThheessee aarree
aavvaaiillaabbllee ffrroomm TTeecchhnniiccaall SSeerrvviiccee
CCeennttrreess..
Please note regulations to this effect in
your country.
All-weather tyres can also be used
instead of winter tyres.
If you have a flat tyre the remarks on
using the spare wheel on page 3.59
should be noted.
Do not leave winter tyres fitted for an
unnecessary long period because when
the roads are free of snow and ice the
handling with summer tyres is better.
FFoorr eennvviirroonnmmeennttaall rreeaassoonnss ssuumm--
mmeerr ttyyrreess sshhoouulldd bbee ffiitttteedd aaggaaiinn
aass ssoooonn aass ppoossssiibbllee bbeeccaauussee nnoorr--
mmaallllyy tthheeyy aarree qquuiieetteerr iinn rruunnnniinngg,, ttyyrree
wweeaarr iiss rreedduucceedd aanndd tthhee ffuueell ccoonn--
ssuummppttiioonn iiss lloowweerr..
SSnnooww cchhaaiinnss
Snow chains may only be fitted on the
front wheels. This also applies to vehicles
with four-wheel drive*.
The use of snow chains on the tyres
195/65 R 15 or 175/80 R 14 is allowed.
OOnnllyy uussee tthhiinn cchhaaiinnss wwhhiicchh ddoo nnoott
ssttaanndd cclleeaarr mmoorree tthhaann 1155 mmmm ((iinncclluudd--
iinngg tteennssiioonneerr))..
When using snow chains wheel trim
plates and trim rings must be taken off. In
this case, the wheel bolts must then be
fitted with caps to protect them.
When driving over roads which are free of
snow you must remove the chains. On
such roads they are detrimental to vehicle
handling, damage the tyres and wear out
quickly.
In some countries the maximum permissi-
ble speed with snow chains is 50 km/h.
CChhaannggiinngg wwhheeeellss
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
3.66
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– IF AND WHEN
WWaarrnniinngg
IInn ccaassee ooff aa ffllaatt ttyyrree oorr ppuunnccttuurree,,
ppaarrkk tthhee vveehhiiccllee aass ffaarr aass ppoossssiibbllee
aawwaayy ffrroomm tthhee ttrraaffffiicc ffllooww.. IIff nneecc--
eessssaarryy,, sswwiittcchh hhaazzaarrdd wwaarrnniinngg
lliigghhttss oonn aanndd ppllaaccee tthhee wwaarrnniinngg
ttrriiaannggllee iinn ppoossiittiioonn nnoottee aannyy
ssttaattuuttoorryy rreeqquuiirreemmeennttss..
AAllll vveehhiiccllee ooccccuuppaannttss sshhoouulldd lleeaavvee
tthhee vveehhiiccllee aanndd mmoovvee ttoo aa ssaaffee
aarreeaa ((ee..gg.. bbeehhiinndd ssaaffeettyy bbaarrrriieerr))..
AAppppllyy hhaannddbbrraakkee ffiirrmmllyy,, eennggaaggee aa
ggeeaarr oorr ppllaaccee tthhee ggeeaarr sseelleeccttoorr iinn
ppoossiittiioonnPP aanndd cchhoocckk
tthhee ooppppoossiittee
wwhheeeell wwiitthh aa ssttoonnee oorr ssiimmiillaarr..
WWhheenn ttoowwiinngg aa ttrraaiilleerr,, tthhee ttrraaiilleerr
mmuusstt ffiirrsstt bbee ddiisseennggaaggeedd ffrroomm tthhee
ttoowwiinngg vveehhiiccllee bbeeffoorree tthhee wwhheeeell iiss
cchhaannggeedd..
CCaarrrryy oouutt wwhheeeell cchhaannggee oonn aass ffllaatt aa
ssuurrffaaccee aass ppoossssiibbllee..
Take tools and spare wheel out of lug-
gage compartment.
WWhheenn uussiinngg tthhee rreedduucceedd ssppaaccee ssppaarree
wwhheeeell** ((iinn ffoouurr--wwhheeeell ddrriivvee vveehhiicclleess)),,
pplleeaassee oobbsseerrvvee tthhee ffoolllloowwiinngg ppooiinnttss::
As the emergency spare is smaller than
a normal wheel, the free height of the axle
over the spare is lowered by about 30
mm. Try not to use roads with bumps or
pot holes to avoid damaging the under-
body. Nor should you use an automatic
care wash as the underbody may touch
the floor.
The emergency wheels of the different
versions of the vehicle have been spe-
cially developed for their respective mod-
els. So they should not be exchanged or
used in a different model. Nor should you
use the emergency wheel from another
model of car.
Neither normal tyres nor winter tyres
should be fitted onto this wheel.
WWaarrnniinngg!!
TThhee eemmeerrggeennccyy ssppaarree** sshhoouulldd
oonnllyy bbee uusseedd tteemmppoorraarriillyy aanndd ffoorr aa
sshhoorrtt ttiimmee,, aanndd iitt mmuusstt bbee rree--
ppllaacceedd aass ssoooonn aass ppoossssiibbllee..
AAfftteerr ffiittttiinngg tthhee eemmeerrggeennccyy
ssppaarree,, cchheecckk iittss pprreessssuurree,, wwhhiicchh
sshhoouulldd bbee 44..22 bbaarr,, aass ssoooonn aass ppooss--
ssiibbllee..
YYoouu sshhoouulldd nnoott ddrriivvee aabboovvee 8800
kkmm//hh.. AAvvooiidd bbrruussqquuee aacccceelleerraa--
ttiioonnss,, bbrraakkiinngg,, aanndd ssppeeeeddiinngg
aarroouunndd bbeennddss..
YYoouu mmuusstt nneevveerr ddrriivvee wwiitthh mmoorree
tthhaann oonnee eemmeerrggeennccyy ssppaarree wwhheeeell..
FFoorr tteecchhnniiccaall rreeaassoonnss,, ssnnooww
cchhaaiinnss mmaayy nnoott bbee uusseedd oonn ssppaarree
wwhheeeellss..
IIff yyoouu hhaavvee ttoo ddrriivvee wwiitthh ssnnooww
cchhaaiinnss aanndd oonnee ooff tthhee ffrroonntt ttyyrreess iiss
ppuunnccttuurreedd,, ppuutt tthhee ssppaarree wwhheeeell oonn
tthhee rreeaarr aaxxllee.. RReeppllaaccee tthhee ppuunncc--
ttuurreedd ffrroonntt wwhheeeell wwiitthh tthhee rreeaarr
wwhheeeell yyoouu hhaavvee rreemmoovveedd.. PPuutt tthhee
ssnnooww cchhaaiinnss oonn bbeeffoorree ffiittttiinngg tthhee
wwhheeeell..
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
IF AND WHEN –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
3.67
Remove
cceennttrree ccoovveerr
with the wheel
spanner and the wire hook*. Put the
wire hook in one of the recesses of the
wheel trim. Pass wheel spanner through
hook and lever trim off see illustra-
tion.
Push the wheel spanner as far as possi-
ble onto the wheel bolt as shown and turn
the spanner anti-clockwise. When doing
this, grip the spanner as far as possible
towards the lever end.
If the bolts cannot be loosened, one can
in an emergency, carefully push the span-
ner down with a foot on the end of the
lever. One should ensure that one has a
firm stance and a good grip on the vehi-
cle.
Loosen wheel bolts about one turn.
B45-082CTO8-042
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
3.68
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– IF AND WHEN
Depressions under vehicle for jack:
WWaarrnniinngg
IIff tthhee jjaacckk iiss nnoott ffiitttteedd aatt tthhee
ppooiinnttss mmaarrkkeedd oorr ddeessccrriibbeedd,, ddaamm--
aaggee ccoouulldd bbee ccaauusseedd ttoo tthhee vveehhii--
ccllee.. TThheerree iiss aallssoo aa rriisskk ooff iinnjjuurryy!!
Depressions in the side member at front
and rear indicate the points at which the
jack must be fitted – see arrows in illus-
tration.
– These marks are about 15 cm and 25 cm
from the front and rear wheel arch,
respectively.
Place jack under vehicle:
The illustration shows the jack fitted on
the rear left hand side.
WWaarrnniinngg
IIff tthhee ggrroouunndd uunnddeerr tthhee jjaacckk iiss ttoooo
ssoofftt,, tthhee vveehhiiccllee ccoouulldd sslliipp ooffff tthhee
jjaacckk..
EEnnssuurree,, tthheerreeffoorree,, tthhaatt tthhee jjaacckk iiss
oonn aa ssoolliidd ssuurrffaaccee.. IIff nneecceessssaarryy,,
uussee aa llaarrggee,, ssttaabbllee uunnddeerrllaayy ttoo
ppllaaccee uunnddeerr tthhee jjaacckk..
IIff tthhee ggrroouunndd uunnddeerr tthhee jjaacckk iiss sslliipp--
ppeerryy,, ppllaaccee aa nnoonn--sslliipp rruubbbbeerr mmaatt
uunnddeerrnneeaatthh..
TO8-043 B45-084C
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
IF AND WHEN –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
3.69
In vehicles fitted with a plastic cover*,
remove the cover to access the attach-
ment points of the vehicle. For this pro-
ceed as follows:
Pull on the cover and remove from its
housing in the direction of the arrow.
Once the cover is removed it will remain
suspended by a rubber band to avoid its
loss as shown in the illustration.
LEO-039LEO-038
3.70
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– IF AND WHEN
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
Wind jack arm up by turning the crank in
the spindle until the jack just goes
under the vehicle.
The claw of the jack must fit round the
vertical rib on the side member so that
the jack cannot slip when vehicle is
lifted see illustration on the page
3.68.
Align jack and at same time wind claw
up further until it contacts the vertical
rib on side member.
Lift vehicle until the wheel is just clear
of the ground.
Remove wheel bolts (
aafftteerr lloooosseenniinngg
),
using box spanner in screwdriver handle
(see illustration), place them on a clean
surface (hub cap, cloth, paper) next to the
jack and remove wheel.
Fit spare wheel, and slightly tighten all
bolts using the box spanner in the screw-
driver handle.
TThhee wwhheeeell bboollttss mmuusstt bbee cclleeaann aanndd
eeaassyy ttoo ttuurrnn ddoo nnoott ggrreeaassee oorr ooiill
uunnddeerr aannyy cciirrccuummssttaanncceess!!
Lower vehicle and fully tighten bolts in
diagonal sequence using wheel spanner.
Fit the wheel trim again.
When fitting the wheel trim, you must first
press on the trim at the valve cut-out and
then press on around the full circumfer-
ence.
Place defective wheel in spare wheel
bracket and secure using handwheel.
Feed the securing strap through the
holes and use it to secure the polystyrene
retainer for the vehicle tools.
B45-085C
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
IF AND WHEN –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
3.71
NNootteess
The box spanner in the screwdriver han-
dle makes handling the wheel bolts eas-
ier. The blade should be removed when
doing this.
NNeevveerr uussee tthhee bbooxx ssppaannnneerr iinn tthhee hhaann--
ddllee ooff tthhee ssccrreewwddrriivveerr ttoo lloooosseenn oorr
ttiigghhtteenn wwhheeeell bboollttss..
TThhee ffoolllloowwiinngg ppooiinnttss sshhoouulldd bbee
nnootteedd aafftteerr cchhaannggiinngg aa wwhheeeell::
CChheecckk tthhee iinnffllaattiioonn pprreessssuurree ooff tthhee
rreeppllaacceemmeenntt wwhheeeell aass ssoooonn aass ppooss--
ssiibbllee..
HHaavvee tthhee ttiigghhtteenniinngg ttoorrqquuee ooff tthhee
wwhheeeell bboollttss cchheecckkeedd wwiitthh aa ttoorrqquuee
wwrreenncchh aass qquuiicckkllyy aass ppoossssiibbllee.. TThhee
ttoorrqquuee ffoorr sstteeeell aanndd aallllooyy wwhheeeellss
aanndd ffoorr tthhee ssppaarree wwhheeeell iiss 112200 NNmm..
IIff tthhee wwhheeeell bboollttss aarree sseeeenn ttoo bbee ccoorr--
rrooddeedd oorr ttoooo ttiigghhtt wwhheenn cchhaannggiinngg tthhee
wwhheeeell,, tthheeyy mmuusstt bbee rreeppllaacceedd bbeeffoorree
cchheecckkiinngg tthhee ttoorrqquuee..
UUnnttiill tthhiiss hhaass bbeeeenn ddoonnee,, yyoouu sshhoouulldd
oonnllyy ddrriivvee aatt llooww ssppeeeeddss..
The defective wheel should be repaired
as soon as possible.
WWaarrnniinngg
IIff tthhee vveehhiiccllee iiss ttoo bbee ssuubbsseeqquueennttllyy
ffiitttteedd wwiitthh wwhheeeellss oorr ttiirreess ddiiffffeerriinngg
ffrroomm tthhoossee ffiitttteedd bbyy tthhee ffaaccttoorryy,, iitt
iiss eesssseennttiiaall ttoo aallwwaayyss nnoottee tthhee ccoorr--
rreessppoonnddiinngg iinnddiiccaattiioonnss iinn tthhee
""AAcccceessssoorriieess,, mmooddiiffiiccaattiioonnss aanndd
rreeppllaacceemmeenntt ooff ppaarrttss"" cchhaapptteerr..
NNootteess ffoorr ttyyrreess wwhheerree tthhee ddiirreeccttiioonn
ooff rroottaattiioonn iiss ssttiippuullaatteedd
It is imperative that the designated direc-
tion of rotation for the tyre treads (which
can be determined from the arrow on the
side of the tyre) be kept to. The best tyre
performance i.e. in aquaplaning, road
adhesion, noise and wear are then guar-
anteed.
If a spare wheel has to be fitted against
the stipulated direction of rotation, this
measure should only be a temporary one.
The best possible tyre performance con-
cerning aquaplaning, noise level and
wear are no longer fully guaranteed.
We recommend that you take this into
account, especially in wet weather, and
adjust your speed to the driving condi-
tions.
In order to use the principle of the direc-
tion of rotation fully again, the faulty tyre
must be replaced as soon as possible.
If necessary, mount the tyre fitted against
the direction of rotation in the stipulated
direction.
AAnnttii--tthheefftt** wwhheeeell bboollttss
11
Anti-theft wheel bolt
22
Adapter for the wheel bolts
(The adapter is stored with the on board
tools.)
LLoooosseenn oorr ttiigghhtteenn wwhheeeell bboollttss
First, place adapter
22
as far as possible
onto the anti-theft wheel
11
bolt.
Place the wheel spanner (from the on
board tools) as far as possible over
adapter
22
and loosen or tighten the wheel
bolt.
After the wheel has been changed the
adapter needs to be removed from the
wheel bolt.
We recommend that you carry the adapter
for the wheel bolts in the vehicle and stow
it at a location well known to the owner,
preferably with the on board tools.
CCooddee
The code for the wheel bolt is engraved in
the front of the adapter.
MMaakkee aa nnoottee ooff tthhee ccooddee aanndd kkeeeepp iitt
iinn aa ssaaffee ppllaaccee.. OOnnllyy wwiitthh tthhiiss ccooddee
ccaann aa rreeppllaacceemmeenntt aaddaapptteerr bbee oobbttaaiinneedd
aatt aa SSEEAATT OOffffiicciiaall SSeerrvviiccee CCeenntteerr..
3.72
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– IF AND WHEN
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
1
2
B45-329C
IF AND WHEN –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
3.73
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
The individual current circuits are pro-
tected by fuses.
It is advisable to always carry a few spare
fuses on the vehicle.
NNootteess
WWaarrnniinngg
NNeevveerr,, uunnddeerr aannyy cciirrccuummssttaanncceess
rreeppaaiirr tthhee ffuusseess oorr rreeppllaaccee tthheemm
wwiitthh mmoorree ppoowweerrffuull oonneess,, aass ddaamm--
aaggee iinn aannootthheerr ppaarrtt ooff tthhee eelleeccttrrii--
ccaall ssyysstteemm ccoouulldd ooccccuurr.. TThhiiss ccoouulldd
eevveenn lleeaadd ttoo aa ffiirree..
If the newly inserted fuse blows again
after a short time, the electrical system
must be checked by a Technical Service
Centre as soon as possible.
Some of the components listed are only
found on certain models or are optional
extras.
CChhaannggiinngg aa ffuussee
The fuses are located on the left hand
side of the dash panel behind a cover.
On right-hand drive versions, the fuses
are on the right hand side of the dash
panel behind a cover.
Switch off the ignition and the compo-
nent concerned.
Take the cover off.
To do this, place the flat blade of the
screwdriver in the recess on the cover
(arrow) and lever off.
With the aid of the list of fuses (see next
pages or the cover of the fuse box) deter-
mine which fuse belongs to the compo-
nent that has failed.
Remove the appropriate fuse.
Replace blown fuse – can be recog-
nised by the burnt metal strip with a
fuse of
ssaammee
amperage.
Replace the cover.
FFuusseess
TO8-043A
LLaayyoouutt ooff ffuusseess
NNoo.. CCoommppoonneenntt AA
11))
1– Heated washer jets,
heated mirrors......................... 10
2– Indicators ............................... 10
3– Lights ..................................... 5
4– Number plate lighting ............. 5
5– Comfort on and off .................. 7.5
6– Central locking........................ 5
7– Reverse lights ......................... 10
8– Telephone............................... 5
9– ABS ........................................ 5
10– Petrol engine control unit ........ 10
11– Instrument panel..................... 5
12– Supply current, diagnosis,
telephone ............................... 7.5
13– Brake lights ............................ 10
14–
Interior lighting, central locking/
electric windows...................... 10
Interior light ............................ 5
15– Instrument panel,
automatic gear box.................. 5
16– Magnetic clutch, electric
water pump............................. 10
17– Free ........................................ 7.5
18– Main beam, right..................... 10
19– Main beam, left ....................... 10
20– Dipped beam, right ................. 10
21– Dipped beam, left.................... 10
22– Side light, right ....................... 5
1)
Amperes.
NNoo.. CCoommppoonneenntt AA
11))
23– Side light, left ......................... 5
24– Windscreen washer system,
pump ...................................... 20
25– Heating, air conditioning ......... 25
26– Heated rear window................. 20
27– Rear window wiper .................. 10
28– Fuel pump............................... 15
29– Engine control, petrol engine... 10
30– Sliding roof ............................. 20
31– Automatic gear box.................. 20
32– Injectors: petrol....................... 10
Engine control, diesel.............. 15
33– Headlight washers................... 20
34– Engine control, diesel engine... 10
Engine control, petrol engine... 10
35–
Trailer device connection layout
... 30
36– Fog lights, rear fog light .......... 5
37– Contact ................................... 10
38– Boot light, Central locking/
electric windows...................... 10
39– Hazard warning lights.............. 15
40– Horn........................................ 20
41– Lighter .................................... 15
42– Radio ...................................... 15
43– Engine control, petrol engine... 10
Engine control, diesel engine .. 10
44– Heated seat ............................ 15
3.74
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– IF AND WHEN
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
IF AND WHEN –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
3.75
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
FFuussee bbooxx iinn tthhee eennggiinnee
ccoommppaarrttmmeenntt oonn tthhee bbaatttteerryy
FFuusseess AA
11))
Radiator fan, 1st level ........................30
ABS engine relay................................30
ABS main relay ..................................30
MMeettaall ffuusseess
22))
Alternator ........................................150
On board network ............................110
Radiator fan, 2nd level.......................40
Engine distribution system.................50
Glow plugs ........................................50
1)
Amperes.
2)
These fuses should only be changed at a
Technical Service Centre.
FFuussee ccoolloouurr ccooddee::
Beige: 5 Amp
Brown: 7.5 Amp
Red: 10 Amp
Blue: 15 Amp
Yellow: 20 Amp
White 25 Amp
Green: 30 Amp
AAuuttoommaattiicc ffuussee
All electric windows are protected as a
single set via an automatic fuse which
breaks the circuit when overloaded (e.g.
windows frozen) and completes the circuit
again after a few seconds.
B1J-092D
Before starting to replace a bulb, you
must first always switch off the consumer
concerned.
Do not touch the glass part of the new
bulb with bare fingers because the finger
marks left on the glass evaporate when
the bulb becomes hot, the vapour settles
on the reflector and dims it.
Always use the same type of bulb. The
designation is marked on the base of the
bulb or on the glass.
It is advisable to always a carry a box of
spare bulbs in the vehicle. It should con-
tain at least the following bulbs which are
essential for traffic safety.
RReeaarr lliigghhtt bbuullbbss
Fog light ..................................12V/21W
Indicator ..................................12V/21W
Rear low beam/
Brake light.................12V/5 W 12V/21W
Number plate light .....................12V/5W
Reverse light............................12V/21W
MMaaiinn bbeeaamm bbuullbb wwiitthhoouutt ffoogg lliigghhtt
Dipped beam....................12V/55W (H7)
Main beam .......................12V/55W (H1)
Indicator ..................................12V/21W
Side light...................................12V/5W
MMaaiinn bbeeaamm bbuullbb wwiitthh ffoogg lliigghhtt
Dipped beam....................12V/55W (H7)
Fog light...........................12V/55W (H3)
Main beam .......................12V/55W (H1)
Indicator ..................................12V/21W
Side light...................................12V/5W
WWaarrnniinngg
HH77 bbuullbbss aarree pprreessssuurreedd aanndd ccaann
eexxppllooddee wwhhiillee bbeeiinngg cchhaannggeedd..
FFoorr tthhiiss rreeaassoonn yyoouu sshhoouulldd aallwwaayyss
wweeaarr gglloovveess aanndd pprrootteeccttiivvee ggllaasssseess
wwhheenn cchhaannggiinngg aann HH77 bbuullbb..
NNoottee
As a result of the special construction of
the engine and the subsequent space
requirements, the following bulbs are dif-
ficult to replace.
MMaaiinn bbeeaamm
SSiiddee lliigghhtt
FFoogg lliigghhtt**
FFrroonntt iinnddiiccaattoorrss
For this reason these bulbs should always
be changed at a Technical Service Centre.
Notwithstanding, here follow instructions
on how to change them, except for the fog
lights*.
3.76
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– IF AND WHEN
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
CChhaannggiinngg bbuullbbss
IF AND WHEN –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
3.77
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
WWaarrnniinngg
WWhheenn ddooiinngg wwoorrkk iinn tthhee eennggiinnee
ccoommppaarrttmmeenntt yyoouu mmuusstt ttaakkee ggrreeaatt
ccaarree ddaannggeerr ooff iinnjjuurryy!!
FFoorr yyoouurr oowwnn ssaaffeettyy nnoottee tthhee rreellee--
vvaanntt wwaarrnniinnggss iinn tthhee ""EEnnggiinnee bboonn--
nneett"" aanndd ""EEnnggiinnee ccoommppaarrttmmeenntt""
cchhaapptteerrss//sseeccttiioonnss..
On some models, before changing the
main beam and front indicator bulbs, bear
in mind the following:
Remove the air aspiration tube and,
depending on the engine, disconnect the
battery
1).
1)
Note safety warnings in the "Battery" chapter.
MMaaiinn bbeeaamm bbuullbbss
The illustration shows the left headlight
from the rear.
AA
– Dipped beam bulb
BB
– Main beam bulb
CC
– Side light bulb
DD
– Indicator bulb
1
TO8-045
A
TO8-044A
AA DDiippppeedd bbeeaamm bbuullbb
Open bonnet.
Remove cover, loosening screws
11
.
Unhook spring clips
22
in direction of
arrow and fold away.
Pull out the plug of the bulb cable.
Release the retaining spring and pull it
away.
Take bulb out and insert new bulb so
that the locating lug on the bulb plate
engages the recess in the reflector.
Fold spring clip over the bulb plate until
the clip engages.
Connect plug.
Place cover into guide.
Have the headlight beam alignment
checked.
BB MMaaiinn bbeeaamm bbuullbb
Open bonnet.
Remove cover loosening screws
11
.
Unhook spring clips
22
in direction of
arrow and fold away.
Pull out the plug of the bulb cable.
Release the retaining spring and pull it
away.
Take bulb out and insert new bulb so
that the locating lug on the bulb plate
engages the recess in the reflector.
Fold spring clip over the bulb plate until
the clip engages.
Connect plug.
Place cover into guide.
Have the headlight beam alignment
checked.
3.78
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– IF AND WHEN
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
B
TO8-044B
A
2
TO8-046
IF AND WHEN –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
3.79
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
CC SSiiddee lliigghhtt bbuullbbss
Open the bonnet.
Remove the cover, loosening screws
11
.
Unhook spring clips
22
in direction of
arrow and fold away.
Remove bulb holder from the reflector.
Take bulb out.
Fit the new bulb.
Insert bulb carrier into reflector.
Replace plastic cover.
DD IInnddiiccaattoorr bbuullbb
Open the bonnet.
Remove the cover, loosening screws
11
.
Unhook spring clips
22
in direction of
arrow and fold away.
Disconnect the connector, pressing the
spring tab.
Turn holder to right and remove it from
its housing.
Turn the bulb to the left and replace it.
To re-assemble do the same steps in
the reverse order.
Plug in the connector
Replace the plastic cover.
D
TO8-044D
C
TO8-044C
SSiiddee iinnddiiccaattoorrss
Press the indicator to the left or to the
right and remove the bulb.
Pull out bulb holder.
Pull out the defective glass bulb and
insert new one.
Slide bulb holder into the indicator
guides until the holder engages.
First place the indicator with retaining
lugs (arrow
11
) in body opening and then
engage the light in the direction of the
arrow (arrow
22
).
3.80
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– IF AND WHEN
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
1
2
B11-080D
IF AND WHEN –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
3.81
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
RReeaarr lliigghhttss
TTaaiillggaattee lliigghhttss
FFoogg lliigghhtt
RReevveerrssee lliigghhtt
Open tailgate.
Remove plastic cover
AA
.
Press spring retainers in the direction of
the arrows.
Remove the bulb holder.
Push on the bulb and turn it to the left.
Remove the bulb and replace it.
Replace the lamp holder.
Replace the plastic cover
AA
.
BBooddyy wwoorrkk lliigghhttss
RReeaarr lliigghhtt
BBrraakkee lliigghhtt
IInnddiiccaattoorr lliigghhtt
Open tailgate.
Remove plastic cover
BB
.
Remove the bulb holder, pressing the
side retainers.
Push on the bulb and turn it to the left.
Remove the bulb and replace it.
Replace the lamp holder.
Replace the plastic cover
BB
.
B
LEO-034
A
LEO-033
3.82
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– IF AND WHEN
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
NNuummbbeerr ppllaattee lliigghhtt
To remove the number plate light lever
off the side spring retainers with great
care to avoid possible breakage.
Pull defective bulb out of holder and
insert the new bulb.
Insert lens in the tailgate opening,
ensure that the rubber seal and the light
are correctly positioned (see adjacent
light).
IInntteerriioorr lliigghhtt
Remove the lens. To do this insert a fine
screwdriver into the gap between the
housing and lens (arrow) and lever the
lens off carefully, to avoid damage.
Pull out the defective bulb and insert a
new one.
First attach lens to switch trim with both
retaining lugs. Then push up at front until
both locking plugs engage.
LEO-035
IF AND WHEN –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
3.83
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
RReeaarr iinntteerriioorr lliigghhtt**
Remove complete bulb holder. To do
this, insert the flat blade of the screw-
driver between the light and the roof trim
(arrow) and carefully lever the bulb holder
out.
Move plastic cover in the direction of
the arrow and remove.
Pull out defective bulb and insert new
one.
Slide bulb cover to the side until it
engages.
First insert light carrier from the con-
nector side and then press into the open-
ing of the roof trim.
B1J-087DB45-147C
3.84
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– IF AND WHEN
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
AAddddiittiioonnaall bbrraakkee lliigghhtt**
Because of the difficulty of the operation,
this bulb should only be changed by a
Technical Service Centre.
GGlloovvee ccoommppaarrttmmeenntt lliigghhtt
Insert the screwdriver at the top
between the light and the glove compart-
ment and carefully lever the light out.
Then take the light out at an angle.
Change the bulb.
Insert the light with the switch side at
the bottom first and then at the top until it
engages.
LLuuggggaaggee ccoommppaarrttmmeenntt lliigghhtt
The luggage compartment light is located
on the left side.
Lever out the luggage compartment
light with the flat end of a screwdriver, in
the slot as indicated by the arrow in the
illustration.
Change the bulb.
Refit the light from the switch side.
Press upwards until it engages.
LEO-036
IF AND WHEN –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
3.85
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
If a radio is installed or if the factory-pro-
vided radio is replaced, including speak-
ers, the following must be noted:
Connectors* fitted in the vehicle are for
Original SEAT Radios
1)
.
Radios with different connectors must
be connected with adaptor cables.
WWaarrnniinngg
NNeevveerr ccuutt aa ccaabbllee aanndd nneevveerr lleeaavvee
iitt wwiitthhoouutt iinnssuullaattiioonn.. IIff nneecceessssaarryy
uussee aann aaddaappttoorr..
OOtthheerrwwiissee tthhee ccaabblleess ccoouulldd bbee
oovveerrllooaaddeedd aanndd ccaauussee aa sshhoorrtt cciirr--
ccuuiitt ddaannggeerr ooff ffiirree..
FFuurrtthheerrmmoorree,, iimmppoorrttaanntt eelleeccttrroonniicc
ccoommppoonneennttss ccoouulldd ddeetteerriioorraattee oorr bbee
ddaammaaggeedd.. IInn ccaassee ooff aa ddiissttuurrbbaannccee iinn
tthhee ssppeeeedd ssiiggnnaall,, ffoorr eexxaammppllee,, iitt
ccoouulldd ccaauussee ffaaiilluurree iinn tthhee eennggiinnee ccoonn--
ttrrooll,, aauuttoommaattiicc ggeeaarrbbooxx,, AABBSS,, eettcc..
EEvveenn iiff tthhee ssppeeeedd ssiiggnnaall iiss ccoonnnneecctteedd
ttoo aa rraaddiioo ffiitttteedd wwiitthh aann aauuttoommaattiicc
vvoolluummee aaddjjuussttmmeenntt bbyy aa ddiiffffeerreenntt
mmaannuuffaaccttuurreerr,, aa ffaaiilluurree ooff tthhee pprreevvii--
oouussllyy mmeennttiioonneedd kkiinndd ccoouulldd ooccccuurr..
To access the original speakers you must
remove the entire door panel. Since this
operation requires special tools and
expertise, we recommend that this be
undertaken by a Technical Service Centre.
The radio and loudspeakers should
therefore be fitted by a Technical Service
Centre, who are perfectly conversant with
all the technical specificities of the vehi-
cles, and have Original Radios
1)
and all
the necessary spares from the SEAT
Original Parts Program
1)
. Moreover, all
work is carried out according to factory
standards.
The radios from the SEAT Original
Accessories program
1)
correspond to fac-
tory models and guarantee a trouble-free
installation. These radios are fitted with
advanced technology and are easy-to-
use.
It is also advisable to use speakers,
assembly kits, antennas and anti-parasite
kits from the Original Accessories pro-
gram
1)
. These parts have been created for
each type of vehicle.
RRooooff aanntteennnnaa**
The vehicle may be fitted with an extend-
able anti-theft roof antenna* which can
be folded backwards, i.e. at a car wash.
TToo ffoolldd
Unscrew rod, bend backwards to the hori-
zontal position and screw in.
TToo uussee
Proceed in reverse.
1)
Not for all countries.
IInnssttaalllliinngg aa rraaddiioo
The installation of mobile telephones
should be carried out by a Technical
Service Centre.
SEAT has authorised the use of mobile
telephones and two-way radios for your
vehicle with correctly installed external
aerial and maximum broadcast power of
10 Watts.
NNootteess
WWhheenn uussiinngg mmoobbiillee tteelleepphhoonneess oorr ttwwoo--
wwaayy,, ffaauullttss iinn tthhee vveehhiiccllee eelleeccttrriiccss
ccoouulldd ooccccuurr uunnddeerr tthhee ffoolllloowwiinngg ccoonn--
ddiittiioonnss::
nnoo eexxtteerrnnaall aaeerriiaall
eexxtteerrnnaall aaeerriiaall iinnccoorrrreeccttllyy iinnssttaalllleedd
bbrrooaaddccaasstt ppoowweerr hhiigghheerr tthhaann 1100
WWaattttss..
MMoobbiillee tteelleepphhoonneess oorr ttwwoo--wwaayy rraaddiiooss
mmuusstt nnoott,, tthheerreeffoorree,, bbee ooppeerraatteedd
iinnssiiddee tthhee vveehhiiccllee wwiitthhoouutt aa sseeppaarraattee
eexxtteerrnnaall aaeerriiaall oorr wwiitthh aann aaeerriiaall wwhhiicchh
hhaass bbeeeenn iinnccoorrrreeccttllyy iinnssttaalllleedd..
WWaarrnniinngg
MMoobbiillee tteelleepphhoonneess aanndd ttwwoo--wwaayy
rraaddiiooss ooppeerraatteedd iinnssiiddee tthhee vveehhiiccllee
wwiitthhoouutt aa sseeppaarraattee eexxtteerrnnaall aaeerriiaall
oorr wwiitthh aann iinnccoorrrreeccttllyy iinnssttaalllleedd
eexxtteerrnnaall aaeerriiaall ccaann bbee hhaarrmmffuull ttoo
hheeaalltthh dduuee ttoo tthhee eexxttrreemmeellyy hhiigghh
eelleeccttrroommaaggnneettiicc ffiieellddss ggeenneerraatteedd..
Furthermore, optimal range is only
achieved with an external aerial.
NNoottee
PPlleeaassee ttaakkee iinnttoo aaccccoouunntt tthhee iinnffoorrmmaa--
ttiioonn iinn tthhee iinnssttrruuccttiioonn mmaannuuaallss pprroo--
vviiddeedd aalloonngg wwiitthh mmoobbiillee tteelleepphhoonneess
aanndd rraaddiiootteelleepphhoonneess!!
If you want to use a mobile telephone or
two-way radio with a broadcast power of
higher than 10 Watt, please ask a
Technical Service Centre. They are aware
of the technical possibilities for retro-fit-
ting mobile telephones and two-way
radios.
WWaarrnniinngg
PPlleeaassee ccoonncceennttrraattee oonn yyoouurr ddrriivviinngg
ffiirrsstt ooff aallll.. NNeevveerr iinnssttaallll tteelleepphhoonnee
rreettaaiinneerrss oonn tthhee AAiirr BBaagg ccoovveerr oorr
wwiitthhiinn iittss rraannggee ooff eeffffeeccttiivveenneessss..
TThhiiss wwoouulldd iinnccrreeaassee tthhee rriisskk ooff
iinnjjuurryy sshhoouulldd tthhee AAiirr BBaagg bbee aaccttii--
vvaatteedd dduurriinngg aann aacccciiddeenntt..
3.86
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– IF AND WHEN
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
MMoobbiillee tteelleepphhoonneess aanndd rraaddiioo tteelleepphhoonneess
IF AND WHEN –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
3.87
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
If the engine will not start because the
battery is flat,
jjuummpp lleeaaddss
can be con-
nected to the battery of another vehicle to
start the engine. The following points
should be noted:
Both batteries must be of the 12 Volt
variety and the capacity (Ah) of the
booster battery must be approximately
the same as that of the flat battery.
The jumper cables must be heavy
enough to carry the load. Note cable man-
ufacturer’s data.
Only use jumper cables with insulated
clips.
WWaarrnniinngg
AA ffllaatt bbaatttteerryy ccaann ffrreeeezzee aatt tteemmppeerr--
aattuurreess ooff lleessss tthhaann 00°°CC.. AA ffllaatt bbaatt--
tteerryy mmuusstt ffiirrsstt bbee tthhaawweedd oouutt
bbeeffoorree aattttaacchhiinngg tthhee jjuummpp lleeaaddss,,
aass iitt ccoouulldd ootthheerrwwiissee eexxppllooddee..
There must be no contact between the
vehicles, otherwise current can flow as
soon as the plus terminals are connected.
The flat battery must be properly con-
nected to the electrical system.
The engine of the boosting vehicle must
be running.
Ensure that the insulated clips have
enough contact to metal. This is particu-
larly applicable to clips which are
attached to the engine block.
CCoolloorrss ooff jjuummppeerr ccaabblleess::
Positive cable: generally red.
Negative cable: generally black, brown or
blue.
PPlleeaassee nnoottee iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss oonn tthhee ffooll--
lloowwiinngg ppaaggee..
EEmmeerrggeennccyy ssttaarrttiinngg
3.88
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– IF AND WHEN
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
AA
– Flat battery
BB
– Boosting battery
The battery is in the engine compartment
on the left looking forward.
TThhee eemmeerrggeennccyy ssttaarrttiinngg ccaabbllee mmuusstt
bbee aattttaacchheedd iinn tthhee ffoolllloowwiinngg oorrddeerr::
Before the starting cable can be con-
nected to the (
++
) terminal on the battery
of the vehicle, the cover of the fuse holder
must first be opened (see page 3.50).
11
. One end of (
++
) cable (usually red) to
the (
++
) terminal of the flat battery
AA
.
22
. Other end of the red cable to the (
++
)
terminal of boosting battery
BB
.
33
. One end of (
) cable (usually black) to
the (
) terminal of boosting battery
BB
.
44
. Other end of black cable (
XX
) to a solid
metal part bolted to the block or to cylin-
der block itself.
Do not connect the cable to the flat bat-
tery minus terminal. The sparks could
ignite the explosive gas flowing out of the
battery.
WWaarrnniinngg
TThhee nnoonn--iinnssuullaatteedd ppaarrttss ooff tthhee
ccaabbllee cclliippss mmuusstt nnoott ttoouucchh oonnee
aannootthheerr oonn aannyy aaccccoouunntt.. FFuurrtthheerr--
mmoorree tthhee jjuummppeerr ccaabbllee aattttaacchheedd ttoo
tthhee bbaatttteerryy ppoossiittiivvee tteerrmmiinnaall mmuusstt
nnoott ccoommee iinnttoo ccoonnttaacctt wwiitthh eelleeccttrrii--
ccaallllyy ccoonndduuccttiivvee vveehhiiccllee ppaarrttss
ddaannggeerr ooff sshhoorrtt cciirrccuuiitt!!
RRoouuttee tthhee jjuummppeerr ccaabblleess ssoo tthhaatt
tthheeyy ccaannnnoott ccoommee iinnttoo ccoonnttaacctt
wwiitthh rroottaattiinngg ppaarrttss iinn tthhee eennggiinnee
ccoommppaarrttmmeenntt..
DDoo nnoott ssttaanndd wwiitthh yyoouurr ffaaccee oovveerr
tthhee bbaatttteerryy ddaannggeerr ooff aacciidd bbuurrnnss!!
KKeeeepp ssoouurrcceess ooff iiggnniittiioonn ((nnaakkeedd
ffllaammeess,, bbuurrnniinngg cciiggaarreetttteess eettcc..))
wweellll aawwaayy ffrroomm tthhee bbaatttteerryy ddaann--
ggeerr ooff eexxpplloossiioonn!!
Start the engine as described in the
“Starting engine” section.
If the engine does not start at once,
stop using starter after 10 seconds, wait
about half a minute and then try again.
WWiitthh eennggiinnee rruunnnniinngg,, ddiissccoonnnneecctt
ccaabblleess iinn rreevveerrssee sseeqquueennccee ttoo tthhee
ccoonnnneeccttiioonn..
A
B
X
1.
2. 3.
4.
B1H-236C
IF AND WHEN–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
3.89
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
GGeenneerraall nnootteess
Check whether there are any local traffic
regulations concerning the towing of vehi-
cles.
The tow-rope should be slightly elastic
to reduce the risk of damage to both vehi-
cles. It is advisable to use synthetic fibre
ropes, or ropes of similar elastic material.
It is however safer to use a towing bar!
Avoid excessive towing effort and do not
jerk. During towing operations on other
than surfaced roads there is always the
danger that the attachment points will be
overloaded and damaged.
BBeeffoorree ttrryyiinngg ttoo ttooww ssttaarrtt,, aann aatttteemmpptt
sshhoouulldd bbee mmaaddee ttoo ssttaarrtt uussiinngg tthhee
bbaatttteerryy ooff aannootthheerr vveehhiiccllee sseeee pprreevvii--
oouuss ppaaggee..
When using a tow-rope the driver of the
towing vehicle must engage the clutch
very gently when moving off and changing
gear.
The driver of the vehicle being towed
must ensure that the tow-rope is always
taut.
The emergency lights must be switched
on in both vehicles unless local regula-
tions differ.
Turn ignition on so that the steering
wheel is free and the turn signals, horn,
and, if necessary, the windscreen wiper
and washer can be used.
As the brake servo only works when the
engine is running, considerably more
pressure is required on the brake pedal
when the engine is not running.
More force than usual will be required
to turn the steering wheel as the power
assisted steering does not work when
engine is not running.
When there is no lubricant in the man-
ual or automatic gearbox, the vehicle may
only be towed with driving wheels lifted.
A tow-rope or a towing bar must only be
applied at the following points:
TTooww ssttaarrtt//ttoowwiinngg
3.90
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– IF AND WHEN
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
FFrroonntt ttoowwiinngg eeyyee
To be able to tow the vehicle, the right-
hand cover in the lower part of the front
bumper must be removed first.
TToo rreemmoovvee tthhee ccoovveerr
insert the flat part
of a screwdriver, as in the illustration,
carefully lever off and remove the cover.
Screw in the towing eye which is located
in the vehicle’s tool box. Turn the eye
ttoo
tthhee lleefftt
with the wheel spanner until the
eye is perfectly screwed in.
To remove the towing eye, turn it to the
right with the wheel spanner. Place it in
its housing, inside the vehicle’s tool box.
TToo ppllaaccee tthhee ccoovveerr
put it in its housing
and engage it by hitting it lightly with your
hand.
NNoottee
The towing eye needs to be carried in the
vehicle at all times.
LEO-037TO8-049
IF AND WHEN –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
3.91
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
RReeaarr ttoowwiinngg eeyyee
To tow the vehicle first remove the cover
on the lower right of the rear bumper.
TToo rreemmoovvee ccoovveerr
insert your fingers in
the holes located on the lower part and
pull.
Then you can use the eye for towing, as it
is in an easily visible position.
TToo rreeppllaaccee tthhee ccoovveerr
place it in its hous-
ing, facing first the lower flange and then
the two upper clips. Then place the cover
by gently hitting the perimeter with your
hand.
LEO-040 LEO-041
3.92
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– IF AND WHEN
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
RReeaarr ttoowwiinngg eeyyee ((ssppoorrttss vveerrssiioonn))
RReemmoovvee
Firmly pull the cover down and backwards
in the direction of the arrow by inserting
your finger into the lower hole
AA
.
CClloossee
First insert the flanges
11
into their hous-
ings
22
. Gently press the edges of the
cover with your hand until it is perfectly in
place.
A
LEO-042
1
2
LEO-043
IF AND WHEN ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
3.93
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
TTooww ssttaarrttiinngg
IItt iiss nnoott aaddvviissaabbllee ttoo ttooww ssttaarrtt aa vveehhii--
ccllee.. WWee rreeccoommmmeenndd tthhee uussee ooff
aannootthheerr vveehhiicclleess bbaatttteerryy.. CCoonnssuulltt tthhee
""EEmmeerrggeennccyy ssttaarrttiinngg"" cchhaapptteerr..
There are various reasons why a vehicle
sshhoouulldd nnoott bbee
tow started:
When towing there is a danger of collid-
ing with the towed vehicle.
IInn vveehhiicclleess wwiitthh aa ppeettrrooll eennggiinnee,,
ffuueell mmaayy aaccccuummuullaattee iinn tthhee ccaattaa--
llyyssttss
11))
aanndd ccaauussee ddaammaaggee..
TThhee ffoolllloowwiinngg ppooiinnttss mmuusstt bbee nnootteedd
bbyy tthhee ddrriivveerr ooff tthhee mmaannuuaall ggeeaarr vveehhii--
ccllee bbeeiinngg ttooww ssttaarrtteedd::
Before moving off, engage
22nndd
or
33rrdd
gear, depress and hold clutch.
Switch ignition on.
Once both vehicles are moving, release
the clutch.
As soon as engine starts, depress
clutch and move gear lever into neutral to
avoid running into the towing vehicle.
FFoorr tteecchhnniiccaall rreeaassoonnss ttooww ssttaarrttiinngg aa
vveehhiiccllee wwiitthh aann aauuttoommaattiicc ggeeaarr bbooxx iiss
nnoott ppoossssiibbllee..
1)
Does not apply to vehicles with Diesel engine.
TToowwiinngg
WWhheenn ttoowwiinngg
vehicles with an
aauuttoo--
mmaattiicc ggeeaarrbbooxx
, the following points must
be noted in addition to the details on the
previous page:
Selector lever at
NN
.
Do not have the vehicle towed faster
than 30 mph (50 km/h).
Do not tow further than 30 miles
(50 kilometres).
If the vehicle has to be towed long dis-
tances it must be lifted at the front.
Reason: When the engine is not running,
the gearbox oil pump is not working and
the gearbox is not adequately lubricated
for high speeds or long distances.
With a breakdown vehicle the vehicle
may only be suspended at the front.
Reason: If given a rear suspended tow,
the drive shafts turn backwards. The plan-
etary gears in the automatic gearbox then
turn at such high speeds that the gearbox
will be severely damaged in a short time.
3.94
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– IF AND WHEN
TIPS AND MAINTENANCE
VVeerrssiioonnss wwiitthh ffoouurr--wwhheeeell ddrriivvee
MMaannuuaall ggeeaarrbbooxx
Like any other vehicle, this vehicle can be
towed with a bar or a tow rope.
The vehicle can also be towed by a tow
truck with a raised front or rear axis.
With this towing procedure:
you should never exceed 50 km/h
nor
should you drive more than 50 km.
If it is not possible to tow the car or if
the car needs to be towed for more than
50 km, suitable transportation arrange-
ments need to be made.
GENERAL NOTES
General considerations on
technical data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
WEIGHTS AND MEASUREMENTS
Fixing points for tow bar* . . . . . . . 4.4
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION DATA
Vehicle identification data . . . . . . 4.5
ENGINE DATA
1.4 16V 55 kW petrol engine . . . . 4.7
1.6 75 kW petrol engine . . . . . . . 4.8
1.6 16V 77 kW petrol engine . . . . 4.9
1.8 20V 92 kW petrol engine . . . 4.10
1.8 20V 92 kW (automatic
gearbox) petrol engine . . . . . . . . 4.11
Four-wheel drive 1.8 20V 132 kW
(6-speed) petrol engine . . . . . . . 4.12
1.8 20VT 132 kW (6-speed)
petrol engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13
2.0 136 kW petrol engine . . . . . 4.14
Four-wheel drive 2.8 VR6 150 kW
petrol engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.15
1.9 TDI 66 kW Diesel engine . . . 4.16
1.9 TDI 74 kW Diesel engine . . . 4.17
1.9 TDI 81 kW Diesel engine . . . 4.18
1.9 TDI 96 kW Diesel engine . . . 4.19
1.9 TDI 110 kW (6-speed)
Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.20
TECHNICAL DATA
Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.21
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.21
Tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.21
TECHNICAL DATA ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
4.1
INDEX
UUnnlleessss ootthheerrwwiissee iinnddiiccaatteedd,, aallll tteecchh--
nniiccaall ddeettaaiillss pprroovviiddeedd bbeellooww aappppllyy ttoo
vveehhiicclleess wwiitthh ssttaannddaarrdd ffiittttiinnggss..
TThheessee vvaalluueess mmaayy bbee ddiiffffeerreenntt ffoorr ssppee--
cciiaall vveehhiicclleess oorr vveehhiicclleess ddeessttiinneedd ffoorr
ootthheerr ccoouunnttrriieess..
PPlleeaassee bbeeaarr iinn mmiinndd tthhaatt tthhee ddaattaa iinn
tthhee ccaarrss ooffffiicciiaall ddooccuummeennttss ttaakkeess
pprreecceeddeennccee..
EEnnggiinnee ddaattaa
TThhee eennggiinnee ffiitttteedd iinn yyoouurr vveehhiiccllee iiss
iinnddiiccaatteedd iinn tthhee ddaattaa sshheeeett iinncclluuddeedd
iinn tthhee IInnssppeeccttiioonn aanndd MMaaiinntteennaannccee
PPllaann aanndd iinn tthhee ccaarrss ooffffiicciiaall ddooccuu--
mmeennttss..
PPeerrffoorrmmaannccee
These values were calculated without
extra equipment reducing performance,
such as air conditioning, mud flaps, extra
wide tyres, etc.
FFuueell CCoonnssuummppttiioonn
The consumption and emission levels
were calculated using the 93/116/CE
measuring standards and take into
account the true free-standing weight of
the vehicle (weight category). To measure
the fuel consumption the vehicle is tested
in two different cycles on a rolling bench
under the following conditions:
TToowwnn ddrriivviinngg
is measured from a cold
start of the engine. Then, driving condi-
tions similar to those of in-town driving
are simulated.
IInntteerrcciittyy ddrriivviinngg
the car is accelerated
and braked in all gears, just as in normal
driving. The driving speed varies between
0 and 120 km/h.
TToottaall ccoonnssuummppttiioonn
is based on a bal-
anced average of 37% of town driving and
63% of intercity driving.
CCOO
22
eemmiissssiioonn lleevveellss
are obtained
from the exhaust fumes of the vehicles
tested in town and intercity driving on a
rolling belt. These fumes are then
analysed and the CO
2
emission levels are
obtained, among other values.
NNootteess
The consumption and emission levels
given in the following tables are correct for
unloaded vehicles with basic fittings.
If there are extra fittings, the empty weight
will increase and, as a result, the weight
category, which may slightly increase the
consumption and CO
2
levels. Consult a
Technical Service Centre to find out the
exact specifications of your vehicle.
Driving style, road and traffic condi-
tions, weather conditions and the condi-
tion of the vehicle will, in practice, pro-
duce consumption levels different to
those indicated.
WWeeiigghhttss
NNoottee
These weights are valid for European
Union vehicles. Vehicles for other coun-
tries may have other weights. At all times
it should be taken into account that the
data given with the official vehicle docu-
ment prevails.
4.2
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– GENERAL NOTES
TECHNICAL DATA
GGeenneerraall ccoonnssiiddeerraattiioonnss oonn tteecchhnniiccaall ddaattaa
GENERAL NOTES ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
4.3
TECHNICAL DATA
WWaarrnniinngg
TThhee mmaaxxiimmuumm aauutthhoorriizzeedd llooaadd
aanndd tthhee llooaadd oonn tthhee aaxxllee mmuusstt
nneevveerr bbee eexxcceeeeddeedd.. SSeeee ttaabblleess oonn
tthhee ffoolllloowwiinngg ppaaggeess..
IItt mmuusstt bbee rreemmeemmbbeerreedd tthhaatt
wwhheenn ttrraannssppoorrttiinngg hheeaavvyy oobbjjeeccttss,,
tthhee cceennttrree ooff ggrraavviittyy iiss ddiissppllaacceedd..
FFoorr tthhiiss rreeaassoonn,, ssppeeeedd aanndd ddrriivviinngg
sshhoouulldd bbee aaddjjuusstteedd aaccccoorrddiinnggllyy..
WWhheenn llooaaddiinngg lluuggggaaggee aallwwaayyss
eennssuurree tthhaatt nnoo lloooossee oobbjjeeccttss wwiillll
ffllyy ttoowwaarrddss tthhee ffrroonntt ooff tthhee vveehhiiccllee
iinn tthhee eevveenntt ooff sshhaarrpp bbrraakkiinngg.. IIff
nneecceessssaarryy uussee tthhee llaasshhiinngg rriinnggss**
pprroovviiddeedd..
TTyyrree pprreessssuurree
The pressure values given here are for
cold tyres do not reduce the high pres-
sure of warm tyres.
WWaarrnniinngg
TTyyrree pprreessssuurree iiss ooff ggrreeaatt iimmppoorr--
ttaannccee,, ppaarrttiiccuullaarrllyy aatt hhiigghh ssppeeeeddss,,
aanndd sshhoouulldd bbee cchheecckkeedd aatt lleeaasstt
oonnccee aa mmoonntthh..
TTooww llooaaddss
SSuuppppoorrtt llooaaddss
The
mmaaxxiimmuumm
authorised load on the
ball bar of the ball joint of the towing sys-
tem is 75 kg.
The minimum support load must be 4% of
the real tow load. However it need not be
more than 25 kg. You should use the full
authorised load available to you.
NNootteess
These weights are valid for European
Union vehicles. Vehicles for other coun-
tries may take other weights. At all times
it should be taken into account that the
data given with the official vehicle docu-
ments prevails.
FFoorr ssaaffeettyy rreeaassoonnss ddoo nnoott ddrriivvee
aabboovvee 8800 kkmm//hh,, nnoott eevveenn iinn ccoouunnttrriieess
wwhheerree ttrraavveelllliinngg aatt aa ggrreeaatteerr ssppeeeedd iiss
ppeerrmmiitttteedd..
Due to special versions of certain mod-
els and optional extras such as air condi-
tioning, sliding/tilting roof, tow bar and
other added features, the free standing
weight increases, meaning that the load
size is correspondingly reduced.
WWaarrnniinngg
DDaannggeerr ooff aacccciiddeenntt!!
WWee rreeccoommmmeenndd tthhaatt yyoouu vviissiitt aa
TTeecchhnniiccaall SSeerrvviiccee CCeennttrree ffoorr tthhee
rreettrrooffiittttiinngg ooff aa ttooww hhooookk..
AA
= 4 fixing points
BB
= 65 mm
CC
= 420 (empty vehicle)/
350 mm (fully loaded vehicle)
DD
= 340 mm
EE
= 552 mm
FF
= 845 mm
GG
= 1014 mm
All measurements are in mm.
NNoottee
For more details see "Trailer towing" chap-
ter.
4.4
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– WEIGHTS AND MEASUREMENTS
TECHNICAL DATA
FFiixxiinngg ppooiinnttss ffoorr ttooww bbaarr**
G
A
B
C
D
E
F
LEO-028
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION DATA ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
4.5
TECHNICAL DATA
11
– Type plate.
22
– Vehicle identification number.
33
– Engine number.
DDaattaa--ccaarrrryyiinngg aaddhheessiivvee
sticker is stuck on the inside rim of the
spare wheel or on the floor of the boot.
It carries the following information:
1 – Production control bar code.
2 – Vehicle identification number.
3 – Vehicle model number.
4 – Model/engine power.
5 – Engine and gearbox lettering.
6 – Paint code/inside finish numbers.
7 – Optional extras code numbers.
The vehicle data from numbers 2 to 7 are
also included in the maintenance and
inspection plan.
VVeehhiiccllee iiddeennttiiffiiccaattiioonn ddaattaa
B1H-116C
2
3
3
1
TO0-002
4.6
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION DATA
TECHNICAL DATA
DDaattaa--ccaarrrryyiinngg aaddhheessiivvee
A – Brand
B – Countersign for the official approval
number
C – Chassis number
D – M.A.W.
1)
E– M.A.W.
1)
of vehicle (loaded vehicle)
F–M.A.W.
1)
on front axle
G – M.A.W.
1)
on rear axle
H – Type
I Emissions coefficient
1)
MM
aximum
AA
uthorized
WW
eight
VSSZZZ 1MZWB000 149
SEAT S.A.
kg
kg
kg
kg
1-
2-
Typ
01
1100
4565096
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
TO0-003
11..44 1166VV 5555 kkWW ppeettrrooll eennggiinnee
EEnnggiinnee ddaattaa
Output kW (HP) after 1/min 55 (75)/5000
Maximum engine torque in Nm after 1/min 126/3300
Number of cylinders/Cylinder capacity in cm
3
4/1390
Compression 10.5 ± 0.3
Fuel 95 ROZ
1)
Super unleaded
2)
PPeerrffoorrmmaannccee
Maximum speed in km/h 170
Acceleration 0-80 km/h in seconds 9.6
Acceleration 0-100 km/h in seconds 14.6
FFuueell ccoonnssuummppttiioonn ((ll//110000 kkmm)) // CCOO
22
((gg//kkmm))
Town driving 9.0/216 9.1/218
Intercity driving 5.4/130 5.5/132
Total 6.7/161 6.8/163
WWeeiigghhttss
Maximum authorised weight in kg 1681
Free standing weight in driving order
3)
in kg 1236
(with driver)
Authorised load on front axle in kg 855
Authorised load on rear axle in kg 900
Authorised load on roof in kg 75
4)
TTooww wweeiigghhttss
Tow without brake on slopes of up to 12% 600 Kg
Tow with brake on slopes of up to 12% 1000 Kg
EEnnggiinnee ooiill ccaappaacciittyy
Engine oil capacity with oil filter change 3.5 l.
1)
RR
esearch-
OO
ktan-
ZZ
ahl: Measurement of the anti-explosive power of petrol.
2)
If the described fuel is not available then fuel conforming to the standard 91 ROZ
1)
lead free may be
used. For more information, see the chapter about fuel.
3)
Vehicles with basic equipment.
4)
Maximum load on roof including roof rack (see "Roof rack" chapter).
ENGINE DATA –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
4.7
TECHNICAL DATA
TECHNICAL DATA
4.8
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– ENGINE DATA
11..66 7755 kkWW ppeettrrooll eennggiinnee
EEnnggiinnee ddaattaa
Output kW (HP) after 1/min 75 (102)/5600
Maximum engine torque in Nm after 1/min 148/3800
Number of cylinders/Cylinder capacity in cm
3
4/1595
Compression 10.3 ± 0.5
Fuel 95 ROZ
1)
Super unleaded
2)
PPeerrffoorrmmaannccee
Maximum speed in km/h 189
Acceleration 0-80 km/h in seconds 7.5
Acceleration 0-100 km/h in seconds 11.3
FFuueell ccoonnssuummppttiioonn ((ll//110000 kkmm)) // CCOO
22
((gg//kkmm))
Town driving 9.9/238
Intercity driving 5.5/132
Total 7.1/170
WWeeiigghhttss
Maximum authorised weight in kg 1717
Free standing weight in driving order
3)
in kg 1272/1378
(with driver)
Authorised load on front axle in kg 880
Authorised load on rear axle in kg 900
Authorised load on roof in kg 75
4)
TTooww wweeiigghhttss
Tow without brake on slopes of up to 12% 600 Kg
Tow with brake on slopes of up to 12% 1200 Kg
EEnnggiinnee ooiill ccaappaacciittyy
Engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.8 l.
1)
RR
esearch-
OO
ktan-
ZZ
ahl: Measurement of the anti-explosive power of petrol.
2)
If the described fuel is not available then fuel conforming to the standard 91 ROZ
1)
lead free may be
used. For more information, see the chapter about fuel.
3)
Vehicles with basic equipment.
4)
Maximum load on roof including roof rack (see "Roof rack" chapter).
TECHNICAL DATA
ENGINE DATA –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
4.9
11..66 1166VV 7777 kkWW ppeettrrooll eennggiinnee
EEnnggiinnee ddaattaa
Output kW (HP) after 1/min 77 (105)/5700
Maximum engine torque in Nm after 1/min 148/4500
Number of cylinders/Cylinder capacity in cm
3
4/1598
Compression 11.5 ± 0.3
Fuel 98 ROZ
1)
Super unleaded
2)
PPeerrffoorrmmaannccee
Maximum speed in km/h 192
Acceleration 0-80 km/h in seconds 7.2
Acceleration 0-100 km/h in seconds 10.9
FFuueell ccoonnssuummppttiioonn ((ll//110000 kkmm)) // CCOO
22
((gg//kkmm))
Town driving 9.3/223 9.4/226
Intercity driving 5.5/132 5.6/134
Total 6.9/166 7.0/168
WWeeiigghhttss
Maximum authorised weight in kg 1717
Free standing weight in driving order
3)
in kg 1272
(with driver)
Authorised load on front axle in kg 880
Authorised load on rear axle in kg 900
Authorised load on roof in kg 75
4)
TTooww wweeiigghhttss
Tow without brake on slopes of up to 12% 600 Kg
Tow with brake on slopes of up to 12% 1200 Kg
EEnnggiinnee ooiill ccaappaacciittyy
Engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.5 l.
1)
RR
esearch-
OO
ktan-
ZZ
ahl: Measurement of the anti-explosive power of petrol.
2)
If the described fuel is not available then fuel conforming to the Super 95 ROZ
1)
lead free may be used.
For more information, see the chapter about fuel.
3)
Vehicles with basic equipment.
4)
Maximum load on roof including roof rack (see "Roof rack" chapter).
4.10
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– ENGINE DATA
TECHNICAL DATA
11..88 2200VV 9922 kkWW ppeettrrooll eennggiinnee
EEnnggiinnee ddaattaa
Output kW (HP) after 1/min 92 (125)/6000
Maximum engine torque in Nm after 1/min 170/4200
Number of cylinders/Cylinder capacity in cm
3
4/1781
Compression 10.3 ± 0.5
Fuel 95 ROZ
1)
Super unleaded
2)
PPeerrffoorrmmaannccee
Maximum speed in km/h 200
Acceleration 0-80 km/h in seconds 7.0
Acceleration 0-100 km/h in seconds 10.3
FFuueell ccoonnssuummppttiioonn ((ll//110000 kkmm)) CCOO
22
((gg//kkmm))
Town driving 10.8 259
Intercity driving 6.4 154
Total 8.0 192
WWeeiigghhttss
Maximum authorised weight in kg 1766
Free standing weight in driving order
3)
in kg 1321
(with driver)
Authorised load on front axle in kg 915
Authorised load on rear axle in kg 910
Authorised load on roof in kg 75
4)
TTooww wweeiigghhttss
Tow without brake on slopes of up to 12% 650 Kg
Tow with brake on slopes of up to 12% 1200 Kg
EEnnggiinnee ooiill ccaappaacciittyy
Engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.5 l.
1)
RR
esearch-
OO
ktan-
ZZ
ahl: Measurement of the anti-explosive power of petrol.
2)
If the described fuel is not available then fuel conforming to the standard 91 ROZ
1)
lead free may be
used. For more information, see the chapter about fuel.
3)
Vehicles with basic equipment.
4)
Maximum load on roof including roof rack (see "Roof rack" chapter).
ENGINE DATA ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
4.11
TECHNICAL DATA
11..88 2200VV 9922 kkWW ((aauuttoommaattiicc ggeeaarrbbooxx)) ppeettrrooll eennggiinnee
EEnnggiinnee ddaattaa
Output kW (HP) after 1/min 92 (125)/6000
Maximum engine torque in Nm after 1/min 170/4200
Number of cylinders/Cylinder capacity in cm
3
4/1781
Compression 10.3 ± 0.5
Fuel 95 ROZ
1)
Super unleaded
2)
PPeerrffoorrmmaannccee
Maximum speed in km/h 197
Acceleration 0-80 km/h in seconds 8.6
Acceleration 0-100 km/h in seconds 12.4
FFuueell ccoonnssuummppttiioonn ((ll//110000 kkmm)) CCOO
22
((gg//kkmm))
Town driving 12.1 290
Intercity driving 7.0 168
Total 8.9 214
WWeeiigghhttss
Maximum authorised weight in kg 1779
Free standing weight in driving order
3)
in kg 1334
(with driver)
Authorised load on front axle in kg 937
Authorised load on rear axle in kg 900
Authorised load on roof in kg 75
4)
TTooww wweeiigghhttss
Tow without brake on slopes of up to 12% 650 Kg
Tow with brake on slopes of up to 12% 1200 Kg
EEnnggiinnee ooiill ccaappaacciittyy
Engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.5 l.
1)
RR
esearch-
OO
ktan-
ZZ
ahl: Measurement of the anti-explosive power of petrol.
2)
If the described fuel is not available then fuel conforming to the standard 91 ROZ
1)
lead free may be
used. For more information, see the chapter about fuel.
3)
Vehicles with basic equipment.
4)
Maximum load on roof including roof rack (see "Roof rack" chapter).
4.12
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– ENGINE DATA
TECHNICAL DATA
FFoouurr--wwhheeeell ddrriivvee 11..88 2200VV 113322 kkWW ((66--ssppeeeedd)) ppeettrrooll eennggiinnee
EEnnggiinnee ddaattaa
Output kW (HP) after 1/min 132 (180)/5500
Maximum engine torque in Nm after 1/min 235/1950-5000
Number of cylinders/Cylinder capacity in cm
3
4/1781
Compression 9.5 ± 0.5
Fuel 98 ROZ
1)
Super unleaded
2)
PPeerrffoorrmmaannccee
Maximum speed in km/h 224
Acceleration 0-80 km/h in seconds 5.4
Acceleration 0-100 km/h in seconds 7.8
FFuueell ccoonnssuummppttiioonn ((ll//110000 kkmm)) CCOO
22
((gg//kkmm))
Town driving 13.1 314
Intercity driving 7.6 182
Total 9.5 228
WWeeiigghhttss
Maximum authorised weight in kg 1896
Free standing weight in driving order
3)
in kg 1471
(with driver)
Authorised load on front axle in kg 975
Authorised load on rear axle in kg 975
Authorised load on roof in kg 75
4)
TTooww wweeiigghhttss
Tow without brake on slopes of up to 12% 650 Kg
Tow with brake on slopes of up to 12% 1500 Kg
EEnnggiinnee ooiill ccaappaacciittyy
Engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.5 l.
1)
RR
esearch-
OO
ktan-
ZZ
ahl: Measurement of the anti-explosive power of petrol.
2)
If the described fuel is not available then fuel conforming to the Super 95 ROZ
1)
lead free may be used.
For more information, see the chapter about fuel.
3)
Vehicles with basic equipment.
4)
Maximum load on roof including roof rack (see "Roof rack" chapter).
ENGINE DATA ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
4.13
TECHNICAL DATA
11..88 2200VVTT 113322 kkWW ((66--ssppeeeedd)) ppeettrrooll eennggiinnee
EEnnggiinnee ddaattaa
Output kW (HP) after 1/min 132 (180)/5500
Maximum engine torque in Nm after 1/min 235/1950-5000
Number of cylinders/Cylinder capacity in cm
3
4/1781
Compression 9.5 ± 0.5
Fuel 98 ROZ
1)
Super unleaded
2)
PPeerrffoorrmmaannccee
Maximum speed in km/h 229
Acceleration 0-80 km/h in seconds 5.7
Acceleration 0-100 km/h in seconds 7.7
FFuueell ccoonnssuummppttiioonn ((ll//110000 kkmm)) CCOO
22
((gg//kkmm))
Town driving 11.8 283
Intercity driving 6.6 158
Total 8.5 204
WWeeiigghhttss
Maximum authorised weight in kg 1809
Free standing weight in driving order
3)
in kg 1364
(with driver)
Authorised load on front axle in kg 955
Authorised load on rear axle in kg 910
Authorised load on roof in kg 75
4)
TTooww wweeiigghhttss
Tow without brake on slopes of up to 12% 650 Kg
Tow with brake on slopes of up to 12% 1500 Kg
EEnnggiinnee ooiill ccaappaacciittyy
Engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.5 l.
1)
RR
esearch-
OO
ktan-
ZZ
ahl: Measurement of the anti-explosive power of petrol.
2)
If the described fuel is not available then fuel conforming to the Super 95 ROZ
1)
lead free may be used.
For more information, see the chapter about fuel.
3)
Vehicles with basic equipment.
4)
Maximum load on roof including roof rack (see "Roof rack" chapter).
4.14
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– ENGINE DATA
TECHNICAL DATA
22..00 113366 kkWW ppeettrrooll eennggiinnee
EEnnggiinnee ddaattaa
Output kW (HP) after 1/min 136 (185)/5100-6000
Maximum engine torque in Nm after 1/min 270/1800-5000
Number of cylinders/Cylinder capacity in cm
3
4/1984
Compression 10.3 ± 0.5
Fuel 98 ROZ
1)
Super unleaded
2)
PPeerrffoorrmmaannccee
Maximum speed in km/h 221
Acceleration 0-80 km/h in seconds 5.5
Acceleration 0-100 km/h in seconds 7.8
FFuueell ccoonnssuummppttiioonn ((ll//110000 kkmm)) // CCOO
22
((gg//kkmm))
Town driving 11.2/269 11.4/274
Intercity driving 6.4/154 6.6/158
Total 8.1/194 8.3/199
WWeeiigghhttss
Maximum authorised weight in kg 1904
Free standing weight in driving order
3)
in kg 1409/1516
(with driver)
Authorised load on front axle in kg 1050
Authorised load on rear axle in kg 896
Authorised load on roof in kg 75
4)
TTooww wweeiigghhttss
Tow without brake on slopes of up to 12% 700 Kg
Tow with brake on slopes of up to 12% 1400 Kg
EEnnggiinnee ooiill ccaappaacciittyy
Engine oil capacity with oil filter change 5.3 l.
1)
RR
esearch-
OO
ktan-
ZZ
ahl: Measurement of the anti-explosive power of petrol.
2)
If the described fuel is not available then fuel conforming to the Super 95 ROZ
1)
lead free may be used.
For more information, see the chapter about fuel.
3)
Vehicles with basic equipment.
4)
Maximum load on roof including roof rack (see "Roof rack" chapter).
ENGINE DATA ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
4.15
TECHNICAL DATA
FFoouurr--wwhheeeell ddrriivvee 22..88 VVRR66 115500 kkWW ppeettrrooll eennggiinnee
EEnnggiinnee ddaattaa
Output kW (HP) after 1/min 150 (204)/6200
Maximum engine torque in Nm after 1/min 270/3200
Number of cylinders/Cylinder capacity in cm
3
6/2792
Compression 10.75 ± 0.25
Fuel 98 ROZ
1)
Super unleaded
2)
PPeerrffoorrmmaannccee
Maximum speed in km/h 235
Acceleration 0-80 km/h in seconds 5.0
Acceleration 0-100 km/h in seconds 7.3
FFuueell ccoonnssuummppttiioonn ((ll//110000 kkmm)) CCOO
22
((gg//kkmm))
Town driving 15.7 377
Intercity driving 8.2 197
Total 11.0 264
WWeeiigghhttss
Maximum authorised weight in kg 2010
Free standing weight in driving order
3)
in kg 1585
(with driver)
Authorised load on front axle in kg 1030
Authorised load on rear axle in kg 1000
Authorised load on roof in kg 75
4)
TTooww wweeiigghhttss
Tow without brake on slopes of up to 12% 650 Kg
Tow with brake on slopes of up to 12% 1490 Kg
EEnnggiinnee ooiill ccaappaacciittyy
Engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.5 l.
1)
RR
esearch-
OO
ktan-
ZZ
ahl: Measurement of the anti-explosive power of petrol.
2)
If the described fuel is not available then fuel conforming to the Super 95 ROZ
1)
lead free may be used.
For more information, see the chapter about fuel.
3)
Vehicles with basic equipment.
4)
Maximum load on roof including roof rack (see "Roof rack" chapter).
4.16
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– ENGINE DATA
TECHNICAL DATA
11..99 TTDDII 6666 kkWW DDiieesseell eennggiinnee
EEnnggiinnee ddaattaa
Output kW (HP) after 1/min 66 (90)/4000
Maximum engine torque in Nm after 1/min 210/1900
Number of cylinders/Cylinder capacity in cm
3
4/1896
Compression 19.5 ± 0.5
Diesel fuel Min 49 CZ
1)
or RME
PPeerrffoorrmmaannccee
Maximum speed in km/h 180
Acceleration 0-80 km/h in seconds 8.7
Acceleration 0-100 km/h in seconds 12.7
FFuueell ccoonnssuummppttiioonn ((ll//110000 kkmm)) CCOO
22
((gg//kkmm))
Town driving 6.8 184
Intercity driving 4.3 116
Total 5.2 140
WWeeiigghhttss
Maximum authorised weight in kg 1788
Free standing weight in driving order
2)
in kg 1343
(with driver)
Authorised load on front axle in kg 945
Authorised load on rear axle in kg 905
Authorised load on roof in kg 75
3)
TTooww wweeiigghhttss
Tow without brake on slopes of up to 12% 650 Kg
Tow with brake on slopes of up to 12% 1400 Kg
EEnnggiinnee ooiill ccaappaacciittyy
Engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 l.
1)
CC
etan-
ZZ
ahl (Cetane Index) = Measurement of fuel combustion power.
2)
Vehicles with basic equipment.
3)
Maximum load on roof including roof rack (see "Roof rack" chapter).
TECHNICAL DATA
ENGINE DATA ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
4.17
11..99 TTDDII 7744 kkWW DDiieesseell eennggiinnee
EEnnggiinnee ddaattaa
Output kW (HP) after 1/min 74 (100)/4000
Maximum engine torque in Nm after 1/min 240/1800-2400
Number of cylinders/Cylinder capacity in cm
3
4/1896
Compression 19 ± 0.5
Diesel fuel Min 49 CZ
1)
or RME
PPeerrffoorrmmaannccee
Maximum speed in km/h 188
Acceleration 0-80 km/h in seconds 8.2
Acceleration 0-100 km/h in seconds 12.1
FFuueell ccoonnssuummppttiioonn ((ll//110000 kkmm)) // CCOO
22
((gg//kkmm))
Town driving 6.6/178 6.8/184
Intercity driving 4.3/116 4.4/119
Total 5.1/138 5.3/143
WWeeiigghhttss
Maximum authorised weight in kg 1813
Free standing weight in driving order
2)
in kg 1368/1441
(with driver)
Authorised load on front axle in kg 982
Authorised load on rear axle in kg 985
Authorised load on roof in kg 75
3)
TTooww wweeiigghhttss
Tow without brake on slopes of up to 12% 650 Kg
Tow with brake on slopes of up to 12% 1400 Kg
EEnnggiinnee ooiill ccaappaacciittyy
Engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 l.
1)
CC
etan-
ZZ
ahl (Cetane Index) = Measurement of fuel combustion power.
2)
Vehicles with basic equipment.
3)
Maximum load on roof including roof rack (see "Roof rack" chapter).
TECHNICAL DATA
4.18
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– ENGINE DATA
11..99 TTDDII 8811 kkWW DDiieesseell eennggiinnee
EEnnggiinnee ddaattaa
Output kW (HP) after 1/min 81 (110)/4150
Maximum engine torque in Nm after 1/min 235/1900
Number of cylinders/Cylinder capacity in cm
3
4/1896
Compression 19.5 ± 0.5
Diesel fuel Min 49 CZ
1)
or RME
PPeerrffoorrmmaannccee
Maximum speed in km/h 193
Acceleration 0-80 km/h in seconds 7.4
Acceleration 0-100 km/h in seconds 10.7
FFuueell ccoonnssuummppttiioonn ((ll//110000 kkmm)) CCOO
22
((gg//kkmm))
Town driving 6.8 184
Intercity driving 4.3 116
Total 5.2 140
WWeeiigghhttss
Maximum authorised weight in kg 1779
Free standing weight in driving order
2)
in kg 1334
(with driver)
Authorised load on front axle in kg 960
Authorised load on rear axle in kg 895
Authorised load on roof in kg 75
3)
TTooww wweeiigghhttss
Tow without brake on slopes of up to 12% 650 Kg
Tow with brake on slopes of up to 12% 1400 Kg
EEnnggiinnee ooiill ccaappaacciittyy
Engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 l.
1)
CC
etan-
ZZ
ahl (Cetane Index) = Measurement of fuel combustion power.
2)
Vehicles with basic equipment.
3)
Maximum load on roof including roof rack (see "Roof rack" chapter).
ENGINE DATA ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
4.19
TECHNICAL DATA
11..99 TTDDII 9966 kkWW DDiieesseell eennggiinnee
EEnnggiinnee ddaattaa
Output kW (HP) after 1/min 96 (130)/4000
Maximum engine torque in Nm after 1/min 310/1900
Number of cylinders/Cylinder capacity in cm
3
4/1896
Compression 19 ± 0.5
Diesel fuel Min 49 CZ
1)
or RME
PPeerrffoorrmmaannccee
Maximum speed in km/h 205
Acceleration 0-80 km/h in seconds 6.8
Acceleration 0-100 km/h in seconds 9.9
FFuueell ccoonnssuummppttiioonn ((ll//110000 kkmm)) // CCOO
22
((gg//kkmm))
Town driving 7,0/189 7,1/192
Intercity driving 4,3/116 4,5/122
Total 5,2/140 5,4/146
WWeeiigghhttss
Maximum authorised weight in kg 1813
Free standing weight in driving order
2)
in kg 1368/1441
(with driver)
Authorised load on front axle in kg 982
Authorised load on rear axle in kg 985
Authorised load on roof in kg 75
3)
TTooww wweeiigghhttss
Tow without brake on slopes of up to 12% 650 Kg
Tow with brake on slopes of up to 12% 1400 Kg
EEnnggiinnee ooiill ccaappaacciittyy
Engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 l.
1)
CC
etan-
ZZ
ahl (Cetane Index) = Measurement of fuel combustion power.
2)
Vehicles with basic equipment.
3)
Maximum load on roof including roof rack (see "Roof rack" chapter).
4.20
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––ENGINE DATA
TECHNICAL DATA
11..99 TTDDII 111100 kkWW ((66--ssppeeeedd)) DDiieesseell eennggiinnee
EEnnggiinnee ddaattaa
Output kW (HP) after 1/min 110 (150)/4000
Maximum engine torque in Nm after 1/min 320/1900
Number of cylinders/Cylinder capacity in cm
3
4/1896
Compression 18.0 ± 0.5
Diesel fuel Min 49 CZ
1)
or RME
PPeerrffoorrmmaannccee
Maximum speed in km/h 215
Acceleration 0-80 km/h in seconds 6.3
Acceleration 0-100 km/h in seconds 8.9
FFuueell ccoonnssuummppttiioonn ((ll//110000 kkmm)) CCOO
22
((gg//kkmm))
Town driving 7.2 194
Intercity driving 4.4 119
Total 5.4 146
WWeeiigghhttss
Maximum authorised weight in kg 1835
Free standing weight in driving order
2)
in kg 1390
(with driver)
Authorised load on front axle in kg 980
Authorised load on rear axle in kg 910
Authorised load on roof in kg 75
3)
TTooww wweeiigghhttss
Tow without brake on slopes of up to 12% 650 Kg
Tow with brake on slopes of up to 12% 1400 Kg
EEnnggiinnee ooiill ccaappaacciittyy
Engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 l.
1)
CC
etan-
ZZ
ahl (Cetane Index) = Measurement of fuel combustion power.
2)
Vehicles with basic equipment.
3)
Maximum load on roof including roof rack (see "Roof rack" chapter).
TECHNICAL DATA ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
4.21
TECHNICAL DATA
LLeeoonn
MMeeaassuurreemmeennttss
Length/Width 4183 mm, 1742 mm
Height at free standing weight 1439 mm
Front and rear overhang 882 mm/790 mm
783 mm
(four-wheel drive)
Wheel base 2511 mm
2518 mm (four-wheel drive)
Turning ratio 10.9 m
FFrroonntt RReeaarr
Wheel gauge
1)
1513 mm 1494 mm
1505 mm 1486 mm
1500 mm 1481 mm
CCaappaacciittiieess
Fuel tank 55 l. Reserve of 7 l.
62 l. (vehicles with four-wheel drive)
Windscreen/Headlight washer tank 2.8 l./6.2 l.
TTyyrree pprreessssuurreess
SSuummmmeerr ttyyrreess::
Tyre pressure is shown on the adhesive on the inside of the fuel cap.
WWiinntteerr ttyyrreess::
The pressure of these tyres is identical to summer tyres. Just add 0,2 bars.
1)
This data may vary depending on the type of alloy.
AA
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.52
Adjustable steering column . . . . 2.64
Adjusting mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.55
Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.78
– air recirculation. . . . . . . . . . . 2.80
– blower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.79
– controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.79
– temperature selector . . . . . . . 2.79
– ventilation (fresh air). . . . . . . 2.81
Air Bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.16/2.22
Alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.32
Anti-dazzle interior mirror. . . . . . 2.55
Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20/3.8
Anti-skidding system of the
drive wheels (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . 2.48
Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . 2.33
Anti-theft wheel bolts. . . . . . . . . 3.72
Aquaplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.62
Armrest. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.63
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.72
Attach child seat . . . . . . . . 1.15/1.30
Attaching child seats with the
ISOFIX system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.31
Automatic car washes . . . . . . . . 3.28
Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . 2.90
– notes on driving . . . . . . . . . . 2.93
– reversing lights . . . . . . . . . . . 2.92
BB
Balancing wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.61
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.46
– charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.48
– magic eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.47
– renewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.50
Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5
Boot light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.50
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.45
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7
CC
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.21
Care of paint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.29
Care of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 3.28
– alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.32
– cleaning seat belts . . . . . . . . 3.31
Catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16
Cavity preservation. . . . . . . . . . . 3.34
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.27
– locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.28
– opening. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.27
GENERAL INDEX –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
1
GENERAL INDEX
GENERAL INDEX
Central locking button . . . . . . . . 2.29
– automatic locking . . . . . . . . . 2.29
– automatic unlocking . . . . . . . 2.30
– unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.30
Cetane Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5
Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.76
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . 3.41
Changing wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.66
Changing wiper blades. . . . . . . . 2.53
Checking coolant level . . . . . . . . 3.43
Checking oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.40
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.31
Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.73
Cleaning and anti-corrosion
treatment of engine
compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.32
Cleaning the exhaust fumes. . . . 3.16
Climatronic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.85
– air circulation . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.87
– controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.86
– vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.85
Control of interior lights . . . . . . . 2.50
Coolant temperature. . . . . . . . . . . 2.6
Cooling system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42
– additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42
Cruise control system. . . . . . . . 2.101
DD
Data-carrying adhesive. . . . . . . . . 4.5
Defrosting windscreen
and side windows. . . 2.77/2.81/2.86
Diesel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5
Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7
Door, boot and window seals . . . 3.30
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.26
Drink can holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.74
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24
Driving in the winter
– care of vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . 3.28
– cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42
– defrosting windscreen and
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.30
– diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5
– engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.38
– snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.65
– windscreen washer . . . . . . . . 3.51
– winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.64
Dust and pollen filter . . . . . . . . . 3.54
EE
Economical driving. . . . . . . . . . . 3.17
Electric socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.73
Electric windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.39
– roll-back function . . . . . . . . . 2.41
Electrically adjustable mirrors . . 2.55
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL) 2.20
Electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . 2.25
2
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– GENERAL INDEX
GENERAL INDEX
Electronic Stability Program
(ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.48/3.13
Emergency starting. . . . . . . . . . . 3.87
Engine bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.35
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . 3.36
Engine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7-4.20
Engine numbe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.38
– specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.38
Engine oil additives . . . . . . . . . . 3.41
Environment
– battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.50
– brake fluids. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.45
– care of the vehicle. . . . . . . . .
3.28
– driving and reducing
exhaust fumes and noise . . .
3.17
– engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.41
– environment-friendly driving .
3.17
– fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4
purification of exhaust fumes.
3.16
– tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.61
– tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.62
– used oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.41
– used tyres
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.62
FF
Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2
Filter preheating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6
First aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.56
Fixing points for tow bar. . . . . . . . 4.4
Foot mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.65
Four-wheel drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10
Front fog lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.45
Front seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.32/2.58
– driver’s seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.58
– electrical adjustment. . . . . . . 2.60
– front passenger seat . . . . . . . 2.58
– lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . 2.59
– manual adjustment . . . . . . . . 2.59
Front towing eye. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.90
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.73
GG
Gear layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.90
Gear lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.90
General considerations on
technical data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
Glove box light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.50
HH
Hand brake . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18/2.96
Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . 2.47
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . 1.33/2.62
Headlight covering . . . . . . . . . . . 3.25
Headlight flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.49
Headlight range control . . . . . . . 2.46
Headlight washer system . . . . . . 2.52
GENERAL INDEX –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
3
GENERAL INDEX
Heated rear window . . . . . . . . . . 2.46
Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.64
Heating and ventilation . . . . . . . 2.75
– air recirculation. . . . . . . . . . . 2.76
– blower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.76
– controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.76
– temperature selector . . . . . . . 2.76
– ventilation (fresh air). . . . . . . 2.77
– vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.75
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
II
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.97
Indicators and dipped beam
lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.49
Installing a radio . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.85
Instrument lighting. . . . . . . . . . . 2.46
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.50
JJ
Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.58/3.68
Jumper cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.87
KK
Key tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23
Keys with remote control . . . . . . 2.24
Kick-down device . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.93
LL
Lashing eyes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.66
Lighting switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.45
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.45
Locking locations of the
vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.27
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.38
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . 2.65
MM
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.90
– reversing lights . . . . . . . . . . . 2.90
Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.21
Mileage clock/Trip mileage . . . . 2.11
Mirror heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.56
Mobile telephones and radio
telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.86
Multifunction indicator. . . . . . . . . 2.8
NN
Natural leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.31
OO
Octane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4
On board tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.57
PP
Parking lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.49
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.65
4
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– GENERAL INDEX
GENERAL INDEX
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4
– additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4
– quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14
RR
Radiator fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.44
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
Radio-frequency remote control
key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.36
– selective unlocking . . . . . . . . 2.37
– synchronization. . . . . . . . . . . 2.38
Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.51
Reading light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.50
Rear fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.45
Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.68
Rear shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.67
Rear towing eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.91
Rear-view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.55
Replacement keys . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23
Replacement of parts . . . . . . . . . 3.52
Reverse gear . . . . . . . . . . . 2.90/2.92
Revolutions counter . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5
Roof antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.85
Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.70
Running-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
SS
Safety for children . . . . . . . . . . . 1.25
Seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
Selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.92
Selector lever positions . . . . . . . 2.92
Service interval indicator . . . . . . 2.12
Servobrake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8
Short or long beams. . . . . . . . . . 2.49
Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.45
Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . 2.43
Snow chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.65
Spare parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.52
Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.59
Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.53
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . 2.98
– after running out of fuel . . . . 2.99
– diesel engines. . . . . . . . . . . . 2.99
– petrol engines . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.98
Stopping the engine. . . . . . . . . 2.100
Stowage box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.73
Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.45
Switches in the central console . 2.48
TT
Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.32
– unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.32
The first 1,500 km . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
Thematic index. . . . . 1.1/2.1/3.1/4.1
Tool housing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.57
GENERAL INDEX –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
5
GENERAL INDEX
Tow start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.89
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.21
– attachment points. . . . . . . . . 3.21
Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.49
Type plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5
Tyre life. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.60
Tyres. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.60
– inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . 3.60
– running-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.60
– wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . 3.62
– where the direction of rotation
is stipulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.60
UU
Undercoating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.33
Unleaded petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4
Unlocking the tank flap . . . . 2.48/3.2
VV
Vehicle identification data . . . . . . 4.5
Vehicle identification number. . . . 4.5
Vehicle wallet stowage
compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.74
Volumetric sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . 2.35
WW
Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13
– Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.22
– alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17
– anti-locking brake system
(ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20
– brake wear monitor . . . . . . . . 2.19
– brakes/hand brake . . . . . . . . 2.18
– coolant temperature/level. . . 2.15
– diagnosis / excess of
pollution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19
– drive wheels spin regulator
(TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.21
– electronic accelerator pedal
control (EPC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.22
– electronic immobilizer. . . . . . 2.19
– Electronic Stability Program
(ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.21
– engine oil pressure/level . . . 2.18
– fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16
– indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15
– main beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16
– parking light/dipped beam . . 2.21
– preheating system. . . . . . . . . 2.22
– rear fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.22
– seat belt warning lamp . . . . . 2.17
– selector lever position. . . . . . 2.16
– tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19
– trailer indicators . . . . . . . . . . 2.16
– warning lamps display
screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16
– windscreen washer water
level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20
6
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– GENERAL INDEX
GENERAL INDEX
Warning triangle. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.56
Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.28
Washing vehicle with high
pressure cleaner. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.29
Wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.62
Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.70
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.60
Wheelspin control (TCS) . . . . . . . 3.11
Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.39
Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . 3.51
– filling the container. . . . . . . . 3.51
Windscreen wipers and
washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.51
– rear windscreen. . . . . . . . . . . 2.52
– windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.51
Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.64
Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.53
GENERAL INDEX –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
7
GENERAL INDEX
SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and
models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes
regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this
reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this
current handbook.
All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of infor-
mation at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in
the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT
allows it in written form.
SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the "Copyright" Act.
All rights on changes are reserved.
This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.
© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.10.03
Inglés 1M6012003BA (09.05)
(GT9)
leon
Owner’s manual
leon
Inglés 1M6012003BA (09.05)
256


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Seat Leon at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Seat Leon in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 6,88 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

Others manual(s) of Seat Leon

Seat Leon User Manual - German - 300 pages


The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info